RADWIN 500 User Manual 5

USERMANUAL
RADWIN5000HPMPPOINTTO
MULTIPOINTBROADBANDWIRELESS
Release3.3.00
UM 5000-3300/ 05.12
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 i
RADWI N 5000 HPMP
User Manual
Not ice
This manual cont ains informat ion t hat is propriet ary t o RADWI N Lt d. (RADWI N hereaft er) . No
part of t his publicat ion may be reproduced in any form what soever wit hout prior writ t en
approval by RADWI N.
Right , t it le and int erest , all informat ion, copyright s, pat ent s, know-how, t rade secret s and
ot her int ellect ual propert y or ot her propriet ary right s relat ing t o t his manual and t o t he
RADWI N product s and any soft ware component s cont ained t herein are propriet ary product s
of RADWI N prot ect ed under int ernat ional copyright law and shall be and remain solely wit h
RADWI N.
The RADWI N name is a regist ered t rademark of RADWI N Lt d. No right , license, or int erest t o
such t rademark is grant ed hereunder, and you agree t hat no such right , license, or int erest
shall be assert ed by you wit h respect t o such t rademark.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any port ion of t he User Manual
or any ot her RADWI N document at ion or product s. You are prohibit ed from, and shall not ,
direct ly or indirect ly, develop, market , dist ribut e, license, or sell any product t hat support s
subst ant ially similar funct ionality based or derived in any way from RADWI N product s. Your
undert aking in t his paragraph shall survive t he t erminat ion of t his Agreement .
This Agreement is effect ive upon your opening of a RADWI N product package and shall
cont inue unt il t erminat ed. RADWI N may t erminat e t his Agreement upon t he breach by you of
any t erm t hereof. Upon such t erminat ion by RADWI N, you agree t o ret urn t o RADWI N any
RADWI N product s and document at ion and all copies and port ions t hereof.
For furt her informat ion cont act RADWI N at one of t he addresses under Wor l dwi de
Cont act s below or cont act your local dist ribut or.
Di scl ai mer
The paramet ers quot ed in t his document must be specifically confirmed in writ ing before t hey
become applicable t o any part icular order or cont ract . RADWI N reserves t he right t o make
alt erat ions or amendment s t o t he det ail specificat ion at it s discret ion. The publicat ion of
informat ion in t his document does not imply freedom from pat ent or ot her right s of RADWI N,
or ot hers.
Tr ademar ks
WinLink 1000 and RADWI N 2000 are t rademarks of RADWI N Lt d.
Wi ndows 2000, XP Pr o, Vi st a, Wi ndows 7 and I nt er net Expl or er are t rademarks
of Microsoft I nc.
Mozi l l a and Fi r ef ox are t rademarks of t he Mozilla Foundat ion.
Ot her product names are t rademarks of t heir respect ive manufact urers.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 ii
RADWIN Worldwide Offices
Corporate and EMEA Regional Headquarters
Corporate and EMEA Headquarters
27 Habarzel St reet
Tel Aviv, 69710
I srael
Tel: + 972.3.766.2900
Fax: + 972.3.766.2902
Email: sal es@r adwi n.com
North America Regional
Headquarters
900 Corporat e Drive
Mahwah, NJ, 07430
USA
Tel: + 1-877-RADWI N US
(+ 1-877 723-9468)
Tel: + 1-201-252-4224
Fax: + 1-201-621-8911
Email: sal esna@r adwi n.com
Cust omer Support - Nort h America:
Hours: 9 am - 6 pm EST (Mon - Fri)
Email: suppor t usa@r adwi n.com
APAC Regional Headquarters
53A, Grange Road # 15-02
Spring Grove ,249566
Singapore
Tel: + 65.6638.7864
Email: sal essg@r adwi n.com
RADWIN Regional Offices
RADWIN Brazil
Av. Chucri Zaidan, 920 9
So Paulo, 04583-904
Brazil
Tel: + 55.11.3048-4110
Email: sal esbr @r adwi n.com
RADWIN Mexico
Quint o # 20 Col El Cent inela
Mexico, DF, O4450
Mexico
Tel: + 52 (55) 5689 8970
Email: sal esmx@r adwi n.com
RADWIN Peru
Av. Ant ares 213
Lima, 33
Peru
Tel: + 511.6285105
Fax: + 511-990304095
Email: sal espe@r adwi n.com
RADWIN India
E-13,B-1 Ext n., Mohan Co-operat ive I ndust rial Est at e
New Delhi, 110 044
I ndia
Tel: + 91-11-40539178
Email: sal esi n@r adwi n.com
RADWIN Philippines
5 Bur Bank St .
Laguna, Belair, Sant a Rosa
Laguna Philippines
Tel: + 63 928 7668230
Email: sal esph@r adwi n.com
RADWIN South Africa
P.O. Box 3554, Rivonia
Johannesburg ,2128
Sout h Africa
Tel: + 27 (0)82 551 5600
RADWIN Italy and Spain
Piazza Arenella 7/ H
Napoli ,80128
I t aly
Tel: + 390815564116
Fax: + 39335433620
Email: sal esi t @r adwi n.com
RADWIN Central America
Calle La Ca ada # 108-E
Jardines de la Hacienda
Ciudad Merliot El Salvador
Tel: + 503 2278-5628
RADWIN South East Asia
All Season Mansion
87/ 38 Wireless Road Lumpinee
Bangkok ,10330
Thailand
Tel: + 66811707503
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 iii
Regul at or y Compl i ance
Gener al Not e
This syst em has achieved Type Approval in various count ries around t he world. This means
t hat t he syst em has been t est ed against various local t echnical regulat ions and found t o
comply. The frequency bands in which t he syst em operat es may be unlicensed and in t hese
bands, t he syst em can be used provided it does not cause int erference.
FCC - Compl i ance
This equipment has been t est ed and found t o comply wit h t he limit s for a Class B digit al
device, pursuant t o Part 15 of t he FCC Rules. These limit s are designed t o provide reasonable
prot ect ion against harmful int erference in a resident ial inst allat ion. This equipment generat es,
uses and can radiat e radio frequency energy and, if not inst alled and used in accordance wit h
t he inst ruct ions, may cause harmful int erference t o radio communicat ions. However, t here is
no guarant ee t hat int erference will not occur in a part icular inst allat ion. I f t his equipment
does cause harmful int erference t o radio or t elevision recept ion, which can be det ermined by
t urning t he equipment off and on, t he user is encouraged t o t ry t o correct t he int erference by
one or more of t he following measures:
Reorient or relocat e t he receiving ant enna.
I ncrease t he separat ion bet ween t he equipment and receiver.
Connect t he equipment int o an out let on a circuit different from t hat t o which t he
receiver is connect ed.
Consult t he dealer or an experienced radio/ TV t echnician for help.
Changes or modificat ions t o t his equipment not expressly approved by t he party responsible
for compliance could void t he user's aut hority t o operat e t he equipment .
War ni ng
I t is t he responsibilit y of t he inst aller t o ensure t hat when using t he out door
ant enna kit s in t he Unit ed St at es (or where FCC rules apply) , only t hose
ant ennas cert ified wit h t he product are used. The use of any ant enna ot her
t han t hose cert ified wit h t he product is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47
CFR part 15.204.
War ni ng
I t is t he responsibility of t he inst aller t o ensure t hat when configuring t he
radio in t he Unit ed St at es (or where FCC rules apply), t he Tx power is set
according t o t he values for which t he product is cert ified. The use of Tx
power values ot her t han t hose, for which t he product is cert ified, is
expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15.204.
Caut i on
Out door unit s and ant ennas should be inst alled ONLY by experienced
inst allat ion professionals who are familiar wit h local building and safety
codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by t he appropriat e
government regulat ory aut horit ies. Failure t o do so may void t he product
warranty and may expose t he end user or t he service provider t o legal and
financial liabilit ies. Resellers or dist ribut ors of t his equipment are not liable
for inj ury, damage or violat ion of regulat ions associat ed wit h t he inst allat ion
of out door unit s or ant ennas. The inst aller should configure t he out put
power level of ant ennas according t o count ry regulat ions and ant enna type.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 iv
I ndoor Unit s comply wit h part 15 of t he FCC rules. Operat ion is subj ect t o t he following t wo
condit ions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful int erference.
(2) These devices must accept any int erference received, including int erference t hat may
cause undesired operat ion.
Canadi an Emi ssi on Requi r ement s f or I ndoor Uni t s
This Class B digit al apparat us complies wit h Canadian I CES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Chi na MI I
Operat ion of t he equipment is only allowed under China MI I 5.8GHz band regulat ion
configurat ion wit h EI RP limit ed t o 33 dBm (2 Wat t ).
I ndi a WPC
Operat ion of t he equipment is only allowed under I ndia WPC GSR-38 for 5.8GHz band
regulat ion configurat ion.
Unr egul at ed
I n count ries where t he radio is not regulat ed t he equipment can be operat ed in any regulat ion
configurat ion, best result s will be obt ained using Universal regulat ion configurat ion.
Saf et y Pr act i ces
Applicable requirement s of Nat ional Elect rical Code ( NEC), NFPA 70; and t he Nat ional
Elect rical Safet y Code, ANSI / I EEE C2, must be considered during inst allat ion.
NOTES:
1. A Primary Prot ect or is not required t o prot ect t he exposed wiring as long as t he exposed
wiring lengt h is limit ed t o less t han or equal t o 140 feet , and inst ruct ions are provided t o
avoid exposure of wiring t o accident al cont act wit h light ning and power conduct ors in
accordance wit h NEC Sect ions 725-54 (c) and 800-30.
I n all ot her cases, an appropriat e List ed Primary Prot ect or must be provided. Refer t o Art icles
800 and 810 of t he NEC for det ails.
2. For prot ect ion of ODU against direct light ning st rikes, appropriat e requirement s of NFPA
780 should be considered in addit ion t o NEC.
3. For Canada, appropriat e requirement s of t he CEC 22.1 including Sect ion 60 and addit ional
requirement s of CAN/ CSA-B72 must be considered as applicable.
War ni ng
Where Out door unit s are configurable by soft ware t o Tx power values
ot her t han t hose for which t he product is cert ified, it is t he responsi-
bility of t he Professional I nst aller t o rest rict t he Tx power t o t he cert i-
fied limit s.
This product was t est ed wit h special accessories - indoor unit (I DU or
PoE), FTP CAT-5e shielded cable wit h sealing gasket , 10 AWG
grounding cable - which must be used wit h t he unit t o insure compli-
ance.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 v
Brief
Table of Cont ent s
Part 1: Basic Installation
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
Chapter 3 Hardware Installation
Part 2: Sector Installation
Chapter 4 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager
Chapter 5 Installing the Sector
Part 3: Sector Management
Chapter 6 Managing the Sector
Chapter 7 Direct HSU Configuration
Chapter 8 Bringing Up a Mobility Sector
Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Part 4: Site Synchronization
Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization
Chapter 11 Using the RADWIN GSU
Part 5: Advanced Installation Topics
Chapter 12 Software Upgrade
Chapter 13 VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 5000 HPMP
Chapter 14 False Radar Mitigation Facilities
Chapter 15 FCC/IC DFS Considerations
Chapter 16 Quality of Service
Part 6: Field Installation Topics
Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation
Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines
Chapter 19 Link Budget Calculator
Chapter 20 Spectrum View
Chapter 21 Using the Web Interface
Part 7: Product Reference
Appendix A Technical Specifications
Appendix B Wiring Specifications
Appendix C MIB Reference
Appendix D RF Exposure
Appendix E Setting Antenna Parameters
Appendix F Regional Notice: French Canadian
Index
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 vi
Full
Table of Cont ent s
Part 1: Basic Installation
Chapter 1 Introduction
Welcome t o RADWI N 5000 HPMP! ............................................................... 1-1
RADWI N 5000 HPMP Highlight s.................................................................... 1-1
Some Terminology ...................................................................................... 1-2
What s New in Release 3.3.00 ...................................................................... 1-2
The RADWI N Manager ................................................................................. 1-5
Convent ions Used in t his Manual .................................................................. 1-6
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
Planning t he Sect or Sit e............................................................................... 2-1
The Sit e Survey........................................................................................... 2-1
St age 1: Preliminary Survey ......................................................................... 2-2
St age 2: Physical Survey .............................................................................. 2-3
St age 3: RF Survey...................................................................................... 2-4
RF Planning for Dense I nst allat ions and Collocat ed Sit es ................................ 2-4
Chapter 3 Hardware Installation
Safet y Pract ices........................................................................................... 3-1
Package Cont ent s........................................................................................ 3-2
Addit ional Tools and Mat erials Required ...................................................... 3-11
Hardware I nst allat ion Sequence ................................................................. 3-12
Out door inst allat ion ................................................................................... 3-13
Aligning HSUs t o a HBS.............................................................................. 3-20
Part 2: Sector Installation
Chapter 4 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager
What we will do here................................................................................... 4-1
I nst alling t he RADWI N Manager Applicat ion .................................................. 4-1
Get t ing St art ed wit h t he RADWI N Manager ................................................... 4-3
The RADWI N Manager log-on Concept .......................................................... 4-6
Log-on Errors and Caut ions.......................................................................... 4-8
Three Sect or Display Views .......................................................................... 4-9
Cont inuing wit h our Example Sect or ........................................................... 4-13
Exploring t he RADWI N Manager Main Window - HBS................................... 4-16
Exploring t he RADWI N Manager Main Window - HSU................................... 4-27
Logging on t o a HSU ................................................................................. 4-27
Set t ing RADWI N Manager Pref erences ........................................................ 4-30
What Comes Next ?.................................................................................... 4-34
Chapter 5 Installing the Sector
Scope of t his Chapt er .................................................................................. 5-1
Concept s .................................................................................................... 5-1
Working wit h Nomadic HSUs ........................................................................ 5-2
Workflow .................................................................................................... 5-2
Default RADWI N 5000 HPMP Set t ings ........................................................... 5-3
Configuring t he Sect or out of t he Box - I P Addresses ..................................... 5-6
Configuring a fixed HSU From t he HBS........................................................ 5-16
Conf iguring a nomadic HSU From t he HBS .................................................. 5-21
Regist ering a fixed HSU for service ............................................................. 5-23
Regist ering a nomadic HSU for service........................................................ 5-27
Regist ering t he HSUs for Service ................................................................ 5-31
Choosing Diversit y Ant enna Mode During Regist rat ion.................................. 5-31
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 vii
Deact ivat ing t he HBS................................................................................. 5-31
Deregist ering an HSU ................................................................................ 5-32
Where has my HSU gone?.......................................................................... 5-33
Saving t he HBS Set t ings for Reuse as a Templat e ........................................ 5-33
Creat ing Nomadic Ent ries for a Sect or from a HBS Templat e ........................ 5-33
Part 3: Sector Management
Chapter 6 Managing the Sector
Configuring a HBS....................................................................................... 6-1
HSU Connect ion Table ............................................................................... 6-20
Configuring an HSU from t he HBS Main Window .......................................... 6-21
Replacing an HSU...................................................................................... 6-32
Updat ing HSU Services .............................................................................. 6-34
Suspending an HSU................................................................................... 6-34
Changing t he Sect or Band.......................................................................... 6-35
Configurat ion wit h Telnet ........................................................................... 6-42
Chapter 7 Direct HSU Configuration
Configuring an HSU..................................................................................... 7-1
Chapter 8 Bringing Up a Mobility Sector
Concept s .................................................................................................... 8-1
What You Need ........................................................................................... 8-2
Get t ing St art ed ........................................................................................... 8-2
Preparing t he HBS....................................................................................... 8-3
Regist ering mobile HSUs.............................................................................. 8-6
Saving t he HBS Set t ings for Reuse as a Templat e ........................................ 8-10
Creat ing a Sect or from a HBS Templat e ...................................................... 8-10
Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Ret rieving Link I nformat ion (Get Diagnost ics) ................................................ 9-1
Link Compat ibilit y ........................................................................................ 9-4
Throughput Checking .................................................................................. 9-5
Recent Event s............................................................................................. 9-7
Performance Monit oring............................................................................... 9-9
RADWI N Manager Traps ............................................................................ 9-14
Act ive Alarms............................................................................................ 9-15
Ot her Diagnost ic Aids ................................................................................ 9-16
Part 4: Site Synchronization
Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization
Scope of t his Chapt er ................................................................................ 10-1
What is Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion?............................................................. 10-1
Hardware I nst allat ion ................................................................................ 10-3
ODU/ HSS Unit Connect ion Pinout ............................................................... 10-6
Radio Frame Pat t ern (RFP) ......................................................................... 10-6
Sect or Configurat ion and HSS .................................................................... 10-8
Chapter 11 Using the RADWIN GSU
What is it for ............................................................................................. 11-1
RADWI N GSU Funct ionalit y ........................................................................ 11-1
Typical GSU Scenarios ............................................................................... 11-1
GSU Redundancy ...................................................................................... 11-3
RADWI N GSU Kit Cont ent s......................................................................... 11-4
RADWI N GSU I nst allat ion........................................................................... 11-4
GSU Monit oring and Diagnost ics............................................................... 11-15
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 viii
GSU Telnet Support ................................................................................. 11-15
Soft ware Updat e for GSUs........................................................................ 11-16
Part 5: Advanced Installation Topics
Chapter 12 Software Upgrade
What is t he Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y?......................................................... 12-1
Upgrading an I nst alled Sect or .................................................................... 12-2
Downgrading HSU Soft ware ....................................................................... 12-5
Chapter 13 VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 5000 HPMP
VLAN Tagging - Overview .......................................................................... 13-1
Requirement s............................................................................................ 13-1
VLAN Tagging ........................................................................................... 13-1
VLAN Configurat ion Using t he RADWI N Manager ......................................... 13-5
Chapter 14 False Radar Mitigation Facilities
Who needs it ............................................................................................ 14-1
DFS and False Radar Mit igat ion .................................................................. 14-1
Configuring False Radar Mit igat ion.............................................................. 14-2
FCC/ I C Considerat ions ............................................................................... 14-3
Chapter 15 FCC/IC DFS Considerations
FCC 5.4GHz Device Regist rat ion ................................................................. 15-1
Regist ering t he Device ............................................................................... 15-1
TDWR Table ............................................................................................. 15-5
Chapter 16 Quality of Service
Prerequisit es ............................................................................................. 16-1
QoS - Overview ......................................................................................... 16-1
Set t ing up QoS.......................................................................................... 16-1
Part 6: Field Installation Topics
Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation
ODU Mount ing Kit Cont ent s........................................................................ 17-1
Mount ing an ODU on a Pole ....................................................................... 17-2
Mount ing an ODU on a Wall ....................................................................... 17-3
Mount ing a Small Form Fact or HSU............................................................. 17-4
Mount ing an Ext ernal Ant enna ................................................................... 17-5
Mount ing a Connect orized ODU Horizont ally ................................................ 17-5
Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines
Grounding for Ant enna Cable ..................................................................... 18-1
Grounding for I ndoor/ Out door Unit s ........................................................... 18-2
The RADWI N Light ning Prot ect ion Kit ......................................................... 18-3
Using Light ning Prot ect ors and Grounding................................................... 18-3
Mount ing RADWI N Light ing Prot ect ion unit ................................................. 18-6
I nt ernal ESD Prot ect ion circuit s .................................................................. 18-7
Chapter 19 Link Budget Calculator
Overview .................................................................................................. 19-1
Calculat ions .............................................................................................. 19-2
About t he Fresnel Zone.............................................................................. 19-3
Running t he Link Budget Calculat or ........................................................... 19-5
Chapter 20 Spectrum View
What is Spect rum View .............................................................................. 20-1
Who needs it ............................................................................................ 20-1
Two Ways t o Run Spect rum View ............................................................... 20-1
Where is t he Spect rum View Dat a st ored .................................................... 20-2
Spect rum View Main Window: HBS............................................................. 20-2
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 ix
Spect rum View Display Funct ion But t ons..................................................... 20-5
Running Spect rum View from t he HBS........................................................ 20-6
Running Spect rum View from a HSU........................................................... 20-8
Zooming in and out ................................................................................. 20-10
Chapter 21 Using the Web Interface
What is it For ............................................................................................ 21-1
Who Needs it ............................................................................................ 21-1
How it Works ............................................................................................ 21-2
What it Provides........................................................................................ 21-4
Prerequisit es ............................................................................................. 21-4
Special Considerat ions Working wit h t he WI ................................................ 21-4
Logging on ............................................................................................... 21-5
HBS Management ...................................................................................... 21-6
HSU Management ................................................................................... 21-12
Part 7: Product Reference
Appendix A Technical Specifications
Scope of t hese Specificat ions ....................................................................... A-1
ODU - HBS and HSU.................................................................................... A-1
I DU-H (Aggregat ion Unit ) ............................................................................ A-4
GbE PoE Device - I ndoor, AC........................................................................ A-4
PoE Device - Out door, DC............................................................................ A-5
GSU ........................................................................................................... A-6
Light ning Prot ect or ...................................................................................... A-7
Fast Et hernet CAT-5e cable repeat er ............................................................. A-8
Ant enna Charact erist ics ............................................................................... A-9
Appendix B Wiring Specifications
ODU-PoE Cable (HBS and HSU) .................................................................... B-1
HBS/ HSS Unit Connect ion Pinout .................................................................. B-1
User Port Connect ors.................................................................................. B-2
DC Power Terminals .................................................................................... B-2
Appendix C MIB Reference
I nt roduct ion................................................................................................ C-1
I nt erface API .............................................................................................. C-1
Privat e MI B St ruct ure .................................................................................. C-2
MI B Paramet ers .......................................................................................... C-3
RADWI N Manager Traps ............................................................................ C-35
Appendix D RF Exposure
Appendix E Setting Antenna Parameters
Ant enna I ssues ........................................................................................... E-1
About Single and Dual Ant ennas................................................................... E-1
Considerat ions for Changing Ant enna Paramet ers.......................................... E-3
Appendix F Regional Notice: French Canadian
Procdures de scurit ................................................................................ F-1
I nst allat ion sur pylne et mur ....................................................................... F-2
Index
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 x
List of Figures
FI GURE 1-1 SI NGLE SECTOR BASE STATI ON.............................................................. 1-4
FI GURE 1-2 SMALL FORM FACTOR ANTENNA I N CONNECTORI ZED ODU............................. 1-4
FI GURE 1-3 HI GH GAI N I NTEGRATED ANTENNA........................................................... 1-4
FI GURE 1-4 CONNECTORI ZED ODU......................................................................... 1-4
FI GURE 1-5 I DU-H FRONT VI EW - SI NGLE CONFI GURATI ON .......................................... 1-5
FI GURE 1-6 I DU-H FRONT VI EW - DOUBLE CONFI GURATI ON ......................................... 1-5
FI GURE 3-1 ODU MOUNTI NG KI T........................................................................... 3-3
FI GURE 3-2 ODU FORM FACTORS: TOP - STANDARD ODU PACKAGE, BOTTOM - SMALL FORM FACTOR
HSU.................................................................................................................... 3-4
FI GURE 3-3 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS FOR USE WI TH RADWI N 5000 HBS - LEFT: 60 OR 90 FLAT EX-
TERNAL; RI GHT: 120 I NTEGRATED............................................................................. 3-5
FI GURE 3-4 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS FOR USE WI TH RADWI N 55XX HSU - LEFT: STANDARD I NTEGRATED;
CENTER AND RI GHT, PARABOLI C, DI FFERENT SI ZES AND GAI NS. ........................................... 3-6
FI GURE 3-5 GBE POE DEVI CE - SHOWI NG EXTRA ETHERNET PORT.................................. 3-6
FI GURE 3-6 RUGGEDI ZED DC-POE DEVI CE: I NPUT I S -20 TO -60 VDC (SI NGLE I NPUT) ..... 3-7
FI GURE 3-7 I DU-H KI T CONTENTS ......................................................................... 3-8
FI GURE 3-8 I DU-H FRONT VI EW - SI NGLE CONFI GURATI ON .......................................... 3-8
FI GURE 3-9 I DU-H FRONT VI EW - DOUBLE CONFI GURATI ON ......................................... 3-9
FI GURE 3-10 I DU-H FRONT PANEL ......................................................................... 3-9
FI GURE 3-11 I DU-H POWER CONNECTORS............................................................. 3-10
FI GURE 3-12 HSS I NTERCONNECTI ON UNI T............................................................ 3-10
FI GURE 3-13 GENERAL GSU CONFI GURATI ON.......................................................... 3-11
FI GURE 3-14 TYPI CAL HSU I NSTALLATI ON WI TH EXTERNAL ANTENNA............................ 3-13
FI GURE 3-15 RADWI N LI GHTNI NG PROTECTOR RI GHT: USI NG RADWI N LI GHTNI NG PROTECTORS3-
16
FI GURE 3-16 SI NG AN ETHERNET REPEATER WI TH LI GHTNI NG PROTECTORS..................... 3-17
FI GURE 3-21 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALI GNMENT............................................ 3-21
FI GURE 4-1 PI NGI NG THE BASE STATI ON. ................................................................. 4-5
FI GURE 4-3 EXTENDED LOG-ON WI NDOW ................................................................. 4-6
FI GURE 4-4 LOG ON WI NDOW EXPOSI NG THE USER TYPES. ........................................... 4-7
FI GURE 4-5 UNSUPPORTED DEVI CE MESSAGE............................................................. 4-8
FI GURE 4-6 UNREACHABLE DEVI CE MESSAGE ............................................................. 4-8
FI GURE 4-7 I NVALI D USER TYPE OR PASSWORD.......................................................... 4-9
FI GURE 4-8 DEFAULT SECTOR DI SPLAY - TABLE VI EW................................................ 4-10
FI GURE 4-9 SECTOR DI SPLAY - MAP VI EW .............................................................. 4-11
FI GURE 4-10 SECTOR DI SPLAY - LI ST VI EW ............................................................ 4-12
FI GURE 4-13 HBS MAI N BUTTON MENU ................................................................. 4-16
FI GURE 4-14 SECTOR STATUS PANEL..................................................................... 4-16
FI GURE 4-15 BASE STATI ON DETAI L PANEL ............................................................ 4-17
FI GURE 4-16 EVENTS LOG PANEL ......................................................................... 4-19
FI GURE 4-17 EVENTS LOG FI LTER SELECTI ON .......................................................... 4-19
FI GURE 4-18 HBS MAI N WI NDOW (REDUCED) - UP TO 32 HSUS ............................... 4-20
FI GURE 4-19 HBS MAI N WI NDOW (REDUCED) - I NDI CATI NG A PROBLEM....................... 4-20
FI GURE 4-20 HSU DI SPLAY - DETAI L..................................................................... 4-21
FI GURE 4-21 HSU DI SPLAY - CONTEXT MENU (RI GHT CLI CK) ....................................... 4-22
FI GURE 4-22 HBS MAI N WI NDOW - MAP VI EW....................................................... 4-22
FI GURE 4-23 HBS/ HSU STATUS LI GHTS................................................................ 4-23
FI GURE 4-24 NAVI GATI ON TOOL BAR .................................................................... 4-23
FI GURE 4-25 HSU STATUS BOXES - DETAI L, I NDI CATI NG PROBLEMS.............................. 4-25
FI GURE 4-26 HSU STATUS BOXES - DETAI L, NORMAL OPERATI ON. LEFT: FI XED HSU RI GHT: NOMADI C
HSU.................................................................................................................. 4-25
FI GURE 4-27 HSU DI SPLAY - CONTEXT MENU (RI GHT CLI CK). SAME AS Fi gur e 4-21 ..... 4-26
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 xi
FI GURE 4-28 HSU ON HBS DI SPLAY - EXTRACT. SCROLL RI GHT FOR MORE HSU FI ELDS ... 4-26
FI GURE 4-29 LOGGI NG ON TO A HSU ................................................................... 4-28
FI GURE 4-30 OPENI NG RADWI N MANAGER WI NDOW - HSU...................................... 4-28
FI GURE 4-31 HSU MAI N BUTTON MENU ................................................................. 4-29
FI GURE 5-1 LOGGI NG ON WI TH FACTORY DEFAULT I P ADDRESS ..................................... 5-6
FI GURE 5-2 LOGGI NG ON WI TH LOCAL CONNECTI ON .................................................. 5-7
FI GURE 5-3 MAI N WI NDOW FOR UN-CONFI GURED HBS ODU ........................................ 5-8
FI GURE 5-4 ACTI VATED HBS RECOGNI ZI NG I NSTALLED BUT UNCONFI GURED HSUS........... 5-16
FI GURE 5-7 HBS NOMADI C CONFI GURATI ON........................................................... 5-27
FI GURE 5-8 FULLY FUNCTI ONAL MI XED FI XED AND NOMADI C SECTOR - TABLE VI EW .......... 5-29
FI GURE 5-9 FULLY FUNCTI ONAL SECTOR, TWO FI XED ONE NOMADI C HSU - MAP VI EW....... 5-30
FI GURE 5-10 FULLY FUNCTI ONAL SECTOR: TWO FI XED ONE NOMADI C HSU - MAP VI EW WI TH DETAI LS
5-31
FI GURE 6-1 VLAN FOR MANAGEMENT ..................................................................... 6-7
FI GURE 6-2 SECTOR SECURI TY SETTI NGS ............................................................... 6-10
FI GURE 6-5 CHANGI NG THE COMMUNI TY STRI NG ..................................................... 6-13
FI GURE 6-6 ALTERNATI VE COMMUNI TY DI ALOG BOX ................................................. 6-14
FI GURE 6-7 DATE AND TI ME CONFI GURATI ON ......................................................... 6-15
FI GURE 6-8 CHANGE DATE AND TI ME.................................................................... 6-15
FI GURE 6-9 SETTI NG ETHERNET SERVI CES.............................................................. 6-16
FI GURE 6-10 RESTORE FACTORY SETTI NGS AND LI CENSE ACTI VATI ON .......................... 6-19
FI GURE 6-11 HSU I NTERCOMMUNI CATI ON - CONNECTI ON TABLE................................. 6-21
FI GURE 6-12 HSU CONFI GURATI ON WI NDOW (HBS) ................................................ 6-22
FI GURE 6-13 HSU CONFI GURATI ON - SETTI NG ANTENNA TYPE AND PARAMETERS............. 6-23
FI GURE 6-14 HSU CONFI GURATI ON - I P ADDRESSES ................................................ 6-24
FI GURE 6-15 UNI T 10.101 I S DOWN AND UNI T 10.1023I S AVAI LABLE AND NOT REGI STERED6-32
FI GURE 6-19 TELNET SESSI ON LOG ON TO THE HBS................................................. 6-42
FI GURE 6-20 TELNET MANAGEMENT WI NDOW - HSU................................................ 6-44
FI GURE 7-1 DI RECT OR OVER THE AI R CONNECTI ON TO A REGI STERED HSU..................... 7-2
FI GURE 7-2 DI RECT CONNECTI ON TO A STAND-ALONE HSU OUT OF THE BOX.................... 7-3
FI GURE 7-3 HSU CONFI GURATI ON - AI R I NTERFACE FOR REGI STERED HSU..................... 7-4
FI GURE 7-4 HSU CONFI GURATI ON - AI R I NTERFACE FOR STAND-ALONE HSU ................... 7-5
FI GURE 7-5 HSU CONFI GURATI ON - AI R I NTERFACE UNREGI STERED HSU ....................... 7-5
FI GURE 8-1 MOBI LE HBS AFTER I NI TI AL LOG-ON ....................................................... 8-3
FI GURE 8-2 HBS MOBI LI TY CONFI GURATI ON ............................................................ 8-4
FI GURE 9-3 TYPI CAL I NCOMPATI BLY MESSAGES FOR HSUS ON HBS DI SPLAY..................... 9-4
FI GURE 9-4 THI S HSU REQUI RES A SOFTWARE UPGRADE ............................................. 9-5
FI GURE 9-5 RECENT EVENTS: LEFT- HBS, CENTER HSU FROM HBS, RI GHT HSU DI RECT ... 9-8
FI GURE 9-6 PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG: LEFT- HBS, CENTER HSU FROM HBS, RI GHT HSU DI RECT
9-9
FI GURE 9-7 SETTI NG THE UPPER TRAFFI C THRESHOLD ............................................... 9-10
FI GURE 9-8 HBS - PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG REPORT - VALI D DATA ......................... 9-10
FI GURE 9-9 HBS - PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG REPORT - SHOWI NG I NVALI D DATA ......... 9-11
FI GURE 9-10 HSU - PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG REPORT - BOTH VALI D AND I NVALI D DATA (1 OF 3)
9-12
9-12
9-13
FI GURE 10-1 I NTERFERENCE CAUSED BY COLLOCATED UNI TS ....................................... 10-2
FI GURE 10-2 COLLOCATED UNI TS USI NG HUB SI TE SYNCHRONI ZATI ON (1) .................... 10-2
FI GURE 10-3 COLLOCATED UNI TS USI NG HUB SI TE SYNCHRONI ZATI ON (2) .................... 10-2
FI GURE 10-4 HSS I NTERCONNECTI ON UNI T............................................................ 10-3
FI GURE 10-5 HSS WI RI NG SCHEMATI C.................................................................. 10-4
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 xii
FI GURE 10-6 HSS SYNC SI GNAL PATH WI TH ODU 1 AS HSS MASTER........................... 10-4
FI GURE 10-7 CASCADI NG TWO HSS UNI TS............................................................. 10-5
FI GURE 10-8 CASCADI NG THREE HSS UNI TS........................................................... 10-5
FI GURE 10-9 RADI O FRAME PATTERN.................................................................... 10-7
FI GURE 10-10 HSS SETTI NGS WI NDOW................................................................. 10-9
FI GURE 10-11 SETTI NG HBS AS HSM OR HSC....................................................... 10-9
FI GURE 10-12 HBS AS HSM ............................................................................ 10-10
FI GURE 11-1 GSU SCENARI O - I NDEPENDENT DI STRI BUTED SI TES................................ 11-2
FI GURE 11-2 GSU SCENARI O - COMMUNI CATI NG DI STRI BUTED SI TES ........................... 11-2
FI GURE 11-3 PHASE SHI FTED TRANSMI SSI ON - PHASE SHI FT I S 1/ 2 THE RFD ................. 11-3
FI GURE 11-4 MAKE THE GSUS THE FI RST TWO COLLOCATED UNI TS.............................. 11-4
FI GURE 11-5 GENERAL GSU CONFI GURATI ON.......................................................... 11-5
FI GURE 11-6 GSU MAI N WI DOW AT STARTUP ......................................................... 11-6
FI GURE 11-7 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: SYSTEM .......................................................... 11-7
FI GURE 11-8 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: GPS SYNC UNI T ............................................... 11-8
FI GURE 11-9 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: MANAGEMENT ................................................ 11-10
FI GURE 11-10 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: I NVENTORY.................................................. 11-11
FI GURE 11-11 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: SECURI TY.................................................... 11-12
FI GURE 11-12 SETTI NG THE DATE AND TI ME FOR TRAP REPORTI NG ............................ 11-13
FI GURE 11-13 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: OPERATI ONS................................................ 11-14
FI GURE 11-14 SI TE CONFI GURATI ON: OPERATI ONS................................................ 11-15
FI GURE 12-1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE UTI LI TY - MAI N WI NDOW...................................... 12-2
FI GURE 12-5 SOFTWARE UPGRADE I N PROGRESS - NOTE THE STOP BUTTON ................... 12-4
FI GURE 12-6 SOFTWARE UPGRADE COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY..................................... 12-4
FI GURE 13-1 VLAN SCENARI OS HANDLE BY RADWI N 5000 HBS ............................... 13-2
FI GURE 13-2 SEPARATI NG CLI ENT DATA STREAMS USI NG DOUBLE TAGGI NG..................... 13-2
FI GURE 17-1 LARGE CLAMP ................................................................................ 17-1
FI GURE 17-2 SMALL CLAMP ................................................................................ 17-1
FI GURE 17-3 ARM ............................................................................................ 17-1
FI GURE 17-4 MOUNTI NG ON A POLE ..................................................................... 17-2
FI GURE 17-5 MOUNTI NG ON A WALL .................................................................... 17-3
FI GURE 17-6 RADWI N 5505 HSU - REAR AND METAL TI E ....................................... 17-4
FI GURE 17-7 MOUNTI NG ADAPTER........................................................................ 17-4
FI GURE 17-10 MOUNTED ODUS WI TH CORRECT WATER NOSE .................................. 17-6
FI GURE 17-11 I NCORRECTLY MOUNTED ODU (NO WATER NOSE ) .............................. 17-6
FI GURE 18-1 GROUNDI NG ANTENNA CABLES............................................................ 18-2
FI GURE 18-2 RADWI N LI GHTNI NG PROTECTI ON KI T................................................ 18-3
FI GURE 18-3 GROUNDI NG A TYPI CAL POLE I NSTALLATI ON........................................... 18-4
FI GURE 18-4 GROUNDI NG A TYPI CAL WALL I NSTALLATI ON .......................................... 18-5
FI GURE 18-5 ODU LI GHTNI NG PROTECTOR AND GROUNDI NG...................................... 18-5
FI GURE 18-6 LI GHTNI NG PROTECTOR AND GROUNDI NG AT BUI LDI NG ENTRY POI NT ........... 18-7
FI GURE 19-1 FRESNEL ZONE ............................................................................... 19-4
FI GURE 19-3 LI NK BUDGET WI NDOW - STARTUP ...................................................... 19-5
FI GURE 19-4 RADWI N 5000 HPMP LBC MAI N WI NDOW ........................................ 19-6
FI GURE 19-5 BAND SELECTOR ............................................................................. 19-7
FI GURE 19-6 CALCULATI ON OF DI STANCE FROM SI TE COORDI NATES............................. 19-8
FI GURE 19-7 CLI MACTI C C FACTORS..................................................................... 19-9
FI GURE 19-8 CLI MACTI C C FACTOR DESCRI PTI ON................................................... 19-10
FI GURE 19-9 WORLD MAP SHOWI NG C FACTOR CONTOURS....................................... 19-10
FI GURE 19-10 LBC - RESULTS SECTI ON .............................................................. 19-11
FI GURE 20-1 SPECTRUM VI EW DATA PANEL FOR THE HBS, READY FOR DATA .................. 20-4
FI GURE 20-2 SPECTRUM VI EW ANALYSI S COLOR CODES............................................. 20-7
FI GURE 20-3 HSU SPECTRUM ANALYSI S I N COMPLETE I SOLATI ON FROM THE SECTOR......... 20-9
FI GURE 20-4 HSU SPECTRUM ANALYSI S WI THI N THE SECTOR...................................... 20-9
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 xiii
FI GURE 21-1 WEB I NTERFACE - LOG ON ................................................................ 21-5
FI GURE 21-2 WEB I NTERFACE - MAI N WI NDOW, HBS............................................... 21-6
FI GURE 21-3 SECTOR STATUS PANEL..................................................................... 21-7
FI GURE 21-4 HSU HAYDN DEREGI STERED .............................................................. 21-7
FI GURE C-1 TOP LEVEL SECTI ONS OF THE PRI VATE MI B.............................................. C-2
FI GURE C-2 PRODUCT MI B................................................................................... C-3
FI GURE F-1 GRANDE CLAME................................................................................... F-3
FI GURE F-2 PETI TE CLAME .................................................................................... F-3
FI GURE F-3 BRAS ............................................................................................... F-3
FI GURE F-4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYLNE .................................................................... F-4
FI GURE F-5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR ........................................................................ F-5
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 xiv
List of Tables
TABLE 4-1 PC REQUI REMENTS FOR THE RADWI N MANAGER APPLI CATI ON ...................... 4-1
TABLE 4-2 PRECONFI GURED SETUP ......................................................................... 4-3
TABLE 4-3 USER TYPES, DEFAULT PASSWORDS AND FUNCTI ON ....................................... 4-7
TABLE 4-4 RADI O PLAN FOR A SMALL SECTOR ......................................................... 4-13
TABLE 4-6 HBS MAI N BUTTON BAR FUNCTI ONS........................................................ 4-16
TABLE 4-8 HSU STATUS BALL COLOR CODES........................................................... 4-21
TABLE 4-9 HBS/ HSU STATUS LI GHT COLOR CODES.................................................. 4-23
TABLE 4-10 NAVI GATI ON TOOL BAR BUTTON UNCTI ONS ............................................. 4-23
TABLE 4-11 HBS MAI N WI NDOW LI ST DI SPLAY CONTEXT MENU AND BUTTON BAR FUNCTI ONS4-27
TABLE 4-12 HSU MAI N BUTTON BAR FUNCTI ONS...................................................... 4-29
TABLE 5-1 DEFAULT SETTI NGS............................................................................... 5-3
TABLE 5-2 PARAMETER VALUES USED I N THE DEMONSTRATI ON SECTOR............................ 5-4
TABLE 6-1 HBS TELNET - DI SPLAY COMMANDS ....................................................... 6-43
TABLE 6-2 HBS TELNET - SET I MMEDI ATE COMMANDS.............................................. 6-43
TABLE 6-3 HBS TELNET - SET COMMANDS REQUI RI NG RESET ..................................... 6-43
TABLE 6-4 HSU TELNET - DI SPLAY COMMANDS....................................................... 6-44
TABLE 6-5 HSU TELNET - SET I MMEDI ATE COMMANDS ............................................. 6-44
TABLE 6-6 HSU TELNET - SET COMMANDS REQUI RI NG RESET..................................... 6-45
TABLE 9-1 GET DI AGNOSTI CS DATA AND DESCRI PTI ON ............................................... 9-1
TABLE 9-2 HBS PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG FI ELDS ................................................ 9-10
TABLE 9-3 HSU PERFORMANCE MONI TORI NG FI ELDS................................................ 9-13
TABLE 9-4 RADWI N MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES ..................................................... 9-14
TABLE 10-1 ODU/ HSS UNI T CONNECTI ON PI NOUT.................................................. 10-6
TABLE 10-2 RADI O FRAME PATTERN TABLE - RADWI N 5000 HBS............................. 10-7
TABLE 10-3 RADI O FRAME PATTERN TABLE - RADWI N 2000 .................................... 10-7
TABLE 10-4 RADI O FRAME PATTERN TABLE - WI NLI NK 1000 ..................................... 10-7
TABLE 10-5 LEGEND FOR RADI O FRAME PATTERN TABLES.......................................... 10-8
TABLE 10-6 EXTERNAL PULSE STATUS................................................................. 10-10
TABLE 12-1 SWU FI LES BY PRODUCT.................................................................... 12-3
TABLE 13-1 PORT SETTI NGS - I NGRESS DI RECTI ON................................................... 13-4
TABLE 13-2 PORT SETTI NGS - EGRESS DI RECTI ON.................................................... 13-5
TABLE 13-3 VLAN CONFI GURATI ON OPTI ONS - TAG MODE........................................ 13-8
TABLE 15-1 LATI TUDE AND LONGI TUDE LOCATI ONS OF TDWRS................................... 15-5
TABLE 16-1 DEFAULT PRI ORI TI ES AN D ALLOCATI ON BY VLAN I D AND DI FFSERV............. 16-1
TABLE 17-1 BI LL OF MATERI ALS: ODU MOUNTI NG KI T.............................................. 17-1
TABLE 17-2 MOUNTI NG ADAPTER KI T FOR RADWI N 5505 HSU................................. 17-4
TABLE 20-1 SPECTRUM VI EW ANALYSI S DI SPLAY BUTTONS FUNCTI ONALI TY.................... 20-5
TABLE 21-1 PRECONFI GURED SETUP...................................................................... 21-2
TABLE B-1 ODU-POE RJ-45 CONNECTOR PI NOUT ..................................................... B-1
TABLE B-2 HBS/ HSS UNI T CONNECTI ON PI NOUT ...................................................... B-1
TABLE B-3 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PI NOUT ....................................................... B-2
TABLE B-4 TERMI NAL BLOCK 2-PI N -48VDC............................................................. B-2
TABLE C-1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARI ABLES .......................................................... C-3
TABLE C-2 PRI VATE MI B PARAMETERS .................................................................... C-5
TABLE C-3 MI B TRAPS ...................................................................................... C-30
TABLE D-1 SAFETY DI STANCES FOR RADWI N 5000 HPMP FCC AND I C PRODUCTS ........ D-1
TABLE D-2 SAFETY DI STANCES FOR RADWI N 5000 HPMP ETSI PRODUCTS.................. D-1
TABLE E-1 MI MO - DI VERSI TY SETTI NGS................................................................. E-3
TABLE E-2 RADWI N 5000 HPMP AI R RATES .......................................................... E-3
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part1:BasicInstallation
UM50003300/05.12
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction

Welcome to RADWIN 5000 HPMP!
RADWI N 5000 HPMP delivers up t o 200Mbps and is t he ideal choice for last mile ent erprise
connect ivity and high-end applicat ions t hat demand assured performance wit h guarant eed
bandwidt h per subscriber.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP sect or base st at ion delivers up t o 200Mbps, providing t he highest end
user capacity in t he market t o best support dat a and high resolut ion video applicat ions, t oday
and t omorrow. By delivering high capacit y over a single radio unit , RADWI N solut ion saves
valuable t ower space, eases maint enance effort s and reduces t he t ot al cost of ownership per
megabit . Offering a variety of powerful SUs, RADWI N 5000 HPMP enables service capacity of
up t o 50Mbps for ent erprise cust omers.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP subscriber unit s may now be
set at fixed locat ions
nomadic - move about wit hin and across cont iguous sect ors covering a specific area
such as an airport or sport complex
mobile - set on railway carriages wit h ext remely fast hand-over across successive
t rack sect ors
RADWIN 5000 HPMP Highlights
High capacit y Sect or Base St at ion
200 Mbps aggregat e t hroughput
Et hernet connect ivity
High capacit y end user equipment - 5, 10, 20, 50Mbps
Up t o 32 Subscriber Unit s per sect or
Guarant eed SLA and capacity per Subscriber Unit
Small and const ant lat ency - 4 t o 10msec typical under full sect or load
Wide range of frequency bands - 4.9 t o 6GHz
Mobility and Nomadic funct ionalit y
Some Ter mi nol ogy Chapt er 1
Some Terminology
A Poi nt t o Mul t i poi nt net work is typically abbreviat ed t o Pt MP. The Pt MP net works
described in t his Manual are of course, radio links.
A Pt MP link consist s of at least one high Base St at i on radio linked t o several Subscr i ber
Uni t radios. The SUs are somet imes called Cust omer Pr emi ses Equi pment (CPEs). The
t erminology comes from t he field of t elephony.
The RADWI N 5000 HPMP product suit e support s considerably higher capacity t han ot her cur-
rent t echnologies (such as Wi-Max). We dist inguish bet ween generic BSs and SUs and RAD-
WI N unit s, relabeling t he lat t er, HBSs and HSUs ( H = high capacity).
The radio links are effect ed by using a sect or ant enna wit h t he HBS. The HSUs use direc-
t ional ant ennas aligned t o t he HBS.
A Sect or consist s of a HBS and a group of HSUs wit hin t he angular sect or covered by t he
HBS ant enna. A Sect or is typically 60 or 120 depending of course on t he choice of ant enna.
HBSs may be collocat ed t o provide sect orial coverage up t o 360.
The RF charact erist ics of a Sect or will be common t o each radio: Frequency (regulat ion),
band and channel bandwidt h. Adj acent Sect ors in a Pt MP net work will t ypically use different
frequencies and non-overlapping bands t o mit igat e HBS self int erference.
A HSU may be defined as f i xed, nomadi c or mobi l e.
A f i xed HSU is j ust t hat - inst alled at a fixed locat ion.
A nomadi c HSU is at t ached t o a vehicle t hat moves about wit hin a sect or and across sect ors
inside a well defined area. Service is provided when t he vehicle is st at ionary.
A mobi l e HSU provides service while t he vehicle t o which it is at t ached is moving or st at ion-
ary. The vehicle is typically a railway carriage or a ship.
Whats New in Release 3.3.00
Release 3.3.00 offers a new economical small form fact or subscriber unit , RADWI N 5505 HSU.
I t has low visual impact and a low profile for use in public st reet level inst allat ions - t ypically,
video surveillance. I t may be used eit her wit h an int egrat ed ant enna or an ext ernal dual pole
ant enna.
I n addit ion, t his release offers t he new I DU-H. The I DU-H aggregat es Et hernet t raffic for up
t o six HBSs (or ot her RADWI N ODU product s). I t delivers t heir t raffic t o t wo high speed uplink
Et hernet port s and t wo SFP port s.
A furt her addit ion t o Release 3.3.00 is t he Mobility feat ure. The Mobility feat ure is model
dependent .
Changes from release 3.2.50 include:
All HBS/ HSUs support bot h fixed and nomadic modes
Support for 32 HSUs per HBS (up from 16)
Finer t ime slot granularit y: HBSs support 64 t ime slot s (up from 16
Enhanced RADWI N Manager main window: You may display sect ors on a geographic
map supplement ing t he exist ing t able and list views
Key f eat ur es of RADWI N 5000 HPMP Chapt er 1
During a Band change, you may set t he channel bandwidt h and operat ing frequency
for t he sect or.
Key features of RADWIN 5000 HPMP
200 Mbps aggr egat e t hr oughput
Conf i gur abl e Maxi mum I nf or mat i on Rat e ( MI R) per HSU
Advanced OFDM & MI MO 2x2 f or nLOS per f or mance
Enhanced i nt er f er ence mi t i gat i on capabi l i t y
I nt er & i nt r a si t e sync t o r educe sel f i nt er f er ence
Long r ange up t o 40 km/ 25 mi l es
Dedi cat ed t r af f i c bandwi dt h al l ocat i on ensur i ng SLA & l at ency
Low l at ency min < 3ms, t ypical 4 t o 10ms
Channel bandwi dt h 5/ 10/ 20/ 40 MHz
Regul at i on - FCC/ ETSI / WPC/ MI I / Universal
Mul t i band HBSs and HSUs
Si mpl e t o depl oy
Web I nt er f ace f or sect or management
Ful l y i nt egr at ed wi t h RADWI N Legacy sol ut i ons:
Coexist s wit h RADWI N 2000 and WinLink 1000 product s
Common RADWI N Manager
Common RNMS
SFP suppor t i n t he I DU-H
Mobi l i t y and Nomadi c suppor t
RADWI N 5000 HPMP Component s Chapt er 1
RADWIN 5000 HPMP Components
RADWIN 5000 HBS High Capacity Base Station
The HBS consist s of RADWI N 5000 HBS HBS ODU, a sect or dual-
pole ant enna and a PoE device, which provides a LAN int erface t o
user equipment .
A single HBS support s up t o 16 HSUs.
Figure 1-1: Single Sect or Base St at ion
RADWIN 55xx HSU High Capacity Subscriber Units
A st andard HSU consist s of a RADWI N 55xx HSU ODU. I t may be a small form fact or (SFF)
model wit h a built in ant enna, or a regular int egrat ed or connect orized unit . The latt er should
use a dual pole ant enna for best performance.
Not e t he FCC/ I C caut i onar y not i ce on page 3-5.
Figure 1-2: Small form fact or
ant enna in connect orized ODU
Figure 1-3: High gain int egrat ed
ant enna
Figure 1-4: Connect orized ODU
The RADWI N Manager Chapt er 1
IDU-H
The I DU-H provides aggregat ion for mult iple RADWI N links and HBSs at a hub locat ion. I t
support s all RADWI N ODUs. I t feat ures -
Up t o 6 PoE I nt erfaces (PoE legacy mode / RADWI N PoE)
Up t o 25W per PoE port
2 LAN I nt erfaces 10/ 100/ 1000 Mbps; aut o-negot iat ion
SFP I nt erfaces: 2 x SFP port s of 1000 Mbps (st andard MSA)
I t is 19 rack mount ed, 1iU and half widt h.Power feeding is 44VDC - 56VDC, Dual redundant
input s t hrough st andard I DU-C type adapt ers. They may be mount ed in single or double con-
figurat ion. See for Chapt er 3 for det ails.
Figure 1-5: I DU-H front view - single configurat ion
Figure 1-6: I DU-H front view - double configurat ion
The RADWIN Manager
The RADWI N Manager is an SNMP-based management applicat ion which manages a com-
plet e sect or over a single I P address. I t can also manage HSUs separat ely.
The int uit ive, easy-t o-use RADWI N Manager has a graphical Microsoft Windows int erface.
Convent i ons Used i n t hi s Manual Chapt er 1
Conventions Used in this Manual
Notifications
Not ificat ions consist of Not es, Caut ions and Warnings.
Typographical conventions
General
Where a t erm is defined or int roduced for t he first t ime, it is shown in Bol df ace. You will
have not iced t his usage in t he Terminology sect ion above.
Software
The RADWI N Manager is a Microsoft Windows applicat ion following t he user int erface con-
vent ions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs.
Viewing and Printing
This manual is opt imized for viewing online as a PDF file. To t his end it uses an 11 point
Tahoma typeface for main t ext . Tables for most part , use 7 or 8 point font s. Here are a few
point ers for hard-copy print ing:
The t ext and t able typefaces used are large enough t o print t he manual at t wo pages
per sheet
For good legibility, use a commercial grade laser print er. A color print er is of course
best , however a monochrome print er set t o use gray-scale gives accept able result s
Not e
The purpose of a Not e is t o
Draw your at t ent ion t o somet hing t hat may not be obvious or coun-
t er-int uit ive
Emphasize a special feat ure or peculiarity of t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP
Offer an ext ernal reference for addit ional informat ion
Add a caveat t hat would not qualify as a full Caut ion or Warning (see
below)
Provide addit ional background t o what follows
Offer a recommendat ion
Highlight an indicat ion of somet hing t o wat ch out for
Advise you if an act ion has side effect s i.e. it may dist urb somet hing
else t hat would be best left undist urbed
Remind you of somet hing t hat should be kept in mind
Caut i on
A Caut i on is a not ificat ion of risk of damage t o equipment or of service
degradat ion
War ni ng
A War ni ng is a not ificat ion of risk of danger t o persons operat ing near t he
equipment
Vi ewi ng and Pr i nt i ng Chapt er 1
Bet t er quality ink j et print ers also give good out put
Chapter 2
Site Preparation
Planning the Sector Site
Overview
Sect or sit e planning consist s of a set of surveys, which must be carried out before any equip-
ment is deployed. I f for some reason, t he out come of any of t hese surveys is negat ive, HBS
or HSU re-locat ion will need t o be considered.
A Sit e Survey consist s of t hree st ages:
1. Prel i mi nary sur vey - The proposed sect or is analyzed i n t he of f i ce using a t opographic
map. You should use addit ional t ools such as t he Link Budget Calculat or or t he Radio Plan-
ner.
2. Physi cal sur vey - The locat ions of t he indoor and out door equipment are det ermined
on-si t e.
3. Radi o Fr equency ( RF) sur vey - I t is recommended t hat t he inst allat ion area be scanned
wit h a spect rum analyzer, t o ident ify RF int erference so as t o det ermine a clear channel for
radio inst allat ion ( on-si t e).
The Site Survey
Introduction
RADWI N wireless links must be planned before inst allat ion. The designat ed inst allat ion sit es
must be appraised t o det ermine t hat t he wireless syst em is able t o operat e efficient ly and
provide connect ivit y wit hout signal degradat ion.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP offers a wide operat ing frequency range. A free frequency channel must
be det ermined wit hin t he operat ing range, for opt imum performance.
Recommended Equipment
St age 1: Pr el i mi nar y Sur vey
Topological map of t he area
Urban map of t he area
Compass
St age 1: Pr el i mi nar y Sur vey Chapt er 2
Link Budget Calculat or and/ or Radio Planner
St age 2: Physi cal Sur vey
100 met er t ape measure
Ohmmet er, t o check ground connect ion
Binoculars
Map
Digit al camera
Paper, pencil, and a clipboard
GPS device ( opt ional)
Compass (opt ional)
St age 3: RF Sur vey
Spect rum Analyzer wit h Max Hold funct ion and screen capt ure facility t hat can st ore
mult iple images, for document at ion purposes
RF accessories ( connect ors and cables)
Communicat ion devices (for example, cellular phones, or a set of walkie-t alkies)
Stage 1: Preliminary Survey
A preliminary survey is necessary before visit ing pot ent ial inst allat ion sit es. As much det ail as
possible should be obt ained about t he designat ed ODU inst allat ion sit es and t he area
bet ween t hem.
To per f or m a pr el i mi nar y sur vey:
1. Mark t he designat ed inst allat ion sit es on a t opographic map of t he area.
2. Measure t he dist ance bet ween t he sit es; check t hat it is wit hin t he specified range of
t he equipment .
3. On t he urban map, check for developed areas sit uat ed bet ween t he inst allat ion sit es.
Pay att ent ion t o t hese areas when performing t he physical sit e survey; t here may be
t all buildings, RF t owers, or t ransmit t ers, which could cause int erference t o a sect or.
4. Check t he area bet ween t he t wo sit es for obst ruct ions such as:
High ground - hills or mount ains
Lakes or large bodies of wat er. Wat er has a reflect ion effect on RF signals like a
building. This type of reflect ion causes t he received amplit ude t o be reduced. As
a rule of t humb, t he presence of a large body of wat er bet ween sect or sit es may
double t he required ant enna height .
5. Det ermine and record t he compass bearings bet ween HBS and HSU ODUs, relat ive t o
nort h.
6. I f t here are obst ruct ions bet ween t he t wo sit es, calculat e t he Fresnel Zone (see
Chapt er 19 for det ails).
7. I f t he sit es chosen do not meet requirement s, consider alt ernat ive sit es.
8. Use t he Link Budget Calculat or (on t he CD supplied wit h t he equipment or using t he
RADWI N Manager) t o det ermine t he expect ed performance.
St age 2: Physi cal Sur vey Chapt er 2
Stage 2: Physical Survey
The physical sit e survey reviews t he environment of t he proposed inst allat ion locat ion, t o
ensure t hat t he sect or sit es are suit able for t he wireless net work. The result s of t he physical
sit e survey should be recorded.
To per f or m a physi cal sur vey:
1. From t he compass readings t aken in t he preliminary survey, find t he azimut h (hori-
zont al posit ion) t hat each HSU ODU should face t owards t he HBS ODU.
2. Using binoculars, locat e any obst ruct ions such as t all t rees, high buildings, hills or
mount ains. Look for ot her RF t owers bet ween t he t wo sit es. Mark t he locat ions of
t he obst ruct ions on t he map.
3. Det ermine t he locat ion for t he ODU (having regard for exist ing rooft op inst allat ions
and t ower space). I t should be above any obst ruct ions, considering t he Fresnel zone
(see Chapt er 19).
4. I f you need t o inst all an ODU on a t ower, make sure t hat t he t ower is far enough
from overhead elect ric power lines.
5. Det ermine a locat ion for t he indoor equipment ; it should be as close as possible t o
t he ODU. At an exist ing sit e, t here is probably an equipment room wit h cable-rout ing
channels.
6. Measure and record t he pat h lengt h of t he cable from each ODU posit ion t o t he
indoor equipment room.
7. Det ermine t he ground and light ning connect ion point s of t he inst allat ion. The ODU
and PoE must bot h be grounded.
8. Using t he Ohmmet er, measure and record t he resist ance of t he required inst allat ion
t o t he grounding point . The resist ance must be less t han 1O ohm.
9. Review t he result s of t he physical sit e survey. Decide if t he sit e is suit able for t he
wireless net work inst allat ion.
I f t he sit e is suit able, cont inue wit h st age 3, t he RF survey
I f t he sit e is not suit able, survey anot her sit e
Additional Outdoor Site Requirements
The ambient out door operat ing t emperat ure should be -35 t o 60C (-31 t o 140F).
Not e
I t is advisable t o go on a clear day, so you can more easily see any
obst ruct ions bet ween t he t wo sit es.
Not e
Out door CAT-5e; Maximum cable lengt h: 100m for 10/ 100BaseT and 75m
for 1000BaseT (GbE PoEs)
Addi t i onal I ndoor Si t e Requi r ement s Chapt er 2
Additional Indoor Site Requirements
The ambient operat ing t emperat ure should be 0 t o 50C (32 t o 122 F) at a humidity of up t o
90%, non condensing
Stage 3: RF Survey
The RF survey examines t he wireless environment of t he inst allat ion sit e, t o det ermine
whet her t here are available channels wit hin t he radio operat ing frequency band. An RF survey
is performed using a spect rum analyzer.
I t is advisable t o familiarize yourself wit h t he spect rum analyzer before going out on sit e, spe-
cifically t he Max Hold and Marker funct ions.
You should perform t he RF survey at each of t he proposed sect or sit es.
The survey should be carried out during a busy t ime of day, t o best j udge t he worst-case
radio int erference. Allow 2-4 hours durat ion for a good RF survey.
RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites
I nt erference may arise from
Self-int erference from collocat ed RADWI N radios
Ot her collocat ed radio devices inst alled on t he same sit e.
To avoid or minimize int erference, follow t hese recommendat ions:
For collocat ed RADWI N unit s, use an HSS unit t o synchronize bet ween t hem. Select a
different operat ing channels for each collocat ed RADWI N unit .
I f one or more collocat ed unit s are not RADWI N unit s, ensure t hat t here is a physical
separat ion of at least t hree met ers bet ween a RADWI N unit and any ot her collocat ed
radio on t he sit e.
Use t he largest possible frequency gap bet ween t hese unit s
Choose t he best frequency channel (as clear as possible from int erference). You may
be able t o change t he band used for t he sect or - depending on HBS model and regu-
lat ions.
Decreasing t he Tx Power of a sect or will reduce collocat ion int erference
Not e
Use t he Link Budget Calculat or t o det ermine t he minimum Tx Power
required t o maint ain sect or st ability.
Chapter 3
Hardware Installation
This chapt er set s out t he requirement s and procedures for t he hardware inst allat ion and
alignment of a RADWI N 5000 HPMP sect or in accordance wit h t he prior planning as set out in
Chapt er 2. I t is int ended t o guide qualified field t echnicians.
Safety Practices
Preventing overexposure to RF energy
To prot ect against overexposure t o RF energy, inst all t he ODUs so as t o provide and maint ain
minimal separat ion dist ances from all persons.
When t he syst em is operat ional, avoid st anding direct ly in front of t he ant enna. St rong RF
fields are present when t he t ransmit t er is on. The ODU must not be deployed in a locat ion
where it is possible for people t o st and or walk inadvert ent ly in front of t he ant enna.
Grounding
All RADWI N product s should be grounded during operat ion. I n addit ion:
The ODU should be eart hed by a wire wit h diamet er of at least 10 AWG.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODUs must be properly grounded t o prot ect against light ning. I t
is t he user's responsibility t o inst all t he equipment in accordance wit h Sect ion 810 of
t he Nat ional Elect ric Code, ANSI / NFPA No.70-1984 or Sect ion 54 of t he Canadian
Elect rical Code. These codes describe correct inst allat ion procedures for grounding
War ni ng
Out door unit s and ant ennas should be inst alled ONLY by experienced
inst allat ion professionals who are familiar wit h local building and safety
codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by t he appropriat e
government regulat ory aut horit ies. Failure t o do so may expose t he end
user or t he service provider t o legal and financial liabilit ies. RADWI N and it s
resellers or dist ribut ors are not liable for inj ury, damage or violat ion of
regulat ions associat ed wit h t he inst allat ion of out door unit s or ant ennas.
Not e
The mat erial in t his chapt er is generic t o all RADWI N radio product s unless
st at ed ot herwise.
Pr ot ect i on agai nst Li ght ni ng Chapt er 3
out door unit s, mast s, lead-in wiring and discharge unit s. I t also lays down t he size of
grounding conduct ors and connect ion requirement s for grounding elect rodes.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODUs must be grounded t o a Prot ect ive Eart h as described in
Chapt er 18 and in accordance wit h t he Local Elect rical Regulat ions.
Furt her, you should -
Always make t he ground connect ion first and disconnect it last
Never connect t elecommunicat ion cables t o ungrounded equipment
Ensure t hat all ot her cables are disconnect ed before disconnect ing t he ground
More det ailed guidelines are supplied in Chapt er 18.
Protection against Lightning
The use of light ning prot ect ion is dependent on regulat ory and end user requirement s. All of
RADWI N out door unit s are designed wit h surge limit ing circuit s t o minimize t he risk of dam-
age due t o light ning st rikes. RADWI N recommends t he use of addit ional surge arrest or
devices t o prot ect t he equipment from nearby light ning st rikes.
See Chapt er 18 for det ailed inst allat ion inst ruct ions of light ning prot ect ion devices.
General
I t is recommended t hat inst allat ion of t he out door unit be cont ract ed t o a professional
inst aller.
Before working on equipment connect ed t o power lines or t elecommunicat ion lines,
you should remove j ewelry or any ot her met allic obj ect t hat may come int o cont act
wit h energized part s.
Use ext reme care when inst alling ant ennas near power lines.
Use ext reme care when working at height s.
When using an AC power source for RADWI N 5000 HPMP PoEs always use t he AC
power adapt er supplied by RADWI N.
Use t he right t ools. I n addit ion t o st andard t ools required for any kind of ODU or
ant enna inst allat ion, RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODUs require addit ional specific t ools
det ailed on page 3-11 below.
Package Contents
The RADWI N 5000 HPMP packages include t he following it ems:
HBS and Standard HSU Package Contents
The ODU package cont ains:
One HBS or HSU ODU - see Fi gure 3-2 below for front and rear view
An ODU mount ing kit - see Fi gure 3-1 below
A CD cont aining -
t he RADWI N Manager
Quick St art Guide
User Manual - t he document you are reading
HBS and St andar d HSU Package Cont ent s Chapt er 3
Link Budget Calculat or
Label showing t he MAC address and t he alt ernat ive Community st ring. The label is
self-adhesive. You should keep t his label safe
Cable glands (t o be used wit h t he ODU-PoE cable)
Figure 3-1: ODU Mount ing kit
HBS and St andar d HSU Package Cont ent s Chapt er 3
The ODUs come in t he basic form fact ors as shown in Fi gur e 3-2 below:
Figure 3-2: ODU Form Fact ors: Top - St andard ODU package, Bot t om - Small form fact or HSU
I nt egr at ed Ant enna ODU
Front Rear
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
i
z
e
d
I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d

A
n
t
e
n
n
a
Front Rear
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
i
z
e
d
I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d

A
n
t
e
n
n
a
Ext er nal Ant enna Package Cont ent s Chapt er 3
This ODU has an int egrat ed 370mm (1.2ft ) flat panel ant enna. The ODU cont ains bot h
t he radio and t he ant enna as a single unit housed in a weat herproof case.
Connect or i zed ODU
This ODU has 2xN-type connect ors for connect ing an ext ernal ant enna
HSU onl y - SFF ( Connect or i zed) ODU
The SFF ODU is slight ly fat t er and heavier t han a regular connect orized ODU since it
requires ext ra space for t he built-in ant enna.
External Antenna Package Contents
The HBS requires a dual pole sect or ant enna. HSUs may use any suit able dual pole direct ional
ant enna.
Ext ernal ant ennas are available for t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP radios, varying in operat ing fre-
quencies, form fact or, size and gain.

Figure 3-3: Ext ernal Ant ennas for use wit h RADWI N 5000 HBS - Left : 60 or 90 flat ext ernal;
Right : 120 int egrat ed
Caut i on
For oper at i on of t he RADWI N 5505 HSU under FCC/ I C
Regul at i ons:
When operat ing t he device wit h cert ain 29 dBi dish ant ennas, t he Tx power
may be no more t han 23 dBm in t he frequency channel 5845 MHz for 5 and
10 MHz channel bandwidt h. Please check wit h RADWI N Cust omer Service
for ant enna models subj ect t o t his requirement .
All ot her frequencies may operat e using maximum Tx power of 25 dBm.
Power Over Et her net ( PoE) Devi ces Chapt er 3

Figure 3-4: Ext ernal Ant ennas for use wit h RADWI N 55xx HSU - Left : St andard int egrat ed;
cent er and right , parabolic, different sizes and gains.
See t he RADWI N product s cat alog for a more det ailed offering of ext ernal ant ennas. Ext ernal
ant ennas are also available from t hird party ant enna vendors.
Ant enna kit s cont ain -
An ant enna
Two RF cable 1m (3) long
Mount ing kit
Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices
GbE PoE
RADWI Ns Gigabit Power over
Et hernet (GbE PoE) device provides
dat a and power t o RADWI N 5000
out door unit s. The PoE device is
available wit h a variety of AC cables
wit h different plug t ypes.
This is t he recommended unit for
use wit h a HBS.
Figure 3-5: GbE PoE device - showing ext ra Et hernet port
I DU-H Aggr egat i on Uni t Chapt er 3
Out door ( Ruggedi zed) DC PoE Devi ce
This unit may be used or bot h t he HBS and t he HSUs. I t will not
support Gigabit performance on t he HBS.
Figure 3-6: Ruggedized DC-PoE Device: I nput is -20 t o -60 VDC (single input )
IDU-H Aggregation Unit
Package Contents
The I DU-H package cont ains four it ems as shown in Fi gur e 3-7:
Figure 3-7: I DU-H kit cont ent s
The I DU-H may be inst alled in single or double configurat ions:
Figure 3-8: I DU-H front view - single configurat ion
Figure 3-9: I DU-H front view - double configurat ion
IDU-H - Functional Overview
Front Panel
Figure 3-10: I DU-H front panel
The front panel is very st raight forward: Element s common t o t he I DU-C funct ion ident ically
t o t he lat t er - specifically, SFP port s, LAN port s, power socket s and t he grounding lug. The six
WAN port s funct ion ident ically t o t he WAN port on a PoE device.
I DU- H LEDs
Connecting power to the IDU-H
The I DU-H has redundant power connect ion circuit s. An enlarged schemat ic of t he power
connect ors is shown in below:
I DU-H LED I ndicat ors
Por t Gr een Yel l ow
WAN(2xRJ45LEDs) Link/Activity DuplexorPortsPoEstatus(configurable)
LAN(2xRJ45LEDs) Link/Activity Duplex
SFP(2panelmountedLEDs) Link/Activity Duplex
Hub Si t e Synchr oni zat i on ( HSS) Uni t Chapt er 3
Figure 3-11: I DU-H Power connect ors
The connect ors are 3 pin in line female, wit h polarit ies ( left t o right ) minus, ground, plus. To
avoid damage t o t he I DU-H, always use an AC/ DC adapt er supplied by RADWI N.
Hub Site Synchronization (HSS) Unit
The HSS unit synchronizes collocat ed ODUs t o prevent self int erference. I t is part icularly use-
ful at a mult i-sect or base st at ion employing several HBSs.
A single HSS unit support s up t o t en collocat ed ODUs. I n addit ion t o each unit being con-
nect ed t o it s PoE device, t he collocat ed unit has an addit ional cable t hat is connect ed t o t he
HSS Unit . The HSS Unit is a compact , weat herproof (I P67) connect or box t hat is inst alled on
t he same mast as t he ODUs. All collocat ed unit s connect t o t his box using CAT-5e cable.
Cables in prepared lengt hs are available for purchase.
The HSS unit is supplied wit h t en prot ect ive covers; any port not in use must be closed wit h a
prot ect ive cover.
Figure 3-12: HSS I nt erconnect ion Unit
See Chapt er 10 for furt her det ails about t he use of HSS.
RADWIN GSU
The GPS-based synchronizat ion unit (GSU) is designed t o handle int er-sit e int erferences
under large-scale deployment scenarios.
The RADWI N GSU is an out door unit consist ing of a st andard WinLink 1000 enclosure, a GPS
ant enna and a PoE device.
Addi t i onal Tool s and Mat er i al s Requi r ed Chapt er 3
The RADWI N GSU is connect ed t o t he HSS Unit using a st andard HSS cable. I t synchronizes
t he t ransmission t iming of mult iple Hub-Sit es t o t he same clock source t hus eliminat ing self
int erference (see Chapt er 11).
Figure 3-13: General GSU configurat ion
See Chapt er 11 for furt her det ails about t he use of RADWI N GSU.
Additional Tools and Materials Required
The following is a list of t he equipment and mat erials required t o inst all RADWI N 5000 HPMP
hardware.
Tools and Materials
Crimping t ool for RJ-45 (if t he ODU-PoE cable is wit hout connect ors)
Spanner/ wrench 13 mm ( )
Drill (for wall mount ing only)
Cable t ies
Sealing mat erial
Cables and connectors
ODU grounding cable 10 AWG
Har dwar e I nst al l at i on Sequence Chapt er 3
ODU-PoE cable (out door class, CAT-5e, 4 t wist ed pairs, 24AWG), up t o 100 m. for
100BaseT connect ion. For a 1000BaseT connect ion (HBS only) use an ODU-PoE cable
no longer t han 75m.
A crossed Et hernet LAN cable is required if you set up ODUs using t he Local Connec-
t ion met hod.
Hardware Installation Sequence
The following st eps are required t o inst all a RADWI N 5000 HPMP syst em:
1. Mount ing t he ODUs, page 3-13.
2. Mount ing t he ext ernal ant ennas ( if used), page 3-13.
3. Mount ing t he Light ning Prot ect ion devices (if used), page 3-14.
4. Out door connect ions, page 3-14.
5. Connect ing t he PoEs, page 3-14.
6. Ot her I ndoor connect ions, page 3-14.
7. Aligning t he HSUs t o t he HBS, page 3-19.
See Fi gur e 3-14 below, which illust rat es a typical inst allat ion of a RADWI N 55xx HSU wit h
an ext ernal ant enna.
Not e
For 1000BaseT, you should use RADWI N supplied ODU-PoE cables, which
guarant ee 1Gb performance. RADWI N cannot guarant ee 1Gb performance
if you use t hird part y cables.
Out door i nst al l at i on Chapt er 3
Figure 3-14: Typical HSU inst allat ion wit h ext ernal ant enna
The HBS inst allat ion differs only in t he ant enna type: I t uses a sect or ant enna.
The inst allat ion st eps are det ailed in t he following sect ions.
Outdoor installation
Preparing the ODU before Deployment
Each ODU should be pre-loaded wit h an I P address. This may be done prior t o deployment in
t he field, or on-sit e using a Lapt op comput er. The process is quit e st raight-forward and
described in Chapt er 4.
Mounting the ODU
The ODU can be mount ed on a pole or a wall. I n bot h inst allat ions, t he supplied mount ing kit
is used t o secure t he ODU.
To mount t he ODU on a pol e or a wal l :
1. Ensure t hat t he ODU is properly grounded.
2. Mount t he ODU ont o t he pole or wall. Ensure t hat t he unit is orient ed so t hat t he
cable connect ors are at t he bot t om. ( I f t hey ar e on t op, wat er may penet r at e
Not e
A mast-sit ed ODU typically uses a pole at t ached t o t he mast .
Mount i ng ext er nal ant ennas Chapt er 3
i nt o t he uni t causi ng damage.) I t is possible t o mount an ODU horizont ally. See
Chapt er 17 for det ails.
3. Refer also t o Chapt er 17 for det ailed ODU mount ing kit cont ent s and schemat ics.
Mounting external antennas
I f you are using ODU wit h an int egrat ed ant enna, skip t o Mount i ng t he Li ght ni ng Pr ot ec-
t i on Devi ces below.
The supplied mount ing kit is used t o mount t he ant enna ont o a pole. The ant ennas must be
aligned for maximum t hroughput .
To mount an ext er nal ant enna:
1. To mount an ext ernal ant enna, ensure t hat t he ant enna is properly grounded and
t hen mount t he ant enna ont o t he pole. Refer t o Chapt er 17 for det ailed ant enna
mount ing inst ruct ions.
2. Follow t he mount ing inst ruct ions supplied wit h t he ant enna.
Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices
The use of light ning prot ect ion is dependent on regulat ory and end user requirement s. The
RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODU is designed wit h surge limit ing circuit s t o minimize t he risk of dam-
age due t o light ning st rikes. RADWI N recommends t he use of addit ional surge arrest or
See below and Chapt er 18 for det ailed inst allat ion inst ruct ions of light ning prot ect ion
devices.
Outdoor Connections
To compl et e t he out door connect i ons:
1. Connect t he ground cable t o t he ODU chassis as marked on t he ODU.
War ni ng
Prior t o connect ing cables t o t he ODU, t he prot ect ive eart h t erminal (screw)
of t he ODU must be connect ed t o an ext ernal prot ect ive ground conduct or
or t o a grounded pole.
Only a qualified person using t he proper safety equipment should
climb t he ant enna mast
Only qualified professional personnel should inst all or dismant le
ODUs and mast s
Not e
Do not t ight en t he ODU t o it s mount ing bracket s unt il t he alignment
process of t he ant enna is complet e.
Ensure t hat t here are no direct obst ruct ions in front of t he ODU or
int erference from man-made obst acles.
War ni ng
Never st and i n f r ont of a l i ve ant enna!
I nst al l i ng a Sect or usi ng PoE Devi ces Chapt er 3
2. Connect t he light ning prot ect ion device t o t he ODU (see Chapt er 18).
3. At t ach t he ODU-PoE cable t o t he ODU RJ-45 connect or (see Appendi x B for t he
connect or pinout )
4. Screw in t he cable glands t o ensure hermet ic sealing of t he ODU.
5. Secure t he cables t o t he pole, mast or bracket s using UV-rat ed cable t ies.
Installing a Sector using PoE Devices
A t ypical PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connect or and t wo Et hernet
port s. I t is AC powered, and has a power LED.
To pr epar e a sect or usi ng PoE devi ces:
1. To connect t he ODU t o t he PoE device, rout e t he cable from t he ODU t o t he PoE
device, secure t he cable along it s pat h and connect t he cable t o t he LAN-OUT RJ-45
connect or on t he PoE device.
2. Connect it t o AC power.
3. Repeat st eps 1 t o 2 for all ODUs in t he sect or.
Connecting User Equipment
To connect user equi pment t o a PoE devi ce:
Connect a user swit ch, rout er or any ot her compat ible device t o t he PoE device RJ-45
port designat ed LAN-I N. Refer t o Appendi x B for connect or pinout s.
Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices
The use of light ning prot ect ion is dependent on regulat ory and end user requirement s. The
RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODU is designed wit h surge limit ing circuit s t o minimize t he risk of dam-
age due t o light ning st rikes. RADWI N recommends t he use of addit ional light ning prot ect or
Mount i ng t he Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect i on Devi ces Chapt er 3

Figure 3-15: RADWI N Light ning Prot ect or Right : Using RADWI N light ning prot ect ors
Refer t o Chapt er 18 for det ailed inst allat ion inst ruct ions for use of light ning prot ect ion
devices.
Mount i ng t he Et her net Repeat er Chapt er 3
Mounting the Ethernet Repeater
The RADWI N Et hernet repeat er enables you t o ext end t he PoE t o ODU cable beyond t he
100m limit (but no more t han 200m). The unit looks physically like t he light ning prot ect ion
device in Fi gur e 3-15. I t s use is very simple as shown in t he following schemat ic:
Figure 3-16: sing an Et hernet repeat er wit h light ning prot ect ors
Additional Waterproofing for the Lightning Protection Unit and the
Repeater
I f t hese unit s are inst alled at locat ions heavily exposed t o heavy dust , rain or corrosive mois-
t ure (for example, close t o t he sea), you should prot ect t hem furt her as in t he following pro-
cedure. I n t he remainder of t his sect ion, unit refers t o eit her a Light ning Prot ect ion Unit or
a Repeat er.
To seal a uni t agai nst excessi ve dust and moi st ur e:
1. Obt ain a high qualit y sealing mat erial such as Scot ch 23 Tape wide, from 3M t o
ensure I P-67 compliant prot ect ion against wat er and dust .
2. Cut t wo pieces each 25 cm long, of Scot ch 23 splicing t ape. Remove t he plast ic cover
t o expose t he t acky side of t he sealing t ape as shown in Fi gur e 3-17.
Not e
The Et hernet repeat er cannot be used wit h GbE I DU-ODU cables.
Addi t i onal Wat er pr oof i ng f or t he Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect i on Uni t and t he Repeat er
Figure 3-17: Exposing t he t ack side of t he sealing t ape
3. Aft er connect ing t he short CAT-5 I DU/ ODU cable (provided in t he box) from t he ODU
t o t he unit , t ight en t he cable gland cap firmly and use t he insulat ion t ape scot ch 23
t o fully cover bot h of t he cable glands.
4. Connect t he t ape wit h t acky side up on t he cable gland cap and t he CAT-5 cable.
St art at St ar t Poi nt at t he bot t om of t he cable gland as shown in Fi gur e 3-18. Fin-
ish at End Poi nt of t he CAT-5 cable, 2.5cm aft er t he end of t he shrink t ubing.
St ret ch t he t ape and apply half-overlapped t o form gap-free j oint .
Figure 3-18: St art and End point s for prot ect ive-t aping t he unit
5. Wrap t wo layers of any scot ch vinyl plast ic elect rical t ype (e.g Scot ch Super 88 Vinyl
Plast ic Tape from 3M) t o prot ect t he j oint s as shown in Fi gur e 3-19. Ensure t hat t he
Out door Connect i ons Chapt er 3
bott om of t he cable gland and t he end of t he CAT-5 cable are covered wit h t he seal-
ing splicing t ape and wit h vinyl plast ic t ape.
Figure 3-19: Prot ect ing t he unit j oint s wit h vinyl t ape
6. Mount t he unit on t he pole using t he mount ing ring as shown in Fi gur e 3-20.
Ground t he unit using t he GND screw. For light ning prot ect ion, repeat t he same pro-
cedure t o inst all t he second unit connect ed t o t he I DU.

Figure 3-20: Mount ed and st rapped t o t he pole
Outdoor Connections
To compl et e t he out door connect i ons:
1. Connect t he ground cable t o t he ODU chassis as marked on t he ODU.
Al i gni ng HSUs t o a HBS Chapt er 3
2. Connect t he ant enna cable(s) t o t he ODU.
3. Connect t he light ning prot ect ion device t o t he ODU (see Chapt er 18).
4. At t ach t he ODU-I DU cable t o t he ODU RJ-45 connect or (see Appendi x B for t he
connect or pinout )
5. Screw in t he cable glands t o ensure hermet ic sealing of t he ODU.
6. Secure t he cables t o t he pole, mast or bracket s using UV-rat ed cable t ies.
Aligning HSUs to a HBS
You perform HSU ant enna alignment t o a HBS using t he HSU ODUs audible t one.
To al i gn an HSU t o i t s HBS:
1. Ensure t hat t he sect or ant enna of t he HBS is aligned precisely t o t he sect or it is
int ended t o cover. Use a compass and t opographical maps t o do t his.
2. For bot h t he HBS and HSUs: Using a coax cable wit h N-Type connect ors, connect t he
vert ical polarizat ion connect or of t he ant enna t o t he ANT 1 connect or of t he ODU.
Then, using a second coax cable wit h N-Type connect ors, connect t he horizont al
polarizat ion connect or of t he ant enna t o t he ANT 2 connect or of t he ODU.
3. Ensure t hat power is connect ed t o t he sit e PoEs across t he sect or.
4. Provided t hat a HSU det ect s t he signal from t he HBS, t he ODU st art s beeping 20 sec-
onds aft er power up, and cont inues beeping unt il t he HSU is aligned t o t he HBS, and
t he alignment is complet e.
The det ails are described in t he next t wo st eps. Ant enna refers bot h t o an ext ernal
ant enna and an int egrat ed ant enna. The t wo st eps should be carried out for each
HSU in t he sect or.
5. Make a horizont al sweep of 180 degrees wit h t he HSU ant enna so t hat t he st rongest
signal from t he HBS can be det ect ed.
6. Slowly t urn t he HSU ant enna back t owards t he posit ion of t he HBS, list ening t o t he
t one unt il t he best signal is reached. See t he following figure for audible signal varia-
t ions.
Not e
There is no part icular reason t o use ANT 1 and ANT 2 in t hat order: They
j ust have t o be t he same for each ODU in t he sect or. Furt her, adopt ing a
convent ion like ANT 1 is always vert ical avoids mist akes across a large
sect or.
War ni ng
Never st and i n f r ont of a l i ve ant enna!
Al i gni ng HSUs t o a HBS Chapt er 3
Figure 3-21: Beep Sequence for ant enna alignment
7. Secure t he HSU ant enna t o t he pole/ wall.
Not e
Three beeps and a pause is 'best signal so far'
Two beeps and a pause is 'signal quality increased'
One beep and pause is 'no change in signal'
Long beep and short pause is 'signal quality decreased'
One beep and a long pause is 'no air link'
Any ot her signal does not relat e t o ant enna alignment
Sect or I nst allat ion
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part2:SectorInstallation
UM50003300/05.12
Chapter 4
Getting Started with the
RADWIN Manager
What we will do here
This chapt er is a quick hands-on t our of a running sect or. We show you how t o inst all t he
RADWI N Manager soft ware on your managing PC, connect it t o an operat ing base st at ion and
t hen log on. We t hen explain t he use of t he various obj ect s on t he RADWI N Manager main
window.
The background acquired here will enable you t o underst and t he direct ion and purpose of t he
det ailed procedures (described in lat er chapt ers), required t o build a RADWI N 5000 HPMP
sect or from t he ground up.
Installing the RADWIN Manager Application
Minimum System Requirements
The RADWI N Manager applicat ion is dist ribut ed on a CD. Operat ing syst em specific PC
resources required by t he applicat ion are set out in Tabl e 4-1 below:
Requirement s common t o all syst ems are:
Hard disk: 1 GB free space
Net work: 10/ 100BaseT NI C
Graphics: 1024x768 screen resolut ion wit h 16 bit color
Table 4-1: PC Requirement s for t he RADWI N Manager Applicat ion
Wi ndows Versi on
XP Pr o
Vi st a/ 7
32 bi t 64 bi t
Memor y 512 Mb 1 Gb 2 Gb
Pr ocessor P I V P I V Dual Core
I nst al l i ng t he Sof t war e Chapt er 4
Any modern Web browser t o view addit ional mat erial, use t he Web I nt erface or get
help from t he RADWI N Web sit e.
Installing the Software
Any PC running t he RADWI N Manager applicat ion can be used t o configure a RADWI N 5000
HPMP sect or.
To i nst al l t he RADWI N Manager appl i cat i on:
1. I nsert t he CD int o t he CD/ DVD drive of your comput er.
2. The CD opening window appears:
3. Choose I nst al l RADWI N Manager and follow t he on-screen inst ruct ions of t he inst al-
lat ion wizard t o complet e t he set up of t he RADWI N Manager applicat ion.
I f t he inst allat ion program fails t o st art , browse t o your CD/ DVD drive, chose t he
set up.exe program and run it .
Get t i ng St ar t ed wi t h t he RADWI N Manager Chapt er 4
Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager
We will look at a pre-conf igured fixed sect or, set up as follows:
Table 4-2: Preconfigured set up
Uni t Locat i on At t r i but e Val ue Remar k
HBS HBS.01
I P Address 192.168.10.200
All communicat ing HSUs and HBS in
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gat eway 0.0.0.0
Sect or I D EBG_20560334 I nherit ed by all communicat ing HSUs
Cont act Bach Opt ional
Name Bach@HBS.01 Locat ion of Cont act - opt ional
Band 5.730 - 5.845 GHz FCC/ I C I nherit ed by all communicat ing HSUs
Channel Bandwidt h 20MHz I nherit ed by all communicat ing HSUs
Geographic locat ion
Lat it ude -37.8148
Longit ude 144.9630
Azimut h (deg) 0
Used for init ial default placement of
HSUs
Beamwidt h (deg) 90
Ant enna height (m) 130 From RF plan, not used
HSU
HFU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.101
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Haydn
Name Haydn@HFU.01.01
Lat it ude -37.8762
Longit ude 145.0437
HFU.01.02
I P Address 192.168.10.102
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Mozart
Name Mozart @HFU.01.02
Lat it ude -37.4018
Longit ude 145.0086
HNU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.103
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Nomadic
Cont act Brahms
Name Brahms@HNU.01.03
Lat it ude
Depends on locat ion Longit ude
Ant enna height (m)
Table 4-2: Preconfigured set up (Cont inued)
To st ar t t he RADWI N Manager :
1. Connect t he managing comput er t o t he HBS PoE LAN port .
2. Check t hat you have connect ivit y t o t he HBS ODU. You can do t his by opening up a
command line session ( St ar t | Run and t hen t ype, cmd). At t he command prompt ,
type
pi ng 192.168.10.200
You should see somet hing like t his:
Figure 4-1: Pinging t he base st at ion.
Any ot her response from ping means t hat t he HBS ODU is not responding. Check
your Et hernet connect ion and t hat bot h t he PoE and ODU are swit ched on and t hen
t ry again. I f you do not succeed, seek assist ance from RADWI N Cust omer Support .
Pinging t he HSUs should yield similar responses.
3. Dismiss t he command line session.
4. Open t he RADWI N Manager from t he deskt op icon, or click St ar t | Pr ogr ams| RAD-
WI N Manager| RADWI N Manager.
The Log-on dialog box appears.
Ti p
Choose your unit locat ions carefully. For example, for t hree collocat ed HBSs
each wit h 32 HSUs covering 360, mat t ers get out of hand very quickly if
unit s are poorly named. They can always be ident ified by t heir I P
addresses, but t hat is a poor subst it ut e for effect ive naming. A URL-like
naming patt ern based on HBS_n.HSU_y is clear and familiar t o all I nt ernet
users. Keeping t he names I P address independent enables you t o copy t he
ent ire sect or set up t o a different geographic locat ion wit hout I P address
duplicat ion.
The RADWI N Manager l og-on Concept Chapt er 4
Figure 4-2: Log-on window
The RADWIN Manager log-on Concept
The RADWI N Manager provides t hree levels of access in one of t wo ent ry modes. To see
t hem, click Opt i ons at any t ime in t he Log on window ( Fi gur e 4-2 above) . You are offered
an ext ended log-on window:
Figure 4-3: Ext ended log-on window
At t he User Type field, click t he list but t on:
The RADWI N Manager l og-on Concept Chapt er 4
Figure 4-4: Log on window exposing t he user types.
There are t hree user types:
An Obser ver has read-only access t o t he sect or. An Observer can monit or t he sect or,
generat e report s, but may not change any sect or paramet ers.
An Oper at or can inst all and configure t he sect or.
An I nst al l er can, in addit ion t o funct ioning as an Operat or, also change t he operat ing
frequency band (or regulat ion). The lat t er funct ion has legal ramificat ions, requiring
familiarity wit h local regulat ions.
I f you are connect ing t hrough t he RNMS server check t he RMNS connect butt on and ent er
your server I P address.
The following t able summarizes t hese opt ions:
The Net work Manager should change t he default passwords as soon as possible.
Cont i nui ng t he l og-on pr ocedur e:
5. I f your User Type is not Operat or, t hen choose it now.
6. Ent er t he password.
Table 4-3: User types, default passwords and funct ion
User Type
Def aul t
Passwor d
Funct i on Communi t y
Communi t y
St r i ng
Obser ver admi n Monit oring Read-Only publ i c
Oper at or admi n
I nst allat ion,
conf igurat ion
Read-Writ e net man
I nst al l er wi r el ess
Operat or plus
set band
Read-Writ e net man
Log-on Er r or s and Caut i ons Chapt er 4
7. I f you are a user wit h Read-Writ e permission, click Opt i ons t o ent er t he Communit y
opt ions if required.
Log-on Errors and Cautions
Unsupported Device
At t empt ing t o connect t o an unsupport ed device on an ot herwise valid I P address (for exam-
ple, a LAN print er) will result in t he following error message:
Figure 4-5: Unsupport ed device message
Incorrect IP Address
I f t he I P address chosen is invalid or t he sector is unreachable, t he following error message
will be displayed:
Figure 4-6: Unreachable device message
Incorrect Password
I f you type an incorrect password in t he Login window, t he follwing message will be dis-
played:
Not e
Leave t he default Communit y passwords, net man for read-writ e,
and publ i c for read-only.
I f you are a user wit h read-only permission, t hen you may only log
on as Observer.
I nval i d Read/ Wr i t e Communi t y St r i ng Chapt er 4
Figure 4-7: I nvalid user type or password
Invalid Read/Write Community String
This will result in t he same message as shown in Fi gur e 4-6.
To deal wi t h l ost or f or got t en Communi t y St r i ngs:
1. Send an email request for t o RADWI N Cust omer Support for an alt ernat ive key. Your
email must include t he ODU serial number shown on t he adhesive st icker on rear of
one of your ODUs.
2. The reply will cont ain an alt ernat ive key, which funct ions as a t emporary mast er
Community St ring. Copy/ past e t he supplied alt ernat ive key t o bot h t he Read-Only
and Read-Writ e fields in t he log-on window (Fi gure 4-3). This get s you t o t he RAD-
WI N Manager main window.
3. Use t he procedure on page 6-10 t o ent er new Community St rings.
Three Sector Display Views
Table View
The RADWI N Manager offers t hree sect or display views. The default view for a freshly
inst alled sect or is Tabl e vi ew and looks like t his:
Map Vi ew Chapt er 4
Figure 4-8: Default Sect or display - Table view
Map View
I f you have an I nt ernet connect ion, you may use Map vi ew. The RADWI N Manager main
window looks like t his:
Li st Vi ew Chapt er 4
Figure 4-9: Sect or display - Map view
A new sect or wit h default values for element map coordinat es is shown cent red on Green-
wich. The sect or is cent ered on t he HBS azimut h (configurable) . The HSUs dist ribut ed evenly
wit hin t he sect or beam widt h (configurable) wit hout regard for geographic considerat ions.
I f you do not have an I nt ernet connect ion, t he display background will be solid gray.
The sect or shown in Fi gure 4-9 is cent ered on Melbourne, Aust ralia. The locat ion of t he t wo
fixed HSUs is based on a Radio Plan. The nomadic HSU, having no predefined coordinat es is
in t he middle of nowhere. Lat er we show you how t o change t he posit ions of t he HSU icons
on t he map.
List View
The t hird sect or display type is List view. I t looks like t his:
Swi t chi ng Bet ween Vi ews Chapt er 4
Figure 4-10: Sect or display - List view
At t he bot t om of t he HSU display panel, t here is a t hin horizont al scroll bar. Use it t o see fur-
t her det ails about t he displayed HSUs. The I ndex and Name fields are prot ect ed so you
always know t o which HSUs t he dat a belongs.
Switching Between Views
To swi t ch bet ween di spl ays:
Click t he relevant t ab. From left t o right , t he t abs are, Map
view, Table view and List view. The act ive t ab ( Table view in t he illust rat ion) is shown
enlarged.
Display View Persistence
The last display view used will be t hat opened at your next rest art or log on t o t heRADWI N
Manager.
Whi ch Di spl ay Vi ew Shoul d I Use? Chapt er 4
Which Display View Should I Use?
Your preferred view is clearly applicat ion dependent . For a geographically localized sect or -
say, video surveillance of a plant or a sport s cent er wit h a small number of cameras, Table or
List view might be adequat e. Our own example is based on a backhaul sit uat ion for which t he
Maps view is very helpful.
Continuing with our Example Sector
Using the Map View
To set up a new sect or or t o carry out subst ant ial changes t o an exist ing sect or, you should
have a Radio Plan from your Sit e Survey. The minimum requirement is a list of locat ions and
t heir coordinat es. Here is our plan:
To r el ocat e a HBS or HSU by set t i ng l at i t ude and l ongi t ude coor di nat es:
1. Right click t he HBS (Bach@HBS.01) t o open it s Cont ext menu and t hen Conf i gur e.
2. Click t he Coor di nat es but t on t o open t he Coordinat es window and ent er t he
required lat it ude and longit ude.
You may ent er t he coordinat es in decimal or degrees/ minut es/ seconds using t he
input t emplat e shown below:
Table 4-4: Radio Plan for a small sect or
Uni t Type Si t e Name Lat i t ude Longi t ude
Ant enna
hei ght
( m)
fixed HSU Mozart @HFU.01.02 -37.4018 145.0086 60
fixed HSU Haydn@HFU.01.01 -37.8762 145.0437 10
nomadic HSU Brahms@HNU.01.03 n/ a n/ a n/ a
HBS Bach@HBS.01 -37.8148 144.9630 130
Not e
A plan of t his type may be prepared by hand, or by using a suit able Radio
Planning t ool. The met hod used here allowed us t o specify ant enna height
as well so as t o guarant ee LOS. While it is not of direct use in what follows,
ant enna height is required t o carry out physical inst allat ion as set out in
Chapt er 3.
Usi ng t he Map Vi ew Chapt er 4
3. HBS only: The Azimut h and Beam Widt h det ermine t he sect or cent er-line direct ion
and angle They are only used for init ial default dist ribut ion of HSUs on t he map.
4. Click OK. The unit is moved t o t he new locat ion (possibly off-screen).
5. Repeat t he previous four st eps for each HSU in t he sect or. I f at t he end of t he pro-
cess, t he HBS is off-screen, click t he Cent er on Sect or but t on t o fly t o t he sect or.
Using t he example in Tabl e 4-4, here is t he out come:
We have locat ed t he ent ire sect or t o Melbourne, Aust ralia in accordance wit h our
Radio Plan.
You can make manual locat ion adj ust ment s using t he GUI .
To r el ocat e a HBS or HSU usi ng t he GUI :
1. Select t he unit t o move by clicking it . I t is surrounded by a brown box.
2. Mouse-over t he t op edge of t he box t o get a cont ext but t on bar as shown in.
Usi ng t he Map Vi ew Chapt er 4
Figure 4-11: Select ed HBS or HSU wit h cont ext butt on bar
The funct ions of t hree but t ons (from left t o right ) are as follows:

Figure 4-12: Unit St at us Windows: left HSU, right HBS
3. Click t he Unl ock but t on. Drag t he t ower icon t o it s new locat ion. You must confirm
t he change:
The change is t hen carried out .
Table 4-5: Unit Cont ext But t on bar funct ions
But t on Tool t i p Pur pose
Lef t Show/ Hide det ails Show/ Hide t he st at us window
Cent er Unlock / Lock I t em Unlock t o drag on map, lock t o secure posit ion
Ri ght Zoom in
Show more background det ail. Also displays t he unit
st at us window if not already visible
a
a. You can also zoom in/out using the mouse scroll wheel in the standard
way
Not e
The foregoing change confirmat ion is import ant : There is no undo
funct ion. I f you inadvert ent ly move t he unit t o a wrong place, you will have
t o rest ore it s posit ion by hand.
Expl or i ng t he RADWI N Manager Mai n Wi ndow - HBS Chapt er 4
Exploring the RADWIN Manager Main Window - HBS
The following sect ions describe t he panels of main window shown in Fi gure 4-8.
HBS Main Button Menu
Figure 4-13: HBS main but t on menu
Sector Status Panel
The sect or level informat ion is shown here. There is not hing t hat can be changed for an
act ive sect or. The paramet ers are set before t he base st at ion is act ivat ed and are duplicat ed
for each HSU in t he sect or.
Figure 4-14: Sect or St at us panel
The last t wo it ems are of special int erest : The St at us (shown as Act ive) indicat es whet her
t he HBS has been act ivat ed or not . The Ti me Sl ot s bar indicat es how many out of 64 t ime
slot s, have been allocat ed t o HSUs. Allocat ion of t ime slot s bet ween HSUs provides a basic
Table 4-6: HBS main but t on bar funct ions
Menu I t em Pur pose Ref er ence
Preferences
Monit or - File locat ion, int erval and t hroughput unit s page 4- 31
Event s - Color coding for event s log and event s log file locat ion page 4- 32
Advanced - Enable/ disable check for updat es, monit oring int erval and t imeout page 4- 33
Soft ware Upgrade Perform soft ware upgrade for a sect or Chapt er 12
Get Diagnost ics Run and st ore diagnost ics for all or some members of a sect or Chapt er 9
Log Off Ret urn t o log-on window
Help side arrow
Link Budget Calculat or Chapt er 19
Check Updat es
About
Help But t on View t his User Manual
Base St at i on Panel Chapt er 4
form of priorit izat ion bet ween t hem. Normally you would not leave unallocat ed t ime slot s
unless you int ended t o add more HSUs. Every HSU requires at least one t ime slot .
Base Station Panel
The displayed it ems in t he Base Stat ion panel are st raight forward.
Figure 4-15: Base St at ion det ail Panel
The Tx Rat i o shows t he allocat ion of t hroughput bet ween downlink and uplink t raffic at t he
HBS. Here it is set t o 70% downlink and 30% uplink. The Tx Rat io is not only sect or-wide: I f
you use HSS (Chapt er 10) t o collocat ed several HBSs (t o cover adj acent sect ors), t hey must
all use t he same Tx Rat io.
The Rx Rat e and Tx Rat e are t he t raffic receive and t ransmit rat es t hrough t he HBS under
load.
The but t on bar provides t he necessary funct ionality t o configure and manage t he HBS.
Table 4-7: HBS Det ail Panel but t on bar funct ions
Menu
I con
Pur pose Ref erence
HBS Configurat ion Chapt er 6
Recent Event s Log page 9- 7
Performance Monit or page 9- 9
Act ive Alarms page 9- 15
Spect rum View Chapt er 20
HBS Event s Log Chapt er 4
The foregoing descript ion relat es t o an act ivat ed HBS. The Det ail Panel t it le bar for an inact ive
HBS looks like t his:
Clicking t he Act ivat e butt on init iat es an act ivat ion Wizard. The Act ivat e butt on in t he t it le bar
is hidden, leaving it looking like t his:
The Act ivat ion process is covered in det ail in Chapt er 5.
At any t ime, t he current st at us of t he HBS is shown in t he Sect or St at us Panel, Fi gur e 4-14.
HBS Events Log
The Event s Log records syst em failures, loss of synchronizat ion, loss of signal, compat ibility
problems and ot her fault condit ions and event s.
Alarms (t raps) are displayed in t he Event s Log in t he lower panel of t he main window. The
Event s Log may be saved as a t ext file.
The Event s Log includes t he following fields:
Sequent i al number ( I D)
Dat e and t i me st amp
Message
Tr ap sour ce
page 9- 5

a
page 6- 35
page 6- 20
page 5- 31
a. Installer only
Not e
The foregoing event types include event s from all links for which t his
managing comput er has been defined as t he t raps address. Only event s
from RADWI N equipment will be shown.
Table 4-7: HBS Det ail Panel but t on bar funct ions (Cont inued)
Menu
I con
Pur pose Ref erence
HBS Event s Log Chapt er 4
I P addr ess of t he ODU t hat i ni t i at ed al ar m.
For complet e informat ion about int ernal t raps and alarms see Chapt er 9.
The event s are displayed in t he Event s Log in t he lower right-hand panel of t he RADWI N
Manager main window:
Figure 4-16: Event s Log panel
The event s log provides a color coded event list . Blue it ems (like t he one in Fi gur e 4-16) are
informat ional. You can set t he color coding for crit ical, caut ionary and informat ional messages
from t he Pr ef er ences but t on.
The Event s Log is horizont ally scrollable if it is t oo wide for your comput er display.
Use t he t op left drop-down list t o filt er t he messages:
Figure 4-17: Event s Log filt er select ion
HBS Mai n Wi ndow - HSUs Panel Chapt er 4
HBS Main Window - HSUs Panel
Table View
Figure 4-18: HBS Main Window (Reduced) - up t o 32 HSUs
I f you have a large number of HSUs in t he sect or, it may be helpful t o filt er t he display. You
have t he following choices:
The following case has colored fields indicat ing a problem requiring your att ent ion:
Figure 4-19: HBS Main Window (Reduced) - indicat ing a problem
I f you mouse-over t he colored RSS area, you will receive a t ool t ip t elling you t hat RSS for
Radio 1 is higher t han for Radio 2, or somet hing similar. We will provide furt her det ail about
t hese color codes below.
Figure 4-20: HSU display - det ail
The lit t le ball on t he t op left of t he HSU is color coded as follows:
Right click a HSU t o get it s cont ext menu:
Table 4-8: HSU St at us ball color codes
Col or Descri pt i on
Gr een Regist ered, in sync
Red Regist ered, no sync
Gr ey Deregist ered
Pur pl e Aut hent icat ion error
Bl ue Violat ed Belongs t o anot her sect or
Figure 4-21: HSU display - cont ext menu (right click)
Map View
Here again is t he Map view of t he HBS Main Window:
Figure 4-22: HBS Main Window - Map view
HBS/ HSU St at us Li ght s
HBS/ HSU St at us light appear on t he t ower graphic, and t he HSU det ail (Fi gur e 4-
20).
The meaning of t he St at us light s is as follows:
Navi gat i on Tool bar
The left hand display box shows t he lat it ude and longit ude of t he point on t he map under t he
t ip of t he mouse cursor.
The right hand bar is t he dist ance scale as defined by t he numeric label - 25 km in t he exam-
ple.
Figure 4-24: Navigat ion Tool bar
Table 4-9: HBS/ HSU St at us light color codes
Figure 4-23: HBS/ HSU
St at us light s
Col or
Descr i pt i on
HBS HSU
Gr een Act ive Regist ered, in sync
Red I nact ive Regist ered, no sync
Pur pl e N/ A Aut hent icat ion error
Br own N/ A Soft ware Upgrade required
Bl ue N/ A Belongs t o anot her sect or
Gr ay N/ A
St at ic: Unregist ered
Mobile: Not synchronized
Table 4-10: Navigat ion t ool bar but t on unct ions
Menu I con Pur pose
Show/ Hide t he HBS/ HSU St at us light s (Fi gur e 4-23)
Show/ Hide t he HBS/ HSU St at us boxes
Cent er on t he sect or
The zoom it em is a convenience funct ion. The four side butt ons show t he det ail level
associat ed wit h t he zoom slider posit ion. Alt ernat ively, you may click one of t he side butt ons
t o get direct ly t o t he indicat ed zoom level. The default level is Region corresponding roughly
t o an area sufficient t o display t he whole sect or.
Ot her Mouse Navi gat i on Funct i ons
Double clicking t he mouse or rot at ing t he scroll wheel forward causes t he view t o
zoom in (become larger, more det ailed)
Rot at ing t he scroll wheel back causes t he view t o zoom out ( become smaller, less
det ailed)
Moving t he mouse over t he map wit h t he right but t on depressed drags t he sect or
(cent ered on t he HBS) in t he direct ion of movement
Right clicking anywhere on t he map opens up t his
close t o t he mouse locat ion. Clicking t his but t on copies t he mouse cursor locat ion as a
coma separat ed t ext mode lat it ude-longit ude pair t o t he clipboard. Here is a copy/
past ed example: -37.58896, 145.69000.
The HSU Status box
The following case has colored fields indicat ing a problem requiring your att ent ion:
Shows different map views. Aer i al Vi ew and
Show Label s are set by default .
Navigat ion but t ons: Moves t he sect or about on t he displayed map.
Shows different levels of map det ail
Table 4-10: Navigat ion t ool bar but t on unct ions (Cont inued)
Menu I con Pur pose

Figure 4-25: HSU st at us boxes - det ail, indicat ing problems
I f you mouse-over t he colored RSS area, you will receive a t ool t ip t elling you t hat RSS for
Radio 1 is higher t han for Radio 2, or somet hing similar. The color codes have t he following
meanings:
Normal whit e/ green t oget her wit h a consist ent RSS imbalance may be caused by dif-
ferent TX Power set t ings at each sit e. There is no warning indicat or but it may be eas-
ily correct ed using Conf i gur e| Tx & Ant enna or by rerunning t he Configurat ion
wizard.
A yellow warning color will be displayed for an RSS difference of more t han 8 dBm
bet ween t he t wo polarizat ions on t he same sit e (t he RSS display is t he combinat ion of
bot h polarizat ions on t his sit e)
A red warning color indicat es an RSS difference of more t han 16 dBm bet ween t he
t wo polarizat ions on t he same sit e
The lat t er t wo cases are usually t he result of a physical problem at t he indicat ed sit e. Proba-
ble causes are:
I nt erference
Ant enna polarity problem
ODU malfunct ion
This is a normal sit uat ion:

Figure 4-26: HSU st at us boxes - det ail, normal operat ion. Left : fixed HSU Right : nomadic HSU
The arrow on t he t op right hand corner can be used t o minimize or rest ore full det ail. Here is
t he HSU st at us box of Fi gur e 4-20 minimized: This device is useful for
a large sect or wit h a small display.
Right click an HSU image t o get it s cont ext menu:
Figure 4-27: HSU display - cont ext menu (right click). Same as Fi gur e 4-21
List View
List view funct ionality is obt ained ny select ing a HSU and using t he t op but t on bar t o config-
ure it .
Figure 4-28: HSU On HBS display - ext ract . Scr ol l r i ght f or mor e HSU f i el ds
I f you have a large number of HSUs in t he sect or, it may be helpful t o filt er t he display. You
have t he following choices:
Expl or i ng t he RADWI N Manager Mai n Wi ndow - HSU Chapt er 4
The but t on bar in Fi gur e 4-28 follows t he same patt ern as t he cont ext menus in Fi gure 4-
21..
Exploring the RADWIN Manager Main Window - HSU
You may log on t o a HSU over t he air from a HBS or by direct ly connect ing a Managing Com-
put er t o t he HSU whet her t hrough a swit ch or direct ly t o it s PoE. You can log on over t he air
t o any regist ered HSU. The HSU main window is different from t he HBS main window, how-
ever it uses t he same GUI and t he same labels for common ent ry fields.
Logging on to a HSU
You can log on t o a HSU of an est ablished sector. The log on procedure is t he same as for a
HBS. Suppose we log on t o HSU wit h I P address 192.168.10.101: We init ially receive t he fol-
lowing caut ion:
Table 4-11: HBS main window list display cont ext menu and butt on bar funct ions
Menu I t em
Menu
I con
Pur pose Ref erence
Regist er Regist er a HSU t o a sect or page 5- 31
Conf igure Sit e configurat ion for t he HSU page 6- 21
Recent Event s Recent event s log per HSU page 9- 7
Performance
Monit oring
Performance Monit oring per HSU page 9- 9
Act ive Alarms Display Act ive Alarms page 9- 15
Est imat e
Throughput
Est imat e t hroughput per HSU page 9- 5
Updat e Service
Service evaluat ion and Time Slot allocat ion
per HSU; also MI MO/ Diversit y select ion
page 6- 34
Suspend ... Suspend Service page 6- 34
Replace Replace a HSU page 6- 32
Locat e on Map Fly t o t his HSU on t he Map Display
Reset Reset t he HSU
Deregist er Deregist er t he HSU page 5- 32
Loggi ng on t o a HSU Chapt er 4
Figure 4-29: Logging on t o a HSU
Upon clicking OK t o dismiss t he caut ion, we get a variat ion of t he previous main window:
Figure 4-30: Opening RADWI N Manager window - HSU
The direct log on window differs only in t he bot t om st at us bar where t he Connect ion Mode
will show Net work inst ead of Over t he air. There are several funct ional differences bet ween
t he log on modes, which we will explain in t he following chapt ers.
HSU Mai n But t on Menu Chapt er 4
HSU Main Button Menu
The HSU main butt on menu is similar t o t he HBS main butt on menu. The only new it em is in
t he Conf i gur e but t on.
Figure 4-31: HSU main but t on menu
HSU Link Status
Table 4-12: HSU main but t on bar funct ions
Menu I t em Pur pose
Conf igure
The Configure but t on opens HSU sit e conf igurat ion. The addit ional funct ions in
t he det ail menu work in t he same way as t he corresponding funct ions for t he
HBS.
Preferences
Monit or - File locat ion, int erval and t hroughput unit s
Event s - Color coding for event s log and event s log file locat ion
Advanced - Enable/ disable check for updat es, monit oring int erval and t imeout
Get Diagnost ics Run and st ore diagnost ics for all or some members of a sect or
Log Off Ret urn t o log-on window
Help
Check for updat es
About
Help But t on View t his User Manual
HSU Event s Log Chapt er 4
HSU Events Log
The HSU event s display is funct ionally ident ical t o t hat of t he HBS.
HSU Link Performance
For convenience
The HSU Link Performance panel shows t he same fields as in Fi gur e 4-20. For convenience
we also display t he corresponding paramet ers for t he HBS.
Setting RADWIN Manager Preferences
The Preferences t abs appearing on bot h t he HBS and HSU relat e ent irely t o t he way t he Man-
ager displays cert ain it ems for t he connect ed unit . They are complet ely local t o t he managing
comput er. They are also funct ionally ident ical for bot h t he HBS and HSUs.
Not e
Each t echnician servicing a sect or will need t o set up his managing
comput er (t ypically a lapt op) wit h his own preferences.
Moni t or Chapt er 4
Monitor
The Monit or file cont ains a vast amount of informat ion and can become inordinat ely large
very quickly. You should t herefore choose a longer sampling int erval if you int end t o st ore t his
informat ion for a lengt hy durat ion.
For t he HBS, it will show det ails for t he HBS it self and all regist ered HSUs.
For a HSU, it will record t he informat ion j ust for t hat HSU. You should use dist inct ive file
names for HBS and HSU Monit or files.
The cont ent of t he Monit or file will be discussed in more det ail in Chapt er 9.
Event s Chapt er 4
Events
Here you may choose your own color coding for t he Recent Event display (see Chapt er 9).
You may also choose a locat ion and file name for t he event s log for st orage. These set t ings
are again, per HBS or HSU. To avoid over-writ ing, you should use file names reflect ing t heir
source ODU.
Advanced Chapt er 4
Advanced
Restore Alerts
Many alert messages in t he RADWI N Manager have an opt ion of t he form Do not show t his
message again. These alert messages can be revert ed t o t heir default st at e ( shown) by click-
ing t he Rest or e Al er t s but t on. You will be asked t o confirm:
Check for Updates
I f you are not connect ed t o t he I nt ernet , disable t he Check f or updat es check box.
Monitoring and Timeout Intervals
The monit oring int erval det ermines t he lowest int erval bet ween request t o t he ODU for st at us
updat es. The t imeout (default 1 sec, maximum 5 sec) may have t o be increased if you are on
a slow net work.
What Comes Next ? Chapt er 4
Setting the Map View Background Mode
You have a choice of t wo map providers, a default or a self-chosen background. I f you log on
wit hout an I nt ernet connect ion, you will get a default gray background or, if you have caching
enabled, your last used map.
What Comes Next?
The purpose of t his chapt er was t o offer an overview of a running RADWI N 5000 HPMP a sec-
t or. The next t hree chapt ers will cover respect ively, det ailed sect or set up considerat ions, sec-
t or management and monit oring and diagnost ics. The foregoing background should provide
sufficient signpost s t o ensure t hat you do not become lost in t he plet hora of det ails required
t o commission and manage a fully operat ional sect or.
Chapter 5
Installing the Sector
Scope of this Chapter
Chapt er 4, offered an overview of a running Sect or as mot ivat ion for t he t echnical inst alla-
t ion det ails set out below.
Assuming t hat t he Sect or equipment is in place as described in earlier chapt ers, sect or inst al-
lat ion has t wo phases:
Configuring and act ivat ing t he HBS
Bringing up t he HSUs - configurat ion and regist rat ion
The same RADWI N Manager program is used for bot h t he HBS and t he HSUs. Much of t he
process is common t o bot h types of ODU. We will cover t he HBS in det ail; for t he HSUs we
will concent rat e on t hose it ems which are different . I n any event , where set up procedures are
common we will point t hem out .
This chapt er covers fixed and nomadic HSU configurat ions. Mobile HSUs are covered in
Chapt er 8.
Concepts
A HBS out of t he box, must be configured wit h
Basic RF paramet ers such as frequency band, channel bandwidt hs and Sect or I D
Net working paramet ers such as I P address, subnet mask and default gat eway
At t his point , t he HBS ODU is in an i nact i ve st at e, powered up, configurable but not t rans-
mit t ing anyt hing.
Upon act i vat i on, t he HBS will commence t ransmit t ing and receiving packet s relat ed t o sec-
t or management only - t hat is no service. Act ivat ion and Deact ivat ion are effect ed quit e sim-
ply by clicking a t oggle butt on.
Assuming t hat t he Sect or HSUs are mount ed aligned and powered up, t he HSUs will di s-
cover t he HBS est ablishing links for management only. At t his point t he HSUs may be man-
aged over t he air.
As soon as t he HSUs are configured t o your sat isfact ion, you must r egi st er t hem on t he HBS.
Regist rat ion of an HSU enables service t raffic bet ween t he HSU and t he HBS.
Wor ki ng wi t h Nomadi c HSUs Chapt er 5
During t he regist rat ion process, you assign t i me sl ot s t o each HSU. A t ot al of 64 t ime slot s
are available t o each HBS t o be dist ribut ed among t he HSUs in t he sect or. The relat ive num-
ber of t ime slot s det ermines t he relat ive amount of service each HSU will receive. Each HSU
receives at least t wo t ime slot s. To disable an HSU you must deregist er it . (A suspend mech-
anism is also available, t o suspend service on an HSU for a limit ed period.)
For each regist ered HSU, you can set separat ely, t he uplink and downlink Maxi mum I nf or -
mat i on Rat e (MI R) in Mbps or leave it at Best Ef f or t .
You may also manage an HSU Connect i on t abl e t o enable and disable connect ivit y bet ween
HSUs in a sect or.
HSUs may be f i xed or nomadi c. The lat t er may move around wit hin and across sect ors.
Working with Nomadic HSUs
Each nomadic HSU is allocat ed t o one of four HBS levels labelled A, B, C and D. Some operat-
ing paramet ers for each level (such as VLAN, MI R, QoS, t ime slot s, fixed rat e, MI MO/ Diversity
ant enna mode) can be different for each level allowing for broad priorit izat ion of service
bet ween different types of nomadic unit s. This requires t hat each nomadic HSU be assigned a
level t o j oin a sect or.
A nomadic HSU may only send and receive service t raffic while st at ionary. A nomadic HSU
det ect s t hat it is t ime t o seek t he anot her HBS upon sync loss. Upon ent ering and st opping in
a new sect or, it may t ake several seconds t o est ablish sync wit h t he sect or HBS.
Changing any of VLAN, MI R, QoS, fixed rat e, MI MO/ Diversity ant enna mode for one config-
ured HSU at a given level, changes all ot her HSUs at t hat level. I f you add a new HSU t o a
sect or (by direct connect ion) at a given level, at sync t ime, it will acquire t he exist ing param-
et ers for t hat level.
Workflow
I n t his chapt er, we assume t hat you are familiar wit h t he graphical user int erface described in
Chapt er 4, including Geographic locat ion. We will concent rat e here on sect or radio set up
workflow. To t his end, t he inst allat ion will be carried out against a blank whit e background. At
t he end of t he process we will complet e t he sect or by opening t he map t o reflect our Geo-
graphic posit ioning dat a.
Prior t o commencing, you should have a writt en sect or plan along t he lines of Tabl e 5-2.
Def aul t RADWI N 5000 HPMP Set t i ngs Chapt er 5
Default RADWIN 5000 HPMP Settings
The default sett ings of t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP configurat ion paramet ers are list ed in
Tabl e 5-1 below.
Table 5-1: Default set t ings
Uni t Par amet er Def aul t Val ue
HBS
I P Address 10.0.0.120
Net Mask 255.0.0.0
Locat ion Locat ion
Cont act Person
Name Cont act
Fact ory default band Product dependent
Channel Bandwidt h 20MHz
RADWI N Manager log-on passwords
Observer admin
Operat or admin
I nst aller wireless
Link Password wireless-p2mp
Lat it ude 51.47885
Longit ude 0.01060
Ant enna height ( m) 130
HSU
I P Address 10.0.0.120
Net Mask 255.0.0.0
Locat ion Locat ion
Cont act Person
Name Name
RADWI N Manager log-on passwords
Observer admin
Operat or admin
I nst aller wireless
Link Password wireless-p2mp
For convenience, we repeat t he t able of paramet ers used in our demonst rat ion sect or. Param-
et ers not list ed are left at t heir default values:
Table 5-2: Paramet er values used in t he demonst rat ion sect or
HBS HBS.01
I P Address 192.168.10.200
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
Lat it ude -37.8148
Longit ude 144.9630
Azimut h (deg) 0
HSUs
Beamwidt h (deg) 90
HSU
HFU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.101
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Haydn
Lat it ude -37.8762
Longit ude 145.0437
HFU.01.02
I P Address 192.168.10.102
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Mozart
Lat it ude -37.4018
Longit ude 145.0086
HNU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.103
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Nomadic
Cont act Brahms
Lat it ude
Ant enna height (m)
Table 5-2: Paramet er values used in t he demonst rat ion sect or ( Cont inued)
Conf i gur i ng t he Sect or out of t he Box - I P Addr esses Chapt er 5
Configuring the Sector out of the Box - IP Addresses
The default log-on I P address for all ODUs in t he sect or is t he same: 10.0.0.120, subnet mask
255.0.0.0 and default gat eway 0.0.0.0. To get t he process st art ed, set up t he I P address on
t he net work card on t he managing comput er t o somet hing like 10.0.0.100, subnet mask
255.255.255.0 and Default Gat eway 0.0.0.0.
Ensure t hat you have a direct LAN connect ion t o t he HBS, run t he RADWI N Manager and log-
on t o it .
Figure 5-1: Logging on wit h fact ory default I P address
Alt ernat ively, you can log on using Local Connect ion wit hout need t o change your Net work
I nt erface Card address:
Ti p
Choose your unit locat ions carefully. For example, for t hree collocat ed HBSs
each wit h 32 HSUs covering 360, mat t ers get out of hand very quickly if
unit s are poorly named. They can always be ident ified by t heir I P
addresses, but t hat is a poor subst it ut e for effect ive naming. A URL-like
naming patt ern based on HBS_n.HSU_y is clear and familiar t o all I nt ernet
users. Keeping t he names I P address independent enables you t o copy t he
ent ire sect or set up t o a different geographic locat ion wit hout I P address
duplicat ion.
Figure 5-2: Logging on wit h Local Connect ion
Here is t he init ial main display using Local Connect ion:
War ni ng
The Local Connect i on met hod uses broadcast packet s t o discover
t he at t ached ODU
I f you log on using Local Connect i on, but your physical connect ion
is not local ( i.e. anyt hing ot her t han a direct connect ion bet ween t he
managing comput er and t he PoE device), t hen any configurat ion you
carry out may affect ot her links in t he net work. Do not do t hi s!
Do not carry out t his procedure using a mult i homed managing com-
put er also connect ed t o a net work. I t will flood t he net work wit h
broadcast packet s. Furt her, it will t hrow any ot her links on t he net-
work int o I nst allat ion or I nact ive mode.
I n any event , as a precaut ion, default log-on over Local Connect ion is
read-only mode. Check t he Read/ Writ e enable box t o carry out inst al-
lat ion procedures.
Net wor k l og on ( I P addr ess t o t he ODU) i s r ecommended.
Figure 5-3: Main window for un-configured HBS ODU
Not ice t he red icon on t he t op left corner of t he window. I t will change t o green as soon as
t he HBS is configured and act ivat ed. Here is t he work-flow:
1. Act ivat e t he HBS which includes set t ing it s I P address. I t will t hen see t he deployed HSUs
regardless of t heir I P address.
2. Configure t he HSUs
3. Regist er t he HSUs t o t he HBS for t raffic
4. Complet e HSU configurat ion including HSU Connect ion Table and any ot her required fine
t uning.
To act i vat e a HBS:
1. Click t he Act i vat e but t on. The Act ivat ion Wizard opens.
2. Click Next :
Ent er t he Sect or I D, Name and Locat ion. All fields are mandat ory. Here are ent ries in
accordance wit h Tabl e 5-2:
Choose your Sect or I D it carefully part icularly if you are using collocat ed HBSs for
ext ra coverage. The Sect or Name and Locat ion are convenience it ems but should be
chosen t o ensure t hat t he sect or is document ed and easily ident ifiable in your RF
planning.
3. Open t he Coordinat es dialog t o set t he locat ion of t he HBS in accordance wit h
Tabl e 5-2:
4. The Link Password may also be changed by clicking Change:
Full det ails for changing t he Link Password may be found on page 6-10.
I t is best left as is if t here is no pressing need t o change it .
5. From t he previous Act ivat ion Wizard window, click Next .
Here you may ent er t he I P det ails if didnt do it earlier. Click Next .
6. The next window is used t o set t he frequency and channels.
The default frequency is t he lowest available (5.735 GHz) in t he operat ing band,
here, 5.730 - 5.845 GHz FCC/ I C.
7. Click Ot her t o see ot her available bands for t his HBS.
Not e
I f you skipped an ent ry, it will be framed in red like t his:
8. For our purposes, we choose 5.820 GHz:
right hand select or wheel
Observe t hat t he right hand spin-wheel is no longer displayed. Had you
left Ot her enabled, you could have chosen a frequency by working t hrough t hose
available in 5MHz increment s.
9. Choose t he required Channel Bandwidt h:
10. To use ACS, check t he Aut omat ic Channel Select ion box:
You can perform a cust omized channel select ion or click Sel ect Al l t o check all t he
channel boxes as shown:
Not e
I f your hardware support s 200 Mbps net aggregat e capacity, you should
chose 40 MHz Channel Bandwidt h t o enable it .
11. Click Next . The Ant enna type and Tx Power window is present ed:
The choice of Tx Power, ant enna gain and cable loss (bet ween t he radio and t he
ant enna) det ermines t he EI RP and is affect ed by such considerat ions as radio limit a-
t ions and regulat ory rest rict ions.
Before complet ing ant enna inst allat ion, you might like t o consider t he background
informat ion about set t ing ant enna paramet ers, in Appendi x E:
Choose your Ant enna Type, Required Tx Power, Ant enna Gain and Cable Loss. We
will set Required Tx Power t o 5 dBm for our example. Click Next .
12. The Summary window of t he Wizard is displayed.
Check t hat all informat ion showed is correct and click Act i vat e. Aft er a few
moment s t he sect or HSUs will be displayed in t he Manager HSU panel.
The field-inst alled HSUs appear ina Table view:
War ni ng
When set t ing Required Tx Power, it is your responsibility t o chose a value in
compliance wit h your local regulat ions.
Conf i gur i ng a f i xed HSU Fr om t he HBS Chapt er 5
Figure 5-4: Act ivat ed HBS recognizing inst alled but unconfigured HSUs
I f t here are t oo many HSUs for t he Table view, swit ch t o t he scrollable List view.
13. I f you are using Local Connect ion, log out and log back in t o t he HBS on it s I P
address.
At t his point , you are able t o configure t he HSUs for service.
You may have observed t hat operat ing frequency 5.790 GHz shown, is not what we chose
(5.820 GHz). The HBS t ries t o opt imize t he frequency t o minimize int erference effect s.
We next configure and regist er t he HSUs. For fixed HSUs you can do t his in eit her order. For
nomadic HSUs you must define t he HSU as Nomadic prior t o regist rat ion. We will show t he
met hod below. Our preference is t o carry out configurat ion first for all HSUs.
Configuring a fixed HSU From the HBS
The HSU act ivit ies described in t his sect ion, may be carried out any t ime - regardless of
whet her or not t he HSU is regist ered for service or not . These act ivit ies include among ot her
t hings, set t ing t he Locat ion, Cont act , Name and I P address.
The procedures in t his sect ion should be carried out for each fixed HSU in t he sect or.
To conf i gur e an f i xed HSU f r om t he HBS:
1. Right click an HSU t o get it s cont ext menu:
Figure 5-5: HSU Cont ext menu
2. Click Conf i gur e. The Configurat ion dialog is displayed. I f you have not already, ent er
a Name Cont act and Locat ion:
Locat i on is a sit e name - typically a building or t ower name. Cont act is t he cont act
person at t hat Locat ion and Name is t he Cont act locat ion. I t might be j ust a t ele-
phone number. Here are our ent ries:
3. Set t he Coordinat es (lat it ude and longit ude) for t he HSU as shown in t he Sect or Plan:
4. Set t he HSU Tx Power (possibly as required by regulat ions) . Click Tx & Ant enna.
The following dialog is displayed:
Set t he Ant enna Connect ion Type, Ant enna Type, Required Tx Power, Ant enna Gain
and Cable Loss as required. For our example, we use ext ernal ant ennas and we set
Tx Power t o 5 dBm. I f you click apply, you receive t he following confirmat ion
request :
5. I n any event , clicking Yes result s in a furt her message appearing:
6. Click OK. The HSU display area refreshes wit h t he newly configured HSU in it s new
locat ion in t he sect or.
7. Reopen t he Configurat ion dialog for t he HSU and t hen open t he Management t ab.
Conf i gur i ng a nomadi c HSU Fr om t he HBS Chapt er 5
Change t he default HSU I P Address, Subnet mask and Default Gat eway as shown:
8. For now, we will leave t he remaining fields. Click OK t o exit t he Configurat ion win-
dow. You will be offered a caut ionary message:
Click Yes. The newly ent ered paramet ers for t he HSU will be displayed following t he
next sync loss/ rest ore t o t he HSU. You can achieve t he same t hing by issuing a rest
t o t he HSU from it s cont ext menu.
9. Repeat st eps 1 t o 8 for one more HSU.
Configuring a nomadic HSU From the HBS
To conf i gure an nomadi c HSU f r om t he HBS:
1. Carry out st eps 1 t o 7 as in t he previous sect ion for afixed HSU.
2. Open t he Nomadi c t ab:
Conf i gur i ng a nomadi c HSU Fr om t he HBS Chapt er 5
3. From t he Type list , choose Nomadi c. The right hand Level list is enabled:
4. The four levels enable you t o split nomadic HSUs int o up t o four service groups wit h
(for example) different QoS paramet ers. Choose level A and t hen OK. The number of
t ime slot s allocat ed t o t he HSU will be updat ed during t he regist rat ion process. You
are offered t he following confirmat ion message:
Regi st er i ng a f i xed HSU f or ser vi ce Chapt er 5
The HSU no longer appears on t he HBS Table view. I t will ret urn following regist ra-
t ion, t o which we now t urn.
Registering a fixed HSU for service
We cont inue our illust rat ion using t he HSU, HFU.10.101.
To r egi st er an f i xed HSU f or ser vi ce:
1. Right click a fixed HSU t o get it s cont ext menu:
2. Click Regi st er ... I f you did not configure t he ant enna type for t he HSU, you are
asked t o do so now:
Choose t he required type and click OK.
The Regist rat ion window opens:
3. You may edit or add t he sit e Name, Locat i on and Coor di nat es.
4. I f you are using Dual Ant ennas, you may check t he MI MO or Diversity ant enna mode.
The choice is HSU specific. For furt her det ails about MI MO/ Diversity ant enna mode,
see Appendi x E.
5. Click t he Eval uat e butt on. Service evaluat ion t akes a few seconds during which t he
window is darkened and inact ive. Upon complet ion you may assign t ime slot s t o t he
HSU:

Figure 5-6: HSU Regist rat ion dialog
Not ice t hat t he Evaluat ing act ivit y icon cont inues t o rot at e aft er complet ion of t he
evaluat ion. The Manager maint ains dynamic monit oring of t he sect or for inj ect ion
int o t he sect or of HSUs elsewhere and accordingly reduces t he available t ime slot s.
6. Use t he slider t o choose t he number of t ime slot s t o be allocat ed t o t he HSU.
The Regi st er but t on is now enabled.
7. Use t he sliders t o set uplink and downlink MI R. You may defer t his and carry it out
using t he HSU Conf i gur e opt ion. The MI R act s as a t hrot t le.
8. Click Regi st er it t o complet e t he process. Here is t he result for our example:
Observe t hat t he regist ered HSU icon LED is now green and t hat t he Time Slot s bar
on t he left reflect s t he proport ion of t ime slot s allocat ed.
9. Repeat st eps 1 t o 8 for ot her fixed HSUs. Here is t he result for our example:
10.
Regi st er i ng a nomadi c HSU f or ser vi ce Chapt er 5
Registering a nomadic HSU for service
Alt hough we only have one nomadic HSU in our demonst rat ion sect or, in pract ice we would
make provision for a larger number t o enable movement bet ween sect ors. By way of exam-
ple, we will pre-regist er t hree HSU slot s t o levels A, B and C and t ime slot s t o each level as
shown:
To conf i gure nomadi c HSUs f r om t he HBS:
1. Open t he HBS Configurat ion window and t hen it s Nomadic Tab:
2.
Figure 5-7: HBS Nomadic Configurat ion
3. I n t he Add Devi ces window, click t he Add spin wheel but t ons and t he Time slot s
spin-wheels as shown.
The Fi nal Out come Chapt er 5
The Regi st er but t on is enabled.
4. Click t he Regi st er butt on t o regist er t he HSUs. Not e t hat you may use t he bott om
dialog t o save or upload a saved HBS configurat ion. We will demonst rat e uploading a
saved configurat ion at t he end of t his chapt er.
5. Exit t he Configurat ion dialog.
The Final Outcome
Here is t he out come for our example:
Figure 5-8: Fully funct ional mixed fixed and nomadic sect or - Table view
Here is a Map view of a fixed sect or:
p
Figure 5-9: Fully funct ional sect or, t wo fixed one nomadic HSU - Map view
You may now carry out any ot her adj ust ment s t o t he HSUs from t he HBS or by direct connec-
t ion. Not ice t hat we adj ust ed t he Tx Power for all element s in t he sect or t o keep t he RSS at a
reasonable level.
As a part ial alt ernat ive met hod, you may ent er t he HSU Name and Locat i on fields during
Regist rat ion.
Here is t he Map view showing HSU det ails for a fixed-nomadic sect or:
Not e
I f you do not see t he changes as shown, a hard reset of t he HSUs will cause
t hem t o appear.
Regi st er i ng t he HSUs f or Ser vi ce Chapt er 5
Registering the HSUs for Service
Figure 5-10: Fully funct ional sect or: t wo fixed one nomadic HSU - Map view wit h det ails
Choosing Diversity Antenna Mode During Registration
Suppose t hat in Fi gur e 5-8 for HFU.10.102 we had chosen Diversit y mode, t he out come
would look like t his:
The t hroughput on t his HSU has dropped t o about half of it s previous value. The ot her HSU is
left unchanged.
This underlines t he flexibility of t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP syst em which enables HSUs t o be
independent ly configured depending on t heir part icular locat ion.
Deactivating the HBS
From t he HBS but t on bar, click t he right hand but t on followed by Deact i vat e.
Der egi st er i ng an HSU Chapt er 5
You are offered a caut ionary message:
I f you proceed, t he HBS display will change t o reflect t he deact ivat ed st at e:
Not ice t hat t he HSUs remain regist ered, and will ret urn t o full service aft er t he HBS is re-act i-
vat ed.
Deregistering an HSU
A HSU may be deregist ered by using t he Deregist er ent ry in an HSU cont ext menu or using
t he but t on from an HSU but t on bar.
Wher e has my HSU gone? Chapt er 5
Where has my HSU gone?
Suppose t hat you inst alled t wo collocat ed HBSs wit h cont iguous sect ors. I t is possible t hat an
HSU locat ed close t o t he common sect or boundary may discover t he wrong HBS. A HSU can
be forced across t o anot her HBS by changing it s Sect or I D t o t hat of t he required HBS. The
met hod for doing t his is covered in Chapt er 7.
Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template
Refer t o Fi gure 5-7 of which t he following is an excerpt :
Following any furt her fine t uning, open up t he HBS Nomadic t ab, and click Save. You are
offered t he st andard Save File dialog. Save t he HBS Nomadic sett ings file (Mobilit ySet-
t ings.mob) t o a convenient locat ion. For our example we changed t he file name t o Nomadic-
Set t ings.mob.
Creating Nomadic Entries for a Sector from a HBS Template
The saved set t ings file may be used as a t emplat e for furt her sect ors.
To cr eat e a sect or f r om a HBS Nomadi c set t i ngs f i l e:
1. St art ing wit h a new HBS and HSUs, log on t o t he HBS.
2. Act ivat e t he HBS in t he usual way.
3. Open t he Nomadic t ab in t he Configurat ion window. I n t he Save / Upload Set t ings
window, click Upl oad.
Figure 5-11: Preparing t o upload t he Nomadic file
Cr eat i ng Nomadi c Ent r i es f or a Sect or f r om a HBS Templ at e Chapt er 5
4. I n our case we have one HBS, so it is sufficient t o ent er t he Nomadic file as shown
and t hen click St ar t . Aft er a few moment s, t he St at us field indicat es Done.
The result is as expect ed:
You will of course need t o separat ely configure t he part icipat ing HSUs. f we connect our con-
figured nomadic HSU, we revert t o our original sect or:
Cr eat i ng Nomadi c Ent r i es f or a Sect or f r om a HBS Templ at e Chapt er 5
To cr eat e a sect or f r om a HBS I P l i st and a Nomadi c set t i ngs f i l e:
1. I n t he window of Fi gur e 5-11, ent er a HBS list file. The format of t he file is lines of
< I P addr ess> < Read-Wr i t e communi t y>
For example,
192.168.10.200 net man
All of t he HBSs need t o act ivat ed and accessible (via a swit ch) t o t he managing com-
put er. They need not be on t he same sub-net .
Alt ernat ively, ent er t hem one by one using t he Plus butt on.
Any unact ivat ed HBSs will be shown as unavailable:
2. Make any furt her changes t o t he displayed list using t he Plus/ Minus butt ons.
3. Click St ar t t o commence t he process.
4. The list window will indicat e t he success or ot herwise of t he upload for each HBS.
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part3:SectorManagement
UM50003300/05.12
Chapter 6
Managing the Sector
This chapt er deals wit h managing t he sect or from t he HBS. I t covers HBS Configurat ion and
HSU Configurat ion from t he HBS. HSU direct or over-t he-air configurat ion is a litt le different
and is covered in Chapt er 7.
A Configurat ion window is available for bot h t he HBS and t he HSUs t o change sett ing wit hout
necessarily dropping service. Nevert heless care must be exercised when changing t hem. By
way of example, changing ant enna paramet ers for a HSU result s in a HSU reset . I t is neces-
sary however t o have t his funct ion in t he Configurat ion window since it is required t o init ially
set up t he unit .
The HBS it self may be configured over-t he-air: A scenario for t his is where t he sect or is back-
hauled by on of t he HSUs. There are no significant differences bet ween t he t wo met hods,
however some care is required. I f for example, you deact ivat e t he HBS over-t he-air, you will
lock yourself out of t he sect or.
Running Spect rum View from t he HBS manager over-t he-air, will lock you out for t he durat ion
of t he Spect rum View t imeout period.
Configuring a HBS
Configuration Menu Buttons
Open t he Configurat ion window.
The Backup and Rest or e but t ons provide for backup and rest ore of t he HBS soft ware.
The Ref r esh but t on rest ores t he current window t o it s previous st at e abandoning any
changes you made, provided t hat you did not click Appl y or OK.
We will work t hrough each of t he Configurat ion t abs in t urn wit h emphasis on t abs or feat ures
not encount ered in t he previous chapt ers.
Syst em Chapt er 6
System
These it ems are convenience fields. Name and Locat i on are typically ent ered during HBS
act ivat ion. You may like t o change Cont act here, not set during act ivat ion. The Coor di nat es
butt on opens t he same window as used during act ivat ion.
Ai r I nt er f ace Chapt er 6
Air Interface
This panel has t he same funct ionalit y as t he corresponding window in t he Act ivat ion Wizard
(see Chapt er 5). Changing t he Sect or I D will percolat e t o all regist ered HSUs. I t will of
course, be picked up by newly inst alled and regist ered HSUs.
The only way t o change t he Operat ing Channel is by deact ivat ion and react ivat ion.
Channel Bandwidt h and Channel Select ion changes will all be sect or-wide.
Tx and Ant enna Chapt er 6
Tx and Antenna
This t ab is available for bot h t he HBS and HSUs. I t has t he same meaning in bot h cases.
For t he HBS, changes made here may affect link quality and in t he case of ant enna t ype,
cause a sect or re-sync.
Changing t he ant enna t ype for an HSU will cause a re-sync t o t hat sit e only.
Hub Si t e Sync [ HSS] Chapt er 6
Hub Site Sync [HSS]
The Ext ernal Pulses which might be det ect ed, may come from a collocat ed HBS, a RADWI N
2000 ODU or a RADWI N GSU configured as Hub Sync Mast er. To enable HSS, check t he
Enabl ed check box.
Ensure t hat t he correct Operat ional st at e is select ed - in our example, Hub Si t e Cl i ent -
Cont i nue Tx. Click Appl y or OK t o enable HSS.
.See Chapt er 10 for furt her det ail about HSS.
Management Chapt er 6
Management
I f you set t he I P and relat ed addresses correct ly, t here should be litt le t o change here.
The t hree sub-windows, Trap Dest inat ions, VLAN Management and Prot ocol dialogs are
generic t o t he HBS nad t he HSUs (direct or over-t he-air) and are discussed below.
Trap Destinations
Ent er t he Trap Dest inat ions. They could include t he I P address of t he managing comput er.
The event s log will be st ored at t he addresses chosen.
VLAN for Management
Management VLAN Conf i gur at i on
Figure 6-1: VLAN for Management
VLAN Management enables separat ion of user t raffic from management t raffic whenever such
separat ion is required. I t is recommended t hat each member of a sect or be configured wit h
different VLAN I Ds for management t raffic. ( This reduces your chances of accident ally locking
yourself out of t he sect or.)
To enabl e VLAN f or management :
1. I n t he window of Fi gur e 6-1, check t he Enabl ed box.
2. Ent er a VLAN I D. I t s value should be bet ween 2 and 4094.
Aft er ent ering t he VLAN I D, only packet s wit h t he specified VLAN I D are processed
for management purposes by t he HBS/ HSU ODU. This includes all t he prot ocols sup-
port ed by t he ODU (I CMP, SNMP, Telnet and NTP). The VLAN priority is used for t he
Caut i on
VLAN I Ds are used by RADWI N product s in t hree separat e cont ext s:
Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Et hernet Ring. I t is recommended t hat
you use different VLAN I Ds for each cont ext .
t raffic sent from t he ODU t o t he managing comput er. Using VLAN for management
t raffic affect s all types of management connect ions (local, net work and over t he air).
3. Ent er a Priority number bet ween 0 and 7.
4. Change t he VLAN I D and Priorit y of t he managing comput er NI C t o be t he same as
t hose of st eps 2 and 3 respect ively.
5. Click Appl y or OK.
Lost or f or got t en VLAN I D
I f t he VLAN I D is forgot t en or t here is no VLAN t raffic connect ed t o t he ODU, t hen reset t he
relevant ODU.
During t he first t wo minut es of connect ion, t he ODU uses management packet s bot h wit h and
wit hout VLAN. You may use t his period t o reconfigure t he VLAN I D and priorit y.
Supported Protocols
For a sect or managed as part of a net work, direct access t o a HBS/ HSU using Telnet is consid-
ered t o be a security breach. Telnet access may be enabled or disabled by clicking t he Prot o-
col t ab and enabling/ disabling Telnet access using t he Telnet check-box. Similar
considerat ions apply t o access via t he Web I nt erface.
For furt her det ails about Telnet access see page 6-42.
For furt her det ails about t he Web I nt erface, see Chapt er 21.
Telnet and Web I nt erface access modes when available, are sit e specific. I f for example, you
want Telnet access from specific sect or members, you should enable it for t hese sit es and dis-
able it elsewhere.
Caut i on
Changing t his paramet er causes t he RADWI N Manager t o immediat ely
disconnect . To avoid inconvenience, you should verify t he change by
set t ing t he VLAN only t o one ODU, and only aft er verifying proper
management operat ion, change t he ot her ODU VLAN set t ing.
Not e
SNMP access is on by default for RADWI N 5000 HPMP and cannot be
disabled.
Not e
I f Telnet or Web I nt erface access mode poses a general security risk, you
must disable t hem for each sect or member separat ely.
I nvent or y Chapt er 6
Inventory
You might like t o capt ure or copy t he informat ion here:
The I nvent ory informat ion will be required by Cust omer Support should you require assis-
t ance.
Secur i t y Chapt er 6
Security
This sect ion applies t o bot h t he HBS and HSUs unless st at ed ot herwise.
Figure 6-2: Sect or Security set t ings
The Security dialog enables you t o change t he Link Password and t he SNMP Community
st rings.
Changing the Link Password
This it em is available as follows:
Always at t he HBS
At an isolat ed HSU
Never for an act ive HSU
Here are t he det ails:
The default password is wi r el ess-p2mp. Opt ionally, you can change t he link password as
explained here.
To change t he l i nk passwor d:
1. Open t he Secur i t y t ab ( Fi gur e 6-2) .
The Change Link Password dialog box opens.
Figure 6-3: Change Link Password dialog box
2. Ent er t he current link password ( The default link password for a new ODU is wi r e-
l ess-p2mp).
I f you have forgot t en t he Link Password, click t he Forgot t en Link Password but t on.
The following window is displayed:
Figure 6-4: Lost or forgot t en Link Password recovery
Follow t he inst ruct ions t o use t he Alt ernat ive Link Password, and click OK t o finish.
You are ret urned t o t he window in Fi gure 6-3 above. Cont inue wit h t he next st ep.
3. Ent er a new password.
4. Ret ype t he new password in t he Confirm field.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when asked if you want t o change t he link password.
Not e
Use t he Hide charact ers check box for maximum securit y
7. Click OK at t he Password changed success message.
RADWIN Manager Community Strings
The ODU communicat es wit h t he RADWI N Manager using SNMPv1 prot ocol. The prot ocol
defines t hree types of communit ies:
Read-Onl y for ret rieving informat ion from t he ODU
Read-Wr i t e t o configure and cont rol t he ODU
Tr ap used by t he ODU t o issue t raps.
The Community st ring must be ent ered at log on. You must know t he password and t he cor-
rect Communit y st ring t o gain access t o t he syst em. You may have read-only privileges. I t is
not possible t o manage t he ODU if t he read-writ e or t he read Community values are forgot-
t en. A new Communit y value may be obt ained from RADWI N Cust omer Support for t he pur-
pose of set t ing new Communit y. You must also have available t he serial number or t he MAC
address of t he ODU.
The read-writ e Communit y st rings and read-only Community st rings have a minimum of five
alphanumeric charact ers. (br u1 and br u4097 are not permit t ed) . Changing t he t rap Com-
munity is opt ional and is done by clicking t he check box.
Editing Community Strings
When edit ing t hese st rings, bot h read-writ e and read-only communit ies must be defined.
Upon logging on for t he first t ime, use t he following as t he current Communit y:
For Read-Writ e Communit y, use net man.
For Read-Only Community, use publ i c.
For Trap Communit y, use publ i c
To change a Communi t y st r i ng:
1. Type t he current read-writ e Community (default is net man) .
2. Choose t he communit ies t o be changed by clicking t he check box.
3. Type t he new Community st ring and re-type t o confirm. A communit y st ring must
cont ain at least five and no more t han 32 charact ers excluding SPACE, TAB, and any
of > # @| * ?; ."
4. Click OK t o save.
Not e
A link password must cont ain at least eight but no more t han 16
charact ers excluding SPACE, TAB, and any of > # @| * ?; .
Rest oring Fact ory Default s ret urns t he Link Password t o wi r el ess-
p2mp.
Not e
n t his sect ion, ODU may be eit her a HBS or an HSU.
Figure 6-5: Changing t he Communit y St ring
Forgotten Community string
I f t he read-writ e Communit y st ring is unknown, an alt ernat ive Communit y key can be used.
The alt ernat ive Communit y key is unique per ODU and can be used only t o change t he Com-
munity st rings. The alt ernat ive Communit y key is supplied wit h t he product , and should be
kept in a safe place.
I f bot h t he read-writ e Community and t he alt ernat ive Community key are unavailable, t hen
an alt ernat ive Communit y key can be obt ained from RADWI N Cust omer Support using t he
ODU serial number or MAC address. The serial number is locat ed on t he product label. The
serial number and t he MAC address are displayed in t he Sit e Configurat ion invent ory t ab.
When you have t he alt ernat ive Community key, click t he For got Communi t y but t on and
ent er t he Alt ernat ive Community key (Fi gure 6-6). Then change t he read-writ e Community
st ring.
Dat e and Ti me Chapt er 6
Figure 6-6: Alt ernat ive Communit y Dialog box
Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time
The ODU maint ains a dat e and t ime. The dat e and t ime should be synchronized wit h any Net-
work Time Prot ocol (NTP) version 3 compat ible server.
During power-up t he ODU att empt s t o configure t he init ial dat e and t ime using an NTP Server.
I f t he server I P address is not configured or is not reachable, a default t ime is set .
When configuring t he NTP Server I P address, you should also configure t he offset from t he
Universal Coordinat ed Time (UTC). I f t here is no server available, you can eit her set t he dat e
and t ime, or you can set it t o use t he dat e and t ime from t he managing comput er. Not e t hat
manual set t ing is not recommended since it will be overridden by a reset , power up, or syn-
chronizat ion wit h an NTP Server.
To set t he dat e and t i me:
1. Det ermine t he I P address of t he NTP server t o be used.
2. Test it for connect ivity using t he command (Windows XP), for example:
w32t m / st r i pchar t / comput er : 216.218.192.202
Not e
The NTP uses UDP port 123. I f a fire wall is configured bet ween t he ODU
and t he NTP Server t his port must be opened.
I t can t ake up t o 8 minut es for t he NTP t o synchronize t he ODU dat e and
t ime.
Dat e and Ti me Chapt er 6
Figure 6-7: Dat e and Time Configurat ion
3. I f ent ering an I P address for t he NTP Server, click Cl ear, and t hen ent er t he new
address.
4. Set your sit e Offset value in minut es ahead or behind GMT
1
.
5. To manually set t he dat e and t ime, click Change and edit t he new values.
Figure 6-8: Change Dat e and Time
1. Greenwich Mean Time
Et her net Ser vi ce Conf i gur at i on Chapt er 6
6. Click OK t o ret urn t o t he Configurat ion dialog.
Ethernet Service Configuration
Figure 6-9: Set t ing Et hernet services
HBS Aging Time
The HBS works in Br i dge Mode. I n Bridge mode t he ODU performs bot h learning and aging,
forwarding only relevant packet s over t he sect or. The aging t ime of t he ODU is by default , 300
seconds.
Ethernet Ports Configuration
The ODU Et hernet port mode is configurable for line speed (10/ 100/ 1000BaseT) and duplex
mode ( half or full duplex).
Line speed 1000BaseT is only available if t he HBS is connect ed t o A GbE PoE device.
Et her net Ser vi ce Conf i gur at i on Chapt er 6
.
An Aut o Det ect feat ure is provided, whereby t he line speed and duplex mode are det ect ed
aut omat ically using aut o-negot iat ion. Use manual configurat ion when at t ached ext ernal
equipment does not support aut o-negot iat ion. The default set t ing is Aut o Det ect .
The icon next t o t he CRC error count may be clicked t o reset t he count er t o zero.
To conf i gur e t he Et her net Mode:
I n t he Et hernet Port s Configurat ion pane, use t he drop-down menu t o choose t he
required mode.
Transmission Ratio (Tx Ratio, Asymmetric Allocation))
The Tr ansmi ssi on Rat i o shows t he allocat ion of t hroughput bet ween downlink and uplink
t raffic at t he HBS. The Transmission Rat io is not only sect or-wide: I f you use HSS (Chapt er
10) t o collocat ed several HBSs (t o cover adj acent sect ors), t hey must all use t he same Trans-
mission Rat io.
QoS Configuration
To inst all and use t he Et hernet QoS feat ure, see Chapt er 16.
Advanced: Broadcast/Multicast Flooding Protection
Broadcast / Mult icast Flooding Prot ect ion provides a measure of prot ect ion by limit ing mult icast
and broadcast packet s t o mo more t han 12.5% of available capacity.
Caut i on
You should not reconfigure t he port t hat is used for t he managing comput er
connect ion, since a wrong configurat ion can cause a management
disconnect ion or Et hernet services int errupt ion.
Nomadi c Chapt er 6
You may wish t o un-check t his it em if your applicat ion is based on mult icast / broadcast pack-
et s - for example, video surveillance using mult icast downlink, or video conferencing using
mult icast uplink.
Nomadic
See page 5-23.
Operations
This sect ion applies t o bot h HBSs and HSUs.
Oper at i ons Chapt er 6
Reverting to Factory Settings
Figure 6-10: Rest ore Fact ory Set t ings and License Act ivat ion
Clicking t he Rest ore Default s but t on opens t he following self explanat ory dialog:
License Activation
You may add addit ional bands using t he license Act ivat ion facility. Addit ional bands (if avail-
able) are obt ained using t he Change Band funct ion, described below.
Advanced: Fal se Radar Mi t i gat i on f or HBS Chapt er 6
For a single band, j ust ent er t he supplied license Key and click Act i vat e. I f you have a list of
t hem (a t ext file) you will need t o use t he Li cense Fi l e opt ion.
I n some inst ances it may involve purchasing t he relevant license from RADWI N. You should
cont act Cust omer Service for det ails. You will find t he t echnical st eps required t o obt ain and
inst all ext ra bands on page 6-39.
Advanced: False Radar Mitigation for HBS
This t ab is only visible if
You are using a Regulat ion requiring Radar Channel Avoidance and
You are logged on as I nst aller
For t his release, t his feat ure at t he HBS, is only relevant t o t he 5.3 GHz ETSI band.
Configurat ion of False Radar Mit igat ion is covered in Chapt er 14.
HSU Connection Table
From t he HBS but t on bar, click t he right hand but t on followed by HSU Connect i on Tabl e.
The following t able is displayed:
Conf i gur i ng an HSU f r om t he HBS Mai n Wi ndow Chapt er 6
Figure 6-11: HSU I nt ercommunicat ion - Connect ion Table
The green shaded squares show int ercommunicat ing element s wit hin t he sect or. MNG refers
t o management t raffic which should always be open bet ween HSUs and t he HBS. LAN refers
t o service t raffic bet ween t he HBS and t he HSUs. As shown, t he t wo HSUs may not communi-
cat e bet ween t hemselves. Clicking t he t op whit e square would enable communicat ion ( via t he
HBS) bet ween t hem.
You may in fact disable all t raffic bet ween t he HBS and t he HSUs and rest ore it using t his
device.
Configuring an HSU from the HBS Main Window
Right click an HSU for it s cont ext menu and click Conf i gur e t o open t he HSU Configurat ion
window.
The Backup and Rest or e but t ons have t he same funct ionalit y as t he corresponding butt ons
for t he HBS. They provide for backup and rest ore of t he HSU soft ware.
The Buzzer but t on may set or mut e t he buzzer.
Syst em Chapt er 6
The Aut o posit ion means t hat t he Buzzer will give t he beeps set out on page 3-19 during
inst allat ion or upon sync loss.
The Advanced Aut o posit ion means t hat in addit ion, t he buzzer will beep cont inuously at dif-
ferent rat es upon sync loss, ant enna mis-alignment and ot her event s for up t o t wo minut es
following rest orat ion of sync.
Recall t hat t he main use of t he buzzer t one is for HSU ant enna alignment .
We will work t hrough each of t he Configurat ion t abs in t urn:
System
Figure 6-12: HSU Configurat ion window (HBS)
These it ems are convenience fields. They are t ypically ent ered during regist rat ion.
Tx & Ant enna Chapt er 6
Tx & Antenna
Figure 6-13: HSU Configurat ion - Set t ing ant enna type and paramet ers
The remarks about changing t he HBS paramet ers also apply here. Changing t he ant enna type
will cause a re-sync bet ween t he HSU and t he HBS.
Management
Figure 6-14: HSU Configurat ion - I P addresses
The funct ionalit y is ident ical as t hat for t he HBS.
I nvent or y Chapt er 6
Inventory
You should not e t he det ails for each HSU.
Security
You may change t he SNMP community st rings only for t he HSU from here. You cannot change
t he Link password from an HSU.
Dat e & Ti me Chapt er 6
Date & Time
The funct ionalit y is ident ical as t hat for t he HBS.
Et her net Chapt er 6
Ethernet
Et hernet configurat ion for an HSU follows t he same general pat t ern as t he corresponding t ab
for t he HBS but wit h import ant differences.
Ethernet Ports Configuration
This it em is same for HSUs and t he HBS. See page 6-16.
Maximum Information Rate
The Maximum I nformat ion Rat e (MI R) was init ially set during HSU Regist rat ion. You may
change it here.
VLAN Configuration
For Traffic VLAN configurat ion, see Chapt er 13.
QoS Configuration
QoS configurat ion is described in Chapt er 16.
Nomadi c Chapt er 6
Nomadic
You cannot change a fixed HSU t o a nomadic HSU here wit hout prior deregist rat ion. For a
nomadic HSU, you may change it s operat ing level or even revert it t o a fixed HSU.
Nomadi c Chapt er 6
Oper at i ons Chapt er 6
Operations
This funct ionality is ident ical t o t hat for t he HBS.
Advanced: False Radar Mitigation
For t his release, t his feat ure for HSUs, is relevant t o t he 5.3 GHz ETSI and t he 5.4 GHz FCC/
I C bands.
Repl aci ng an HSU Chapt er 6
Replacing an HSU
A defect ive HSU may be replaced by anot her HSU belonging t o t he sect or provided t hat t he
replacement is not regist ered. Here is a t ypical scenario:
Figure 6-15: Unit 10.101 is down and unit 10.1023is available and not regist ered
Since t he replacement procedure is a rat her delicat e process, we will st ep t hrough it wit h a
det ailed example based on t he scenario in Fi gur e 6-15.
To r epl ace a def ect i ve HSU:
1. Right click t he defect ive unit for it s cont ext menu:
I t has a new it em: Repl ace.
2. Click Repl ace. Your are offered a list of HSUs available as replacement s. I n our
example t here is one: 10.103.
Repl aci ng an HSU Chapt er 6
3. Select t he required unit by clicking on it .
4. Click OK. You are asked t o confirm before proceeding:
5. Click OK again. You receive furt her confirmat ion:
Here is t he final out come:
Updat i ng HSU Ser vi ces Chapt er 6
Not ice t hat 10.103 has replaced 10.101 inherit ing most of it s sett ings. I t may not
inherit t he Tx and Ant enna set t ings, which you should check.
Updating HSU Services
Choosing Updat e Ser vi ces from an HSU cont ext menu or clicking from t he HSU butt on
bar opens t he Regist rat ion window. You may use t his t o swit ch t he HSU bet ween MI MO and
Diversit y mode and change t he HSU t ime slot allocat ion.
Suspending an HSU
You may break t he link (cause a sync loss) t o an un-regist ered HSU for a fixed amount of
t ime. Here is t he scenario:
HSU 10.101 is not regist ered.
Not e
The I P address of t he replacement unit is not changed. To ensure t hat all
10.101 t raffic act ually get s t o t he new unit , you should also change it s I P
address t o t hat of t he original 10.101 unit .
Changi ng t he Sect or Band Chapt er 6
To suspend an un-r egi st er ed HSU:
1. Click Suspend in it s cont ext menu. You are request ed t o ent er a suspend durat ion.
2. Choose a suspend t ime and click OK. During t he suspend durat ion, t he HSU will be
delet ed from t he HBS Main Window HSU panel. The HSU ret urns t o t he main display
wit h resumpt ion of sync.
Changing the Sector Band
Changing t he Band in use is always carried out at t he sect or level (not per inst alled ODU). To
t he Sect or Band you must be logged on t o t he HBS as I nst aller. I n I nst aller mode, t he right
hand butt on, on t he Base St at ion butt on bar has an ext ra funct ion, Change Band.
To change t he Sect or Band:
1. Click Change Band. A list of available Bands is displayed:
Figure 6-16: Change or Add Bands
2. Select t he required Band and click OK. For our purposes, we choose 5.740-5.950
GHz Universal. The band is highlight ed and right but t on is enabled.
Figure 6-17: Add/ Change Band dialog
3. Click t he right butt on. The following window opens:
4. Here you may chose t he working channel bandwidt h and channel select ion as in t he
act ivat ion process. Click OK t o accept your choice. You are ret urned t o t he display in
Fi gur e 6-17.
5. Click OK again. The following caut ionary message is displayed:
6. Click Yes t o cont inue. Aft er a short delay, you are offered a final confirmat ion:
7. Click OK. A sect or re-sync follows. Here is t he final result :
Having set t he channel bandwidt h and operat ing channels earlier, t here is no need
for deact ivat ion and react ivat ion.
You may also add new Bands by clicking t he Add Bands but t on. There are several provisos t o
t his:
Addit ional Bands must be available for your hardware
Such addit ional Bands must be available wit hin t he framework of your local regula-
t ions
Acquisit ion of addit ional Bands may be subj ect t o payment of a licensing fee t o RAD-
WI N Lt d.
The foregoing applies t o bot h regulat ed and unregulat ed Bands.
To obt ai n and i nst al l addi t i onal bands:
1. Make a list of ODU serial numbers for all HBSs and all HSUs t o receive addit ional
bands. The list should be a simple t ext file, one serial number per line. ( The serial
numbers are locat ed on t he st ickers on t he ODUs.)
2. As I nst aller, open t he window of Fi gur e 6-16 above, and click Add Bands. The fol-
lowing inst ruct ion panel is displayed:
Not e
There is no connect ion bet ween license fees payable t o RADWI N for
addit ional inst alled Bands (a hardware feat ure) and license fees payable t o
regulat ory aut horit ies for t he right t o use such Bands (a legal imposit ion).
Figure 6-18: Add Bands I nst ruct ions Panel
The serial numbers displayed relat e t o t he ODUs in t he sect or. Click Copy t o Cl i p-
boar d.
3. This st ep applies only if you have addit ional un-inst alled unit s:
Before proceeding t o st ep 2 in Fi gur e 6-18, open your own list in a plain t ext edit or.
I f t he displayed serial numbers are in t he list , select your list and copy it all t o t he
clipboard. Ot herwise append t he clipboard cont ent s t o your list . Select t he whole list
and save it t o t he clipboard.
4. Now carry out st eps 2 t o 5 in Fi gur e 6-18. St ep 2 will t ake you t o a Web page,
which looks somet hi ng like t his:
5. Fill out t he request ed det ails. Remember t o t erminat e t he dialog by clicking t he Get
Key but t on.
6. The result s of your request will be displayed wit h furt her inst ruct ions,
A few minut es lat er, you should receive an email, cont aining in it s body, a list of
license keys.
Conf i gur at i on wi t h Tel net Chapt er 6
7. Copy and Past e t he license keys int o a plain t ext file and save it t o a safe known
place.
8. Open t he Conf i gur e | Oper at i ons t ab (Fi gur e 6-10). Check t he License File but-
t on, navigat e t o t he file you save in t he last st ep.
9. Upon complet ion of t he process, click Act i vat e. The next t ime you ent er t he Change
Bands t ab, t he new bands will be available.
Configuration with Telnet
Telnet Access to the HBS
A Telnet t erminal can be used t o configure and monit or t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP.
To st art a Telnet session on t he HBS, use t el net < ODU_I P> .
For example, if you run Telnet as follows,
t el net 192.168.10.200
you will be asked for a user name and password.
The Telnet log on user name is t he password t hat you used t o ent er t he RADWI N Manager
(for example, t he default : admi n). The Telnet password is t he corresponding Communit y
st ring (default : net man).
Figure 6-19: Telnet session log on t o t he HBS
A Read-Only Community st ring allows you t o use di spl ay commands only whereas a Read-
Writ e Community st ring allows you t o use di spl ay commands and execut e set commands.
Tel net Access t o t he HBS Chapt er 6
Support ed HBS Telnet commands are shown in Tabl e 6- 1 t o Tabl e 6-3.
Table 6-1: HBS Telnet - Display Commands
Command Expl anat i on
display invent ory
Displays ODU product name, Name, Locat ion, hardware and sof t ware
revisions, upt ime, MAC address.
display management Displays I P, subnet , Gat eway, Traps t able
display link < param: all,reg,unreg> Displays all st at ic det ails about t he sect or or HSU
display et hernet Displays Port t able (St at e, St at us and act ion)
display et hernet _errors Displays Cable st at ist ics
display nt p Displays Time, Server and Offset
display PM < int erface: AI R,LAN1>
< int erval: current ,day,mont h>
Shows t he performance monit or t ables for each int erface according t o
user defined monit oring int ervals
display bands Displays available bands
Table 6-2: HBS Telnet - Set I mmediat e Commands
set ip < ipaddr> < subnet Mask> < gat eway>
Set t he ODU I P address, subnet mask and gat eway. The user must reset
t he ODU aft er t he command complet ion
set t rap < index: 1-10> < ipaddr> < port : 0-
65535>
Set a specif ic t rap from t he t raps t able (e.g. set t rap 3 192.168..101 162)
set readpw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he read access password (Read Communit y)
set writ epw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he read-writ e access password (Read-Writ e Communit y)
set t rappw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he t rap Communit y st ring
set t pc< power: Value bet ween minimal Tx power,
and maximal Tx power>
Set t he ODU Tx Power. I f a wrong value is ent ered, bot h min and max
values shall be displayed in t he error reply
set name < new name> Set t he name of t he link
set locat ion < new locat ion> Set t he name of t he locat ion
set cont act < new cont act > Set t he name of t he sit e manager
set et hernet < port : LAN1>
< mode: AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DI SABLE>
Set t he mode and speed of t he Et hernet port
reboot
Reset s t he ODU. The user is warned t hat t he command will reset t he
ODU. A new Telnet session t o t he ODU may be opened aft er t he reset is
complet e.
help Displays t he available commands
Table 6-3: HBS Telnet - Set Commands requiring Reset
set secI d < Sect orI D> Set new sect or I D - Reset required.
Tel net Access t o t he HSU Chapt er 6
Telnet Access to the HSU
The procedure is t he same as for t he HBS.
Figure 6-20: Telnet Management window - HSU
Support ed HSU Telnet commands are shown in Tabl e 6-4 t o Tabl e 6-6.
Table 6-4: HSU Telnet - Display Commands
display invent ory
Displays ODU product name, Name, Locat ion, hardware and sof t ware
revisions, upt ime, MAC address.
display management Displays I P, subnet , Gat eway, Traps t able
display link Displays all st at ic det ails about t he HSU
display et hernet Displays Port t able (St at e, St at us and act ion)
display et hernet _errors Displays Cable st at ist ics
display nt p Displays Time, Server and Offset
display PM < int erface: AI R,LAN1>
< int erval: current ,day,mont h>
Shows t he performance monit or t ables for each int erface according t o
user defined monit oring int ervals
display bands Displays available bands
Table 6-5: HSU Telnet - Set I mmediat e Commands
set ip < ipaddr> < subnet Mask> < gat eway>
Set t he ODU I P address, subnet mask and gat eway. The user must reset
t he ODU aft er t he command complet ion
set t rap < index: 1-10> < ipaddr> < port : 0-
65535>
Set a specif ic t rap from t he t raps t able (e.g. set t rap 3 192.168..101 162)
set readpw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he read access password (Read Communit y)
Tel net Access t o t he HSU Chapt er 6
set writ epw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he read-writ e access password (Read-Writ e Communit y)
set t rappw < oldpasswd> < passwd> Set t he t rap Communit y st ring
set buzzer < mode: 0= OFF,1= AUTO,2= ON> Set t he buzzer mode
set t pc< power: Value bet ween minimal Tx power,
and maximal Tx power>
Set t he ODU Tx Power. I f a wrong value is ent ered, bot h min and max
values shall be displayed in t he error reply
set name < new name> Set t he name of t he link
set locat ion < new locat ion> Set t he name of t he locat ion
set cont act < new cont act > Set t he name of t he sit e manager
set et hernet < port : LAN1>
< mode: AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DI SABLE>
Set t he mode and speed of t he Et hernet port
reboot
Reset s t he ODU. The user is warned t hat t he command will reset t he
ODU. A new Telnet session t o t he ODU may be opened aft er t he reset is
complet e.
help Displays t he available commands
Table 6-6: HSU Telnet - Set Commands requiring Reset
set secI d < Sect orI D> Set new sect or I D - Reset required.
Table 6-5: HSU Telnet - Set I mmediat e Commands (Cont inued)
Chapter 7
Direct HSU Configuration
Direct management of an HSU may be carried out by a direct LAN connect ion t o a managing
comput er (on-sit e) or over-t he-air (from t he HBS sit e).
There are several differences in t he configurat ion funct ionalit y for a direct ly managed HSU
compared t o t he met hod of Chapt er 6 depending on whet her t he HSU is regist ered t o a
HBS, unregist ered or not a member of any sect or.
Where configurat ion funct ion is ident ical under direct connect ion and t hrough t he HBS, we
will not repeat t he det ails, which may be seen in Chapt er 6.
Configuring an HSU
Log on t o t he HSU eit her direct ly or over-t he-air as shown in Chapt er 4. For a regist ered
HSU, you will see a display like t his:
Conf i gur i ng an HSU Chapt er 7
Figure 7-1: Direct or over t he air connect ion t o a regist ered HSU
For an unregist ered HSU, t he t hroughput ( T-put ) fields and t he Sect or I D field would be
empty.
I f t he HBS is deact ivat ed, or t he HSU is st and-alone you will see a display like t his:
Conf i gur at i on Menu But t ons Chapt er 7
Figure 7-2: Direct connect ion t o a st and-alone HSU out of t he box
I n what follows, we configure a regist ered HSU unless specifically specified ot herwise.
The Backup and Rest or e but t ons have t he same funct ionalit y as t he corresponding butt ons
for t he HBS. They provide for backup and rest ore of t he HSU soft ware.
The Buzzer but t on may set or mut e t he buzzer.
Recall t hat t he buzzer t one is primarily used for HSU ant enna alignment .
The configurat ion t abs here differ from t he HSU configurat ion t abs under t he HBS Table view
in one respect : There is an Air I nt erface t ab, which varies in funct ionality, depending on
whet her t he HSU is regist ered or not .
Air Interface
Figure 7-3: HSU Configurat ion - Air I nt erface for Regist ered HSU
For a regist ered HSU t his window is for informat ion only. For an unregist ered or unsynchro-
nized HSU, t he Sect or I D field will be blank and edit able and t he Channel Bandwidt h field will
be set t o default and act ive:
Figure 7-4: HSU Configurat ion - Air I nt erface for st and-alone HSU
The previous figure is also t he default sit uat ion for a HSU being configured for nomadic use
out of t he box. You must ensure t hat t he Sect or I D for t he HBSs.
Where has my HSU gone?
Suppose t hat you inst alled t wo collocat ed HBSs wit h cont iguous sect ors. I t is possible t hat an
HSU locat ed close t o t he common sect or boundary may discover t he wrong HBS. A HSU can
be forced across t o anot her HBS by changing it s Sect or I D t o t hat of t he required HBS. To
swit ch an HSU t o anot her HBS, make sure t hat it is unregist ered. You will need t o log on t o it
direct ly and get t o t he Air I nt erface window:
Figure 7-5: HSU Configurat ion - Air I nt erface Unregist ered HSU
Ent er t he Sect or I D of t he required HBS and click OK. The HSU should t hen discover t he
required HBS.
Security
You may only change t he SNMP communit y st rings over a direct or over-t he-air connect ion.
You can change t he Link Password for an un-synchronized HSU. Ot herwise t he funct ionalit y is
t he same as in page 6-26.
Advanced
Advanced: False Radar Mitigation
Advanced: Fal se Radar Mi t i gat i on Chapt er 7
For t his release, t his feat ure for HSUs, is relevant t o t he 5.3 GHz ETSI and t he 5.4 GHz FCC/
I C bands.
Chapter 8
Bringing Up a Mobility
Sector
Mobility solut ions offers powerful, easy t o deploy base st at ions t hat guarant ee high capacit y
connect ivity t o ruggedized mobile unit s mount ed on vehicles, t rains and ships.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP Mobility enables:
Perimet er security - t wo way video t ransmission bet ween pat rol vehicles
On-board video surveillance and I nt ernet access for public t ransport at ion
Oil rig t o ship - video and dat a connect ivity
Unmanned vehicle operat ion remot e cont rol of heavy machinery for mines and port s
RADWI N 5000 HPMP is designed t o ensure t hat mobile HSUs at t ain cont inuous service wit hin
a sect or and seamless service when crossing int o a new sect or.
Mobility applicat ions are t ypically large scale proj ect s. A railway applicat ion for example,
requires a chain of overlapped sect ors along hundreds or t housands of kilomet ers of railway
t rack.
The det ailed use of RADWI N 5000 HPMP element s in a Mobility applicat ion is beyond t he
scope of t his manual. The purpose of t his chapt er is t o demonst rat e t he use of RADWI N Man-
ager in bringing up and managing a physically inst alled Mobilit y sect or. I n pract ice, one sect or
would be built by hand (as we will do below). The complet e sect or configurat ion can be saved
and uploaded t o furt her sect ors.
For Mobility proj ect management quest ions, please consult RADWI N Cust omer Service.
Concepts
Each mobile HSU is allocat ed t o one of four HBS levels labelled A, B, C and D. The operat ing
paramet ers for each level (such as VLAN, MI R, QoS, t ime slot s, fixed rat e, MI MO/ Diversity
ant enna mode) can be different for each level allowing for broad priorit izat ion of service
bet ween different t ypes of mobile unit s. This requires t hat each mobile HSU be assigned a
level t o j oin a sect or. The act ual j oining process is quit e dynamic since t he HSU will typically
move from sect or t o sect or at high speed.
What You Need Chapt er 8
Changing any of VLAN, MI R, QoS, fixed rat e, MI MO/ Diversity ant enna mode for one config-
ured HSU at a given level, changes all ot her HSUs at t hat level. I f you add a new HSU t o a
sect or (by direct connect ion) at a given level, at sync t ime, it will acquire t he exist ing param-
et ers for t hat level.
A mobile HSU must be able t o send and receive service t raffic while moving. To avoid service
glit ches while swit ching bet ween successive HBSs, t he HBS hand-over t ime must be very
small. For RADWI N 5000 HPMP HBSs it is t ypically less t han 500 ms, depending on select ion
of Mobility channels.
A mobile HSU det ect s t hat it is t ime t o seek t he next HBS when it s rat e drops below a pre-
defined minimum capacity t hreshold based on a minimum support ed rat e. The HBS chosen
will be t he first found offering an RSS level above a minimum t hreshold (by default -60 dBm),
which you can configure for each mobile HSU. I f no HBS can be found sat isfying t he lat t er cri-
t erion, t hen t he HSU will sync wit h t he first possible HBS no mat t er how poor t he link.
I t is up t o t he Mobilit y Proj ect RF planners t o ensure t hat HBSs are spaced so t hat on t he one
hand t he HSU RSS level does not fall so low t hat it loses sync bet ween HBSs ( get s lost ) and
on t he ot her hand, successive HBSs do not int erfere wit h one anot her.
I n a Mobility proj ect , it is fairly typical t o use a fixed channel at each HBS and t o have t he
HSUs configured t o use t he group of channels used by t he HBSs so as t o minimize hand-over
t ime.
What You Need
The RADWI N 5000 HPMP Mobility product s are different from t he fixed/ nomadic product s.
They have different part numbers. Ensure t hat your HBS and HSUs as delivered are t he Mobil-
ity models.
Each sect or comes wit h a pre-inst alled operat ing band. You can change it in t he usual way. I f
you do ensure t han each of t he HSUs is changed. Alt ernat ively (bett er), bring up t he sect or
as-is and change t he band sect or-wide.
Getting Started
We will creat e a sect or wit h t hree mobile HSUs. There is no difference in t he log-on procedure
t o t he HBS. To avoid needless repet it ion and issues not really relevant t o t his chapt er, we will
st art out wit h t he HBS and t he mobile HSUs set t o t here fact ory default s except for t he I P
addresses. We will maint ain t he I P addresses used in t he previous chapt ers. I n pract ice, t he
I P addresses of sect or element may well be configured using Direct or Local Connect ion prior
t o reproduct ion of sect or paramet ers from a t emplat e sect or (such as we are creat ing) and
most likely before deployment in t he field.
Furt her we will not make any use of t he Map view in t his chapt er. Once again, in pract ice, a
Mobile syst em would be managed from a NOC using an ent erprise st andard NMS.
The Table view aft er logging on t o t he HBS looks like t his:
Pr epar i ng t he HBS Chapt er 8
Figure 8-1: Mobile HBS aft er init ial log-on
You act ivat e t he HBS in t he usual way. Be aware t hat use of fixed versus aut omat ic channel
select ion is part of your RF planning.
We will maint ain t he naming scheme used in earlier chapt ers, but our HSUs will have names
like HMU.01.01 and so on (inst ead of HFU and HNU for fixes and nomadic t ypes). The act iva-
t ion wizard pages are ident ical t o t hose used for a fixed sect or.
The first difference bet ween a new act ivat ed mobile and fixed sect or is t hat t he HSUs do not
appear in t he Table view.
Preparing the HBS
Open t he Configurat ion window and t hen t he Mobilit y t ab:
Figure 8-2: HBS Mobilit y Configurat ion
The maximum dist ance is in fact a nominal common dist ance assumed by t he HBS for all
mobile HSUs in it s sect or. I t is t aken as t he maximum dist ance any HSU can be from a HBS.
(I t effect ively guarant ees an ident ical propagat ion delay for all HSUs in t he sect or t o compen-
sat e for rapid HSU movement .) I f t he dist ance is set t oo small, t here is a risk of sync loss for
dist ant HSUs; if it is set t oo large it will reduce performance across t he sect or. The choice is
part of RF planning for Mobilit y proj ect s and is beyond t he scope of t his manual.
We will pre-regist er t hree HSU slot s t o levels A, B and C and t ime slot s t o each level as
shown:
The t ime slot s as shown mean 8 per unit X 3 unit s at level A, 6 per unit X 3 unit s at level B
and so on up t o 64 t ime slot s. Click Regi st er, leave t he maximum dist ance as is and click OK
t o leave t he configurat ion window. Here is t he result :
We have place holders for t he maximum allowable mobile HSUs in t he sect or.
Regi st er i ng mobi l e HSUs Chapt er 8
Registering mobile HSUs
Regist rat ion of act ual mobile HSUs is accomplished by direct connect ion. You assign each one
t o one of t he our levels. At t he same t ime, you may configure ot her paramet ers such as Air
I nt erface, I P address (t hough not st rict ly necessary).
To assi gn a mobi l e HSU t o a l evel by di r ect connect i on:
1. Log on t o a mobile HSU in t he usual way. Here is t he opening window:
2. Open t he Configurat ion window. Updat e t he syst em paramet ers.
3. Open t he Air I nt erface t ab.
4. Ent er t he sect or I D (EBG_20561334 in our example) and if necessary, change t he
Channel Bandwidt h.
5. Open t he Tx & Ant enna t ab and ensure t hat t he ant enna t ype is correct . You may
change any ot her ant enna paramet ers as well. We set Tx Power for our example t o 5
dBm.
6. (Opt ional) Open t he Management t ab and set t he HSU I P address.
7. Open t he Mobility t ab. Click t he required level. We leave t his HSU on A. We will place
our ot her t wo HSUs in level B.
8. Set t he RSS t hreshold paramet er.
9. Chose t he required Available Channels from t he list .
10. Click OK t o accept your changes and close t he window.
11. Repeat st eps 1 t o 9 for each mobile HSU.
For our example, we assign t wo HSUs t o level A and one t o level B. Here t hen, is t he final
result :
Savi ng t he HBS Set t i ngs f or Reuse as a Templ at e Chapt er 8
From t his point , you may use t he configurat ion and report ing facilit ies in t he usual way.
Saving the HBS Settings for Reuse as a Template
Refer t o Fi gure 8-2 of which t he following is an excerpt :
Following any furt her fine t uning, open up t he HBS Mobility t ab, and click Save. You are
offered t he st andard Save File dialog. Save t he HBS Mobility sett ings file (Mobilit ySet-
t ings.mob) t o a convenient locat ion.
Creating a Sector from a HBS Template
The saved set t ings file may be used as a t emplat e for furt her sect ors.
Cr eat i ng a Sect or f r om a HBS Templ at e Chapt er 8
To cr eat e a sect or f r om a HBS Mobi l i t y set t i ngs f i l e:
1. St art ing wit h a new HBS and HSUs, log on t o t he HBS.
2. Act ivat e t he HBS in t he usual way.
3. Open t he Mobility t ab in t he Configurat ion window. I n t he Save / Upload Sett ings
window, click Upl oad.
Figure 8-3: Preparing t o upload t he Mobility file
4. I n our case we have one HBS, so it is sufficient t o ent er t he Mobility file as shown
and t hen click St ar t . Aft er a few moment s, t he St at us field indicat es Done.
The result is as expect ed:
Cr eat i ng a Sect or f r om a HBS Templ at e Chapt er 8
You will of course need t o separat ely configure t he part icipat ing HSUs. f we connect our t hree
configured mobile HSUs, we revert t o our original sect or:
To cr eat e a sect or f r om a HBS I P l i st and a Mobi l i t y set t i ngs f i l e:
1. I n t he window of Fi gur e 8-3, ent er a HBS list file. The format of t he file is lines of
< I P addr ess> < Read-Wr i t e communi t y>
For example,
192.168.10.200 net man
All of t he HBSs need t o act ivat ed and accessible (via a swit ch) t o t he managing com-
put er. They need not be on t he same sub-net .
Alt ernat ively, ent er t hem one by one using t he Plus butt on.
Any unact ivat ed HBSs will be shown as unavailable:
2. Make any furt her changes t o t he displayed list using t he Plus/ Minus butt ons.
3. Click St ar t t o commence t he process.
4. The list window will indicat e t he success or ot herwise of t he upload for each HBS.
Chapter 9
Monitoring and
Diagnostics
The RADWI N Manager applicat ion enables you t o monit or t he sect or, as well as perform basic
diagnost ic operat ions such as t hroughput t est ing.
This chapt er covers:
Ret rieving link informat ion
Throughput checking
Recent event s
Performance monit oring
Act ive Alarms
Online Help
Obt aining support
Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics)
The Get Diagnost ics feat ure collect s and writ es link and Manager informat ion from select ed
sit es int o a t ext file. The file informat ion can be used for diagnost ics and should be sent t o
RADWI N Cust omer Support t o expedit e assist ance.
The following t able list s link and syst em informat ion t hat can be monit ored.
Table 9-1: Get Diagnost ics Dat a and Descript ion
Dat a Descr i pt i on
Syst em Dat a General informat ion about t he syst em
Event s Log
List of syst em event s including t hose from ot her sit es if t his sit e is defined as t he t rap
dest inat ion
Last 256 event s from all sit es
Sect or I nformat ion I nformat ion about t he HBS and HSU set t ings
Sit e Configurat ion Dat a about t he sit e paramet ers
Ret r i evi ng Li nk I nf or mat i on ( Get Di agnost i cs) Chapt er 9
To get di agnost i cs:
1. Click t he Get Di agnost i cs but t on:
Figure 9-1: Get Diagnost ics Dialog Box - HBS
Monit or Det ailed event dat a record
Rest rict ion Table This is t he Connect ion Table from Fi gure 6-11
Act ive Alarms Act ive Alarms are raised for any event affect ing availabilit y or qualit y of service
Performance Monit or Net work performance dat a over defined t ime periods - - every 15 minut es for 30 days
Spect rum Analysis For HBS, select ed HSUs and general int er fence st at ist ics for t he sect or
Table 9-1: Get Diagnost ics Dat a and Descript ion (Cont inued)
Dat a Descr i pt i on
Ret r i evi ng Li nk I nf or mat i on ( Get Di agnost i cs) Chapt er 9
Figure 9-2: Get Diagnost ics Dialog Box - HSU
2. Select or deselect t he dat a opt ions. I f t he file is t o be sent t o RADWI N Cust omer Sup-
port leave all opt ions checked.
3. HBS only: Choose HSUs t o be included.
4. Click Fi l e Pat h t o specify t he file name and older in which you want t o save t he file
and t hen click Run t o save t he informat ion.
On complet ion, t he st at us of t he checked it ems is confirmed:
Li nk Compat i bi l i t y Chapt er 9
The cont ent of t he Diagnost ics report is an aggregat e of all t he more specific report s
discussed below. I t is primarily int ended for use by RADWI N Cust omer support .
Link Compatibility
Compat ibility bet ween t he HBS and an HSU is primarily det ermined by t he soft ware level of
each element . Advisory messages are t ypically displayed as follows:
Figure 9-3: Typical incompat ibly messages for HSUs on HBS display
On t he HBS window, t hese messages can only be seen in HSU list mode, and in t he HBS
Act ive Alarms log.
Not e
The Spect rum Analysis out put is available direct ly from t he Spect rum View
ut ilit y as a CSV file (see Chapt er 20). The format in t he Diagnost ics report
is int ended for use by RADWI N Cust omer support .
The Spect rum Analysis sect ion of t he Diagnost ics report is based on t he last
available spect rum analysis (if any). I f you are submit t ing a support request
involving int erference issues, or if you are specifically asked by Cust omer
support t o submit a Diagnost ics report cont aining a recent spect rum
analysis, you should carry out t he analysis in accordance wit h t he
inst ruct ions in Chapt er 20 prior t o using t he Get Diagnost ics facilit y.
Sof t war e Upgr ade avai l abl e Chapt er 9
Figure 9-4: This HSU requires a soft ware upgrade
On t he HSU window, t hese messages appear as shown in Fi gur e 9-4.
The messages are as follows:
Software Upgrade available
This is an advisory message. I f t he upgrade is not carried out , t hen correct ions in t he upgrade
will not be available. This message may appear for an act ive HBS or any HSU in t he sect or,
regist ered or not .
Software Upgrade recommended
This is also an advisory message. I t typically occurs wit h a new HBS or new HSUs added t o a
sect or.
I f t he upgrade is not carried out , t hen t he HBS or HSU (s) will ope rat e wit h limit ed or
degraded funct ionality. This message may appear for an act ive HBS or any HSU in t he sect or,
regist ered or not .
Software Upgrade required
This message will be displayed if a product band I D mismat ch is det ect ed.
Thus for a HBS, it cannot occur unless one or more HSUs are regist ered. Affect ed HSUs will
always show it as depict ed above in Fi gure 9-4 above.
For such HSUs, t raffic is disabled and t he only services available are Change Band and Sof t -
war e Upgr ade.
Throughput Checking
I n t his mode, RADWI N 5000 HPMP est imat es Et hernet t hroughput by filling frames over t he
air t o maximum for 30 seconds. This mode should not influence service. The t est may be car-
ried out for t he HBS or an HSU.
Thr oughput Checki ng Chapt er 9
To use Thr oughput Checki ng:
1. HBS: Chose Est imat ed Throughput as shown:
HSU f r om HBS: Chose Est imat ed Throughput as shown:
HSU di rect or over t he ai r : Unavailable.
2. I n eit her case, you are asked t o ent er t he t est ing period:
3. Ent er t he required t ime and click OK t o cont inue. The Et hernet services area changes
appearance and t he est imat ed t hroughput is displayed:
Recent Event s Chapt er 9
At t he end of 30 seconds, t he display revert s t o normal.
Recent Events
The Recent Event s log records syst em failures, loss of synchronizat ion, loss of signal, compat-
ibility problems and ot her fault condit ions and event s.
Alarms (t raps) are displayed in t he Event s Log in t he lower panel of t he main window. The
Event s Log may be saved as a t ext file.
The Event s Log includes t he following fields:
Sequent i al number ( I D)
Dat e and t i me st amp
Message
Tr ap sour ce
I P addr ess of t he ODU t hat i ni t i at ed al ar m.
You may filt er t he event s shown by choosing All or I nt ernal.
Not e
The foregoing event types include event s from all links for which t his
managing comput er has been defined as t he t raps address. Only event s
from RADWI N equipment will be shown.
Recent Event s Chapt er 9
A full report may be seem by clicking Recent Event s:
Figure 9-5: Recent Event s: Left- HBS, Cent er HSU from HBS, Right HSU direct
I n each case t he report has t he same format :
Here is a more readable enlargement of t he t able area:
mp
Per f or mance Moni t or i ng Chapt er 9
The left but t on may be used t o save t he report t o a file.
Performance Monitoring
RADWI N 5000 HPMP Performance Monit oring const ant ly monit ors t raffic over t he radio link
and collect s st at ist ics dat a for t he air int erface and Et hernet port s. I t does so cont inuously,
even when t he RADWI N Manager is not connect ed.
Figure 9-6: Performance Monit oring: Left- HBS, Cent er HSU from HBS, Right HSU direct
The on-screen and generat ed report s have t he same general format s, but t here are differ-
ences in what is report ed.
HBS
The HBS Performance Monit oring window offers t he following but t on menu:
Choose t he dat a period required wit h t he 15 Mi nut es butt on.
Cur r ent gives you t he lat est ent ry.
15 Mi nut es provides dat a in a scroll down list in 15 minut e int ervals
HBS Chapt er 9
Dai l y ( 24 hour s) shows result s for t he last 30 days at midnight .
The Threshold butt on enables you t o set t he upper t raffic t hreshold for report ing. Traffic con-
dit ions above t he t hreshold indicat e congest ion and probably lost frames.
Figure 9-7: Set t ing t he upper t raffic t hreshold
To get dat a for display, click Get Dat a. The process may t ake a few seconds.
Here is an ext ract Performance Monit oring report based on 15 minut es recording:
Figure 9-8: HBS - Performance Monit oring report - Valid dat a
The meaning of t he column headings is shown in t he following t able:
Table 9-2: HBS Performance Monit oring Fields
Col umn Headi ng
Abbrevi at i on
Meani ng
Descr i pt i on
I nt egrit y Valid dat a flag
Green t ick for current and valid; Red cross for invalidat ed dat a (See example
below). Not e t hat t he Performance Monit oring dat a is not valid if not all t he
values were st ored (e.g., due t o clock changes wit hin t he int erval or power
up reset )
Dat e & Time Time st amp
Dat a are recorded every 15 minut es; t he last 30 days of recordings are
maint ained. Roll-over is at midnight .
UAS Unavailable Seconds Seconds in which t he int erface was out of service.
ES Errored seconds The number of seconds in which t here was at least one error block.
SES
Severe Errored
Seconds
The number of seconds in which t he service qualit y was low as det ermined
by t he BBER t hreshold.
BBE
Background Block
Error
The number of errored blocks in an int erval.
Rx MByt es Received Mbyt es The number of Megabyt es received at t he specified port wit hin t he int erval
HSU Chapt er 9
Dat a becomes invalidat ed following a reset . I n t he example below, t he HBS was reset short ly
aft er 11: 00. All dat a prior t o t hat t ime becomes invalidat ed. The only valid it em is t he first
recording aft er re-sync.
Figure 9-9: HBS - Performance Monit oring report - Showing invalid dat a
Use t he Save but t on t o st ore t he current dat a t o file and t he Cl ear but t on t o delet e current ly
st ored performance dat a.
HSU
The Performance Monit oring window for t he HSU is slight ly different depending on whet her
you access it from t he HBS or direct ly:
From the HBS
You may chose bet ween an uplink or downlink report . The remaining butt ons have t he same
funct ionality as t hey do for t he HBS. ( There is no significance in monit oring period but t on
label, Dai l y. The opt ions are as for t he HBS.)
Direct or Over the Air
Tx MByt es Transmit t ed Mbyt es
The number of Megabyt es t ransmit t ed at t he specified port wit hin t he
int erval.
Above Traffic Thresh
Threshold set in
Fi gur e 9-7
Seconds count when act ual t raffic exceeded t he t hreshold
Act ive Seconds The number of seconds t hat t he configured Et hernet service is act ive
Table 9-2: HBS Performance Monit oring Fields (Cont inued)
Col umn Headi ng
Abbrevi at i on
Meani ng
Descr i pt i on
HSU Chapt er 9
Here, only a downlink report is available. Ot herwise t he butt ons have t he same funct ionality
as t hey do for t he HBS.
Here is an ext ract from a 15 minut e report . We have broken it int o t hree pieces so t hat it is
legible:
Figure 9-10: HSU - Performance Monit oring report - Bot h valid and invalid dat a (1 of 3)
HSU Chapt er 9
The HSU report cont ains many more fields t han t he HBS. Here is t heir meaning: :
Table 9-3: HSU Performance Monit oring Fields
Col umn Headi ng
Abbrevi at i on
Meani ng
Descri pt i on
I nt egrit y Valid dat a flag
Green t ick for current and valid; Red cross for invalidat ed dat a (See example
below). Not e t hat t he Performance Monit oring dat a is not valid if not all t he
values were st ored (e.g., due t o clock changes wit hin t he int erval or power up
reset )
Dat e & Time Time st amp
Dat a are recorded every 15 minut es; t he last 30 days of recordings are
maint ained. Roll-over is at midnight
UAS Unavailable Seconds Seconds in which t he int erface was out of service
ES Errored seconds The number of seconds in which t here was at least one error block.
SES
Severe Errored
Seconds
The number of seconds in which t he service qualit y was low as det ermined by
t he BBER t hreshold
BBE
Background Block
Error
The number of errored blocks in an int erval
Min RSL (dBm) The minimum of t he receive signal level (measured in dBm)
Max RSL (dBm) The maximum of t he receive signal level (measured in dBm)
RSL Thresh 1 (-88dBm)
The number of seconds in which t he Receive Signal Level (RSL) was below t he
specified t hreshold.
RSL Thresh 2 (-88dBm) The number of seconds in which t he RSL was below t he specified t hreshold.
Min TSL (dBm) The minimum of t he t ransmit signal level (measured in dBm)
Max TSL ( dBm) The maximum of t he t ransmit signal level (measured in dBm)
TSL Thresh (25 dBm)
The number of seconds in which t he Transmit Signal Level ( TSL) was above
t he specified t hreshold
BBER Thresh (1.0%)
The number of seconds in which t he Background Block Error Rat io (BBER)
exceeded t he specified t hreshold
Rx MByt es Received Mbyt es The number of Megabyt es received at t he specif ied port wit hin t he int erval
Tx MByt es Transmit t ed Mbyt es The number of Megabyt es t ransmit t ed at t he specified port wit hin t he int erval.
Mor e on t he Thr eshol ds Chapt er 9
As for t he HBS, use t he Save but t on t o st ore t he current dat a t o file and t he Cl ear but t on t o
delet e current ly st ored performance dat a.
More on the Thresholds
RSL Thr eshol ds
Two RSL Thresholds can be defined. They are used as an indicat or of problems in t he radio
channel. You can check t he RSS from t he Link Budget Calculat or result s during inst allat ion.
Values of -5dB and -8dB from t he current RSS are t ypical.
TSL Thr eshol d
A count er is maint ained, of t he number of second int ervals during which Tx power exceeds
t his t hreshold.
BBER Thr eshol d
The Background Block Error Rat io is measured as a percent age. The t hreshold can be set
from 0.1% up t o 50%.
An 8% t hreshold is recommended. I f t here are no problems during t he int erval, t hen for t hat
t hreshold, t he recommended BBER value should be 0. Since t he syst em provides a lossless
Et hernet service, t here is t hroughput degradat ion in case of int erference. The degradat ion is
proport ional t o t he BBER.
Et her net Thr eshol ds - Capaci t y
This is used as a basis for checking adherence t o a Service Level Agreement . I t is t he number
of seconds count t hat t he link capacity falls bellow t he t hreshold.
Et her net Thr eshol ds - Tr af f i c
The number of seconds count t hat received t raffic exceeded t his t hreshold. I t can be used t o
measure t raffic peaks.
RADWIN Manager Traps
The RADWI N Manager applicat ion issues t raps t o indicat e various event s, displayed in t he
Event s Log.
Below Capacit y Thresh (0.0 Mbps) Seconds count when t hroughput fell below t he t hreshold set in Fi gur e 9-7
Above Traffic Thresh
Threshold set in
Fi gur e 9-7
Seconds count when act ual t raffic exceeded t he t hreshold
Table 9-4: RADWI N Manager Trap Messages
Tr ap Message Sever i t y Remarks
Cannot bind t o t rap service port . Port 162 already in use by
ProcessName (pid: ProcessI d)
Warning RADWI N Manager will not cat ch any t raps from t he
ODU, some ot her applicat ion has grabbed t his
port .
Device unreachable! Error Check connect ivit y t o ODU
Table 9-3: HSU Performance Monit oring Fields ( Cont inued)
Col umn Headi ng
Abbrevi at i on
Meani ng
Descri pt i on
Act i ve Al ar ms Chapt er 9
Active Alarms
Act ive Alarms are raised for any event affect ing availability or qualit y of service.
The Act ive Alarms but t on, is available for t he HBS and t he HSUs.Her is an example:
Connect ed t o < sit e_name> I nformat ion
< sit e_name> Sit e will be reset . I nformat ion
Rest ore Fact ory Default Set t ings in process on Sit e < sit e_name> I nformat ion
Fact ory Set t ings: The process was not finished due t o connect ion
issues.
Warning Fact ory set t ing failed due t o connect ivit y problem
t o ODU
Reset : The process was not finished due t o connect ion issues. Warning Fact ory set t ing failed due t o connect ivit y problem
t o t arget - ODU will not be reset
Cannot Writ e t o Monit or file. There is not enough space on t he disk. Warning Free some space on disk on t he managing
comput er and ret ry
Windows Error: < error_I D> . Cannot Writ e t o Monit or file. Warning Operat ing Syst em error on t he managing comput er
I dent ical I P addresses at < local_sit e_name> and
< remot e_sit e_name>
Warning Set up a different I P t o each sit e
The Product is not ident ified at t he < local_sit e_name> sit e. Warning RADWI N Manager is incompat ible wit h t he ODU
sof t ware version
The Product is not ident ified at t he < remot e_sit e_name> sit e. Warning
The Product is not ident ified at bot h sit es. Warning
Product Not I dent ified! Warning
The Manager ident ified a newer ODU release at t he
< remot e_sit e_name> sit e.
Warning ODU release is newer t han RADWI N Manager
release.
Wizards are not available. RADWI N Manager will
be used j ust for monit oring. Upgrade t he RADWI N
Manager. (You will get t his message as a pop up)
The Manager ident ified a newer ODU release at t he
< local_sit e_name> sit e.
Warning
Newer Version ident ified at t he < local_sit e_name> sit e. Warning ODU release is newer t han RADWI N Manager
release.
Wizards are not available. RADWI N Manager will
be used j ust for monit oring. Upgrade t he RADWI N
Manager.
Newer Version ident ified at t he < remot e_sit e_name> sit e. Warning
Newer Version I dent ified! Warning
Table 9-4: RADWI N Manager Trap Messages (Cont inued)
Tr ap Message Sever i t y Remarks
Ot her Di agnost i c Ai ds Chapt er 9
Here is t he t able part in more det ail:
Current Act ive Alarms may be saved t o a file. The list displayed will not be updat ed unless you
click Ref r esh.
Other Diagnostic Aids
Link Budget Calculator
The Link Budget Calculat or is part of t he RADWI N Manager soft ware and is found in t he Help
menu. This useful ut ilit y enables you t o calculat e t he expect ed performance of t he wireless
link and t he possible configurat ions for a specific link range including ant enna size, cable loss
and climat e condit ions. For full det ails, see Chapt er 19.
To r un t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or f r om t he Wi ndows St ar t Menu:
Go t o St ar t | Pr ogr ams | RADWI N Manager | Li nk Budget Cal cul at or
Online Help
Online help can be accessed from t he Help menu on t he main window of t he RADWI N Man-
ager. Using most common Web browsers, it may also be run going t o
St ar t | Pr ogr ams | RADWI N Manager | User Manual RADWI N 5000 HPMP
Customer Support
Cust omer support for t his product can be obt ained from t he local VAR, I nt egrat or or dist ribu-
t or from whom it was purchased.
For furt her informat ion, please cont act t he RADWI N dist ribut or nearest t o you or one of RAD-
WI N's offices worldwide.
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part4:SiteSynchronization
UM50003300/05.12
Chapter 10
Hub Site Synchronization
This chapt er is specific t o collocat ing HBSs. Should you require t o collocat e wit h ot her radio
models, you should consult wit h RADWI N Cust omer Service.
What is Hub Site Synchronization?
When several unit s are collocat ed at a common hub sit e, int erference may occur from one
unit t o anot her. RADWI N ODU unit s support t he collocat ion of more t han t wo unit s at a cen-
t ral sit e. Like any ot her RF deployment , t he wireless operat ion is highly dependent on fact ors
such as available frequencies, t he physical spacing bet ween radios, ot her int erfering radios,
and whet her WinLink 1000, RADWI N 2000 or RADWI N 5000 HPMP unit s are inst alled.
The RADWI N Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion (HSS) met hod uses a cable connect ed from t he mas-
t er ODU t o all collocat ed ODUs; t his cable carries pulses sent t o each ODU, which synchronize
t heir t ransmission wit h each ot her. The pulse synchronizat ion ensures t hat t ransmission
occurs at t he same t ime for all collocat ed unit s. This also result s in all of t he hub sit e unit s
receiving dat a at t he same t ime, eliminat ing t he possibility of int erference t hat could result if
some unit s t ransmit while ot her unit s at t he same locat ion receive.
Fi gur e 10-1 illust rat es int erference caused by non-synchronized collocat ed unit s.
Not e
HSS does not eliminat e t he need for careful RF planning t o ensure t he
design will work as planned. See Chapt er 2 for informat ion on inst allat ion
sit e survey.
What i s Hub Si t e Synchroni zat i on? Chapt er 10
Figure 10-1: I nt erference caused by collocat ed unit s
Adding HSS removes int erference as shown in t he next t wo figures:
Figure 10-2: Collocat ed unit s using Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion (1)
Figure 10-3: Collocat ed unit s using Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion (2)
The unit s are connect ed t o each ot her wit h HSS cables and HSS Dist ribut ion Unit s.
One of t he radios in t he sit e is defined as HSS Mast er and generat es synchronizat ion pulses.
The ot her collocat ed radios in t he sit e - t he HSS Client s, are connect ed t o t he HSS Mast er and
synchronize t heir t ransmission t o t he pulses. An HSS Client can be configured t o work in one
of t wo modes:
Har dwar e I nst al l at i on Chapt er 10
HSS Cl i ent -Cont i nue Tr ansmi ssi on (HSC-CT): I f t he unit loses synchronizat ion
wit h t he HSS Mast er, t he link remains act ive. However, wit hout synchronizat ion pulses,
it is possible t hat t his unit will cause int erference.
HSS Cl i ent -Di sabl e Tr ansmi ssi on (HSC-DT): I f t he unit loses synchronizat ion wit h
t he HSS Mast er, t he link is dropped unt il t he synchronizat ion pulses resume. This set-
t ing prevent s t he unit from causing int erference.
The remot e ODUs t hat are not locat ed at t he hub sit e, are called I ndependent Unit s.
Hardware Installation
Connecting an HSS Unit
A single HSS unit support s up t o t en collocat ed ODUs. I n addit ion t o each unit being con-
nect ed t o it s PoE device, t he collocat ed unit has an addit ional cable t hat is connect ed t o t he
HSS Unit . The HSS Unit is a compact , weat herproof (I P67) connect or box t hat is inst alled on
t he same mast as t he ODUs. All collocat ed unit s connect t o t his box using CAT-5e cable.
Cables in prepared lengt hs are available for purchase.
The HSS unit is supplied wit h t en prot ect ive covers; any port not in use must be closed wit h a
prot ect ive cover.
Figure 10-4: HSS I nt erconnect ion Unit
To connect an ODU t o an HSS uni t :
1. Unscrew t he prot ect ive cover from t he port marked SYNC 1.
2. Connect t he RJ-45 connect or from one end of t he prepared CAT-5e cable t o SYNC 1.
3. Connect t he ot her end of t he CAT-5e cable t o t he ODU connect or labeled SYNC.
4. Tight en t he prot ect ive seal t hat is on t he prepared cable over t he RJ-45 connect or.
5. Repeat for all ODUs t hat are t o be collocat ed at t he hub sit e. The next ODU t o be
connect ed is insert ed in SYNC 1, SYNC 2, followed by SYNC 3 and so on.
Not e
For a single HSS unit , ensure t hat t he collocat ed unit s are connect ed
in sequence from SYNC 1. I f an ODU is removed from t he hub sit e,
t hen all remaining ODUs must be reconnect ed t o maint ain t he con-
nect ivity.
You may cascade (daisy-chain) t wo or more HSS Unit s wit h an HSS
cable. The met hod is described in det ail below.
Usi ng a Si ngl e HSS Uni t Chapt er 10
Using a Single HSS Unit
Figure 10-5: HSS Wiring schemat ic
The wiring, as shown in Fi gur e 10-5 is self explanat ory. The Sync signal pat h is less self-evi-
dent . I f we set ODU 1 (on SYNC 1) t o HSS Mast er, t hen t he Sync signal pat h is as shown in
Fi gur e 10-6. The signal t ravels from ODU 1 t o SYNC 1, from SYNC 1 t o SYNC 2, from SYNC
2 t o ODU 2 and back again. The back and fort h pat hs repeat for t he second t o fourt h ODU,
from left t o right . The signal exit s t he HSS unit at SYNC 5 and t erminat es in ODU 5.
The choice of t he ODU on SYNC 1 as HSS mast er is not mandat ory, but is good pract ice. I f for
example we were t o use ODU 3 as HSS mast er, t he Sync signal pat h would be ODU 3 t o SYNC
3, t hen left and right t o SYNC 2 and SYNC 4. I t would t hen propagat e t o ODUs 2 and 4, t ermi-
nat ing at bot h ODUs 1 and 5.
Figure 10-6: HSS sync signal pat h wit h ODU 1 as HSS Mast er
Using More than One HSS Unit
I n a large collocat ion sit e, several HSS unit s may be cascaded (daisy-chained) subj ect t o t he
following condit ions:
Condition 1: Cabling Sequence
1. Up t o nine ODUs may be connect ed t o t he first HSS unit using HSS port s SYNC 1, SYNC 2,
SYNC 3,... up t o SYNC 9 in order wit hout leaving empt y port s.
Usi ng Mor e t han One HSS Uni t Chapt er 10
2. The next available SYNC port of t he first HSS unit should be connect ed t o SYNC 10
of t he second HSS unit as shown in Fi gur e 10-7. I n t he illust rat ion, t he next
available port on t he first HSS unit is SYNC 6.
3. The second HSS unit may be filled out wit h up t o nine more ODUs in r ever se
order. That is, connect SYNC 9, SYNC 8, SYNC 7... as shown in Fi gur e 10-7.
Figure 10-7: Cascading t wo HSS unit s
4. To add a furt her HSS unit : Connect t he next available SYNC port from t he second
HSS unit in descendi ng or der (SYNC 5 in Fi gur e 10-7) t o SYNC 1 of t he t hird
HSS unit .
5. ODUs are connect ed t o t he t hird HSS unit from SYNC 2 as shown in Fi gur e 10-8,
in ascendi ng or der :
Figure 10-8: Cascading t hree HSS unit s
6. I f furt her ODUs are required, observe t he convent ion t hat addit ional even
numbered unit s are populat ed in descendi ng order from SYNC 9 and odd
numbered HSS unit s are populat ed in ascendi ng or der from SYNC 2.
Not e
I f an ODU is disconnect ed from an HSS unit , t hen all remaining ODUs must
be moved up or down t o maint ain t he connect ivity.
ODU/ HSS Uni t Connect i on Pi nout Chapt er 10
Condition 2: Total HSS Cable Length
The t ot al pat h of t he HSS sync pulse must not exceed 300m. This applies no mat t er how
many HSS unit s are used. To illust rat e t he met hod for calculat ing t he sync pulse pat h lengt h
we show t hree examples. For our purpose, let :
L
mn
denot e t he lengt h of t he ODU-HSS unit cable at SYNC n on HSS unit m
H
m
be t he lengt h of t he cable j oining HSS unit m t o HSS unit m+ 1
One HSS uni t wi t h f i ve col l ocat ed ODUs
Two cascaded HSS uni t s as shown i n Fi gur e 10-7
Thr ee cascaded HSS uni t s as shown i n Fi gur e 10-8
ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout
Radio Frame Pattern (RFP)
A Radio Frame Pat t ern (RFP) is t he cycle durat ion of t ransmit and receive of t he air-frame.
Table 10-1: ODU/ HSS Unit Connect ion Pinout
Col or
ODU
RJ-45
HSS
UNI T
RJ-45
Whit e/ Green 1 1
Green
Not connect ed
Whit e/ Orange
Orange 6 6
Blue 4 4
Whit e/ Blue 5 5
Whit e/ Brown 7 7
Brown 8 8
PathLength L
11
2 L
12
2 L
13
+ 2 L
14
L
15
+ + + =
PathLength L
11
2 L
12
2 L
13
2 L
14
+
2
+
L
15
+
H
1
2 L
29
2 + L
28
2 + L
27
L
26
+
+
+ +
=
PathLength L
11
2 L
12
2 L
13
2 L
14
+
2
+
L
15
+
H
1
2 L
29
2 + L
28
2 + L
27
2 L
26
+
H
2
2 L
32
2 L
33
2 L
34
L
35
+ + +
+
+ + +
+
=
Wi t hout HSS Chapt er 10
Without HSS
When select ing Et hernet services, t he syst em aut omat ically and t ransparent ly chooses t he
opt imal RFP.
RFP and HSS
When HSS is used, t he RFP for t he collocat ed radios must be select ed manually.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP radios use t he Time Division Duplex ( TDD) mechanism.
Under HSS, TDD enables synchronizat ion of t ransmission for t he collocat ed unit s as shown in
Fi gur e 10-9:
Figure 10-9: Radio Frame Pat t ern
Five RFP t ypes ( A t o E) are available. Under HSS t he RFP must be configured by t he user
depending on t he t ype of t he radio product s, services and channel bandwidt h in accordance
wit h t he Tabl e 10-3 and Tabl e 10-4.
The t ables describe t he efficiency of t he air int erface according t o t he RFP t ype, radio prod-
uct s mix, services and channel bandwidt h. The t ables may also be viewed in t he RADWI N
Manager and in t he Link Budget Calculat or. The efficiency of t he air int erface will vary accord-
ing t o t he product used.
Table 10-2: Radio Frame Pat t ern Table - RADWI N 5000 HBS
RFP 5/ 10/ 20/ 40 MHz
TDM Et her net
E N/ A Best fit
Table 10-3: Radio Frame Pat t ern Table - RADWI N 2000
RFP 40 MHz 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz
TDM Et her net TDM Et her net TDM Et her net TDM Et her net
B Available Available Available Available Available Available Best fit Best fit
E Best fit Best fit Best fit Best fit Best f it Best fit Available Available
Table 10-4: Radio Frame Pat t ern Table - WinLink 1000
RPF 20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz
TDM Et hernet TDM Et her net TDM Et her net
A Best fit Best fit Available Available N/ A N/ A
B N/ A N/ A Best fit Available Best fit Available
C N/ A N/ A N/ A Best fit N/ A Available
D N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A Best fit
E Available Available Available Available N/ A N/ A
RFP: Gener al Radi o Fr ame Pat t er n Chapt er 10
Select t he RFP t hat gives you t he Best Fi t or Avai l abl e for required syst em services and
select t he channel bandwidt h accordingly.
RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern
When set t ing t he RPF, t he following considerat ions should be borne in mind:
When synchronizing RADWI N 5000 HBS unit s you must use RFP E
When synchronizing RADWI N 5000 HBS wit h RADWI N 2000 or WinLink 1000 unit s
you must use RFP E
RFP influences capacity and lat ency.
Using t he Link Budget Calculat or, you can see t he effect of t he RFP on t he Et hernet
t hroughput .
Sector Configuration and HSS
The Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion Set t ings dialog box appears in bot h t he HBS Sit e Configurat ion
window.
Table 10-5: Legend for Radio Frame Pat t ern Tables
I t em Descri pt i on
Best fit Opt imal RFP choice for TDM and Et hernet services
Available Available RFP for TDM and Et hernet services, but not opt ima
N/ A Service unavailable
Not e
The RFP must be t he same for each link wit hin t he collocat ed syst em.
Sect or Conf i gur at i on and HSS Chapt er 10
Figure 10-10: HSS Sett ings window
I f you click t he Enabled box, t he cent ral display (wit h Oper at i onal st at e opened) will look
like t his:
Figure 10-11: Set t ing HBS as HSM or HSC
Cont i nue Tx means t hat t he HBS as a client t o cont inue t o work if t here is no HSM pulse.
Sect or Conf i gur at i on and HSS Chapt er 10
I f you select Hub Sync Mast er and click Appl y, t he display changes again:
Figure 10-12: HBS as HSM
The possible Ext ernal Pulses condit ions are shown in t he following t able:
Table 10-6: Ext ernal Pulse St at us
HSS Sync St at us Meani ng Col or code
Gener at i ng
ODU i s HSM and gener at es t he
sync pul se
Green
Det ect ed
ODU i s HSC and det ect s t he
sync pul se
Not det ect ed ODU i s i ndependent
Gener at i ng and det ect ed HSM, but ot her HSM pr esent
Or ange
Gener at i ng and
I mpr oper l y Det ect ed
RADWI N 5000 HBS i s HSM, but
det ect s a Wi nLi nk 1000 or
RRADWI N 2000 HSM si gnal
t hat i s not RFP E
Not det ect ed HSC but no HSM pr esent
I mpr oper l y det ect ed
HSC but HSM pul se doesnt f i t
t he HSC as conf i gur ed. Occur s
onl y f or RADWI N 5000 HBS,
whi ch st ops t r ansmi t t i ng.
Red
Chapter 11
Using the RADWIN GSU
What is it for
The GPS-based synchronizat ion unit (GSU) is designed t o handle int er-sit e int erferences
under large-scale deployment scenarios.
The RADWI N GSU (or j ust GSU for short ) is an out door unit consist ing of a st andard WinLink
1000 enclosure, a GPS ant enna and a PoE device.
The GSU is connect ed t o t he HSS Unit using a st andard HSS cable. I t synchronizes t he t rans-
mission t iming of mult iple Hub-Sit es t o t he same clock source t hus eliminat ing self int erfer-
ence.
RADWIN GSU Functionality
The GSU receives a synchronizat ion signal from t he GPS once per second. I t dist ribut es a
RADWI N propriet ary synchronizat ion signal t o all ot her ODU unit s using t he RS422 prot ocol
and t he st andard HSS mechanism, where t he GSU act s as an HSM unit .
When t he GSU doesnt receive a synchronizat ion signal from t he GPS for 30 seconds, it moves
aut omat ically t o Self-Generat ion mode and act s as a regular HSM unit , unt il t he GPS recovers.
Typical GSU Scenarios
Independent Distributed Sites
I n t he scenario of Fi gur e 11-1, we have mult iple independent collocat ed sit es, which may
int erfere wit h each ot her. To meet t his sit uat ion, we coordinat e all of t hem using t he GSU as
shown.
The GSU funct ions like wide area HSS unit , ensuring t hat all part icipat ing radios at t he loca-
t ions marked GSU each t ransmit and receive at t he same t ime.
Mul t i pl e Di st r i but ed Si t es wi t h Communi cat i on Chapt er 11
t ed sit
Figure 11-1: GSU Scenario - I ndependent dist ribut ed sit es
Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication
What happens if, in Fi gur e 11-1, t he GSU t owers t hemselves have radios communicat ing as
shown in Fi gur e 11-2?
Consider GSU 1 and GSU 2: Bot h collocat ed t owers t ransmit and receive simult aneously. How-
ever, t he radios communicat ing at GSU 1 and GSU 2 must t ransmit and receive in t urn accord-
ing t o t he scheme in marked Normal Phase in Fi gur e 11-3. This is an impossible sit uat ion,
if all t he links must send and receive t oget her. I t is furt her complicat ed by adding a t hird and
furt her sit es as shown.
Figure 11-2: GSU Scenario - Communicat ing dist ribut ed sit es
Cascaded Si t es usi ng Shi f t ed Phase Tr ansmi ssi on Chapt er 11
Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission
The solut ion offered here is not a universal cure. The following condit ions are necessary, but
in any specific case may not be sufficient :
The GSU sit es (marked 1, and 3 above) are sufficient ly far apart as t o ensure t hat
t here is no mut ual int erference bet ween communicat ing sit es (1-2 and 2-3 above)
There should be no int erference bet ween non-communicat ing sit es (1 and 3 above).
To see how it works, we use Fi gur e 11-2. The GSU t owers are numbered and marked for
cascading, 1-2 and 2-3. There should not be a link bet ween 1 and 3.
The GSU can synchronize t he TDD t iming of several sit es enabling t he cascading of consecu-
t ive links wit hout mut ual int erference.
To use cascading, t he TDD t iming of t he even-ordered links ( GSU 2 above) must be shift ed
(Shift ed Phase) and odd-ordered links (GSU 1 and GSU 3 above) must be unshift ed (Normal
Phase) . The phase shift is half of t he Radio Frame Durat ion (RFD) from t he chosen RFP. The
scheme is shown in Fi gur e 11-3.
Since t he GSU is always HSS mast er ( HSM), at each GSU locat ion, t he GSU can force t he
synchronizat ion of it s collocat ed radios. By half RFD shift ing, alt ernat e collocat ed sit es can
t alk t o each ot her.
Figure 11-3: Phase shift ed t ransmission - phase shift is 1/ 2 t he RFD
Choice of normal or shift ed phase is configurable per GSU using t he RADWI N Manager.
GSU Redundancy
The GSU is designed t o support redundancy, improving t he robust ness of a GSU based t opol-
ogy.
I n redundancy mode, t wo GSUs are inst alled at t he same HSS sit e. One of t hem self-config-
ures t o generat e HSS sync signals. We will call it t he Primary unit . The ot her one, t he Second-
ary unit remains dormant merely polling t he first GSU. I f t he Primary GSU fails, t hen t he
Secondary GSU becomes act ive immediat ely. I f t he Primary unit becomes act ive again, it
remains dormant , reversing t he original roles. The choice of t he Primary GSU is random and
of no significance.
I f t he Primary GSU fails, and t hen t he Secondary GSU also fails t o receive sync signals from
it s GPS, t hen it moves t o self-generat ion HSM mode like an ordinary HSM ODU unt il it s GPS
recovers.
RADWI N GSU Ki t Cont ent s Chapt er 11
Figure 11-4: Make t he GSUs t he first t wo collocat ed unit s
Redundancy swit ching is complet ely t ransparent t o t he GSU-managed links.
RADWIN GSU Kit Contents
The RADWI N GSU package includes:
1 x GSU
1 x Mount ing Kit
1 x GPS Ant enna
1 x GPS Ant enna Mount ing Kit
1 x RF Cable, 1.5m
CD
RADWIN GSU Installation
Overview
The GSU uses t he same cont ainer and cabling as a WinLink 1000 unit .
Pr epar i ng t he GSU f or Use Chapt er 11
Figure 11-5: General GSU configurat ion
I n t hat respect , all of t he considerat ions of Chapt er 3, Chapt er 17 and Chapt er 18 of t he
use Manual apply t o t he GSU.
I t may be configured using t he regular RADWI N Manager or Telnet .
Preparing the GSU for Use
Log on t o t he unit using t he default I P address, 10.0.0.120 or Local Connect ion (See t he cau-
t ions in Chapt er 5 about using Local Connect ion). Use Sit e Configurat ion and t hen t he Man-
agement t ab as shown on page 11- 10 below. Ent er t he required I P informat ion, click OK
and t hen disconnect t he unit for t ransport at ion t o it s sit e.
Mounting the GSU
Mount t he GSU and ant enna. Ensure t hat it s ODU port connect ed t o it s PoE device and t he
HSS cable is connect ed t o t he HSS unit as shown. The ext ernal LAN port of t he PoE device is
connect ed t o t he managing comput er. I f you are accessing t he GSU t hrough a net work it is
essent ial t hat you use t he I P pre-loading met hod. The default I P address may be inaccessible
and you may not use t he Local Connect ion met hod over a net work.
Configuring the GSU
Getting Started
To configure t he GSU, you log on t o it , exact ly as in Chapt er 5.
The GSU Mai n Wi ndow
Here is t he main window for GSU configurat ion:
Conf i gur i ng t he GSU Chapt er 11
Figure 11-6: GSU Main widow at st art up
The t op five it ems in t he GSU Monit or panel are t aken from a sat ellit e. The t ransmission
Phase may be Normal as shown or Shi f t ed. I t purpose, t oget her wit h t he Tx Rat i o bar, will
be explained below.
The St at us Box
Under normal operat ing condit ions, it will be green as shown, indicat ing t hat it is synchro-
nized wit h a sat ellit e.
I f sat ellit e synchronizat ion is lost , t hen t he GSU will funct ion as an independent HSM and t he
st at us box will change color:
The Mai n Menu
The main menu is a subset of t he main menu applicable t o t he WinLink 1000. Not ice t hat
t here are no I nst allat ion or Configurat ion wizards. Such configurat ion as is necessary is car-
ried out using a modified version of Sit e Configurat ion for WinLink 1000.
Similarly, t he Tool bar is a subset of t hat applicable t o t he WinLink 1000.
Using Site Configuration for the GSU
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: Syst em
Here is t he opening window for Si t e Conf i gur at i on:
Figure 11-7: Sit e Configurat ion: Syst em
I t is similar t o t hat of t he WinLink 1000.
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: GPS Sync Uni t
This window is t he main GSU configurat ion t ool:
Figure 11-8: Sit e Configurat ion: GPS Sync Unit
1. Set t i ng t he RFP f or HSS
The GSU is aut omat ically configured as HSS Mast er ( HSM).
I f t he hub sit e consist s only of WinLink 1000 unit s, t hen any suit able RFP may be chosen.
I f t here are one or more RADWI N 2000 unit s, you must use RFP B or E. I f t here are one or
more RADWI N 5000 HBS unit s, you must use RFP E.
Not e
Recall t hat RADWI N 5000 HBS can only use RFP E. I n what follows below,
references t o RADWI N 2000 also apply t o RADWI N 5000 HBS unless
ot herwise specified.
Not e
Ensure t hat no ot her collocat ed ODU is configured as HSM.
The permit t ed RFPs are also dependent on channel bandwidt h and are color coded as fol-
lows:
There is a furt her rest rict ion: I f t here are t wo dist ribut ed sit es t ransmit t ing t o each ot her,
t hey must bot h use t he same RFP. This requirement , t oget her wit h use of shift ed t ransmis-
sion phase (it em 3 below), ensures t hat communicat ing dist ribut ed sit es t o not int erfere
wit h each ot her by t ransmit t ing simult aneously.
Two GSU managed sit es t ransmitt ing wit h shift ed t ransmission phase and using t he same
RFP, t ransmit one half a RFD apart (see Fi gur e 11-3 above).
2. Set t i ng t he Tx Tr ansmi ssi on Rat i o
Since t he GSU is always HSM, it must be able t o cat er for hub sit e Airmux-400 100M based
links. (See t he RADWI N 2000 User Manual, Chapt er 5). I f you use asymmet ric allocat ion,
shift ed t ransmission phase becomes unavailable and you cannot cascade links as
described in st ep 1.
3. Choosi ng t he Tr ansmi ssi on Phase
Chose t he Transmission Phase in accordance wit h considerat ions in st ep 1 above. I f you
choose Shift ed Phase t hen t he Asymmet ric Rat io select or is disabled.
You May use
RFP/ Channel
Bandwi dt h
combi nat i ons
wi t h t hi s col or
For t hese col l ocat ed r adi os
WinLink 1000 only
RADWI N 2000 only
WinLink 1000 and RADWI N 2000 t oget her, RADWI N 5000 HBS wit h anyt hing
None - unavailable
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: Management
Figure 11-9: Sit e Configurat ion: Management
Here you set t he GSU I P address, subnet subnet mask mask and gat eway. You also set t rap
addresses here. I t is ident ical t o t he corresponding panel for WinLink 1000.
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: I nvent or y
Figure 11-10: Sit e Configurat ion: I nvent ory
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: Secur i t y
You can only change t he SNMP Community st ings:
Figure 11-11: Sit e Configurat ion: Security
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: Dat e and Ti me
ODU Recent event s, alarms and t raps are t ime-st amped from t he t ime met hod chosen here
(NTP, managing comput er, ODU default ).
Figure 11-12: Set t ing t he dat e and t ime for t rap report ing
Si t e Conf i gur at i on: Oper at i ons
The only available act ion here is Rest ore Syst em Default s:
Figure 11-13: Sit e Configurat ion: Operat ions
GSU Pr ef er ences Chapt er 11
GSU Preferences
The Pr ef er ences window adds a new t ab for t he GSU:
Figure 11-14: Sit e Configurat ion: Operat ions
You may chose t he unit s for lat it ude/ longit ude coordinat es.
GSU Monitoring and Diagnostics
The monit oring and diagnost ic report s are similar t o t hose of WinLink 1000.
GSU Telnet Support
To configure t he GSU wit h Telnet , st art a Telnet session, using
t el net < GSU_i paddr > .
For example, if you run Telnet as follows,
t el net 10.107.2.20
you will be asked for a user name and password. You must log on wit h administ rat or privilege
under user name, admi n and password net man.
The available commands are t he same as for WinLink 1000 wit h t he addit ion of four addi-
t ional display commands and t hree addit ional set commands.
The addit ional di spl ay commands are
di spl ay r f p
Sof t war e Updat e f or GSUs Chapt er 11
di spl ay r at i o
di spl ay t x_phase
di spl ay gpsi nf o
The last one di spl ay gpsi nf o, is t he most int erest ing:
admi n@10.107.2.20-> di spl ay gpsi nf o
Current GPS t ime 102941.000
Current GPS lat it ude 51.500000
Current GPS N\ S I ndicat or N
Current GPS longit ude 0.000000
Current GPS E\ W I ndicat or E
Current GPS number of sat ellit es 09
Current GPS alt it ude 84.0
Command " di spl ay gpsi nf o" f i ni shed OK.
The t hree addit ional set commands are
set r f p < i ndex> ( 2-6) [ Must be 6 for RFP E]
set r at i o < r at i o> [ Leave as is]
set t x_phase < mode: 1= nor mal ,2= shi f t ed> [ See above]
Software Update for GSUs
All GSUs in a dist ribut ed sit e can be updat ed simult aneously. Use an I P list as described in
Chapt er 12.

USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part5:AdvancedInstallationTopics
UM50003300/05.12
Chapter 12
Software Upgrade
What is the Software Upgrade Utility?
The RADWI N Manager provides a Soft ware Upgrade Ut ility (SWU) t o upgrade t he soft ware
(firmware) of inst alled ODUs in a net work. The updat e files may be locat ed anywhere acces-
sible by t he operat or.
The SWU provides for:
Prior backup of t he current files prior t o upgrade
Upgrade from a list
Delayed upgrade
Various ODU reset opt ions
The default locat ion of t he soft ware files is in t he inst allat ion area, and can be used t o rest ore
fact ory default s.
Upgr adi ng an I nst al l ed Sect or Chapt er 12
Upgrading an Installed Sector
To upgr ade sof t war e f or a l i nk:
1. I n t he RADWI N Manager, click t he Sof t war e Upgr ade but t on.The following
det ached window appears:
Figure 12-1: Soft ware Upgrade Ut ility - Main window
The default sit es shown in t he Soft ware Upgrade list panel belong t o t he current ly
inst alled sect or. The list may be empty if you are running t he RADWI N Manager
offline.
2. Click Add Si t e t o add addit ional sit es for upgrade.
Figure 12-2: Add sit e opt ions
Click Add Si ngl e Si t e for one sit e only:
Figure 12-3: Adding a single sit e for upgrade
Ent er t he I P address of t he sit e, t he Community st rings (Default : publ i c and net -
man, respect ively) and t hen click OK. The sit e will appear in t he Soft ware Upgrade
list box. The list can be cleared using t he Cl ear Al l butt on.
As an alt ernat ive t o adding sit es one at a t ime, you can add sit es from a prepared list
using t he Add f r om Fi l e opt ion in Fi gur e 12-2. The list has t he following format :
< I P addr ess> ,< Read-Onl y communi t y> ,< Read-Wr i t e communi t y>
3. Having creat ed an updat e list , click Upgr ade Package t o chose t he relevant files.
The default files are locat ed in t he SWU subdirect ory in t he RADWI N Manager inst al-
lat ion area. You may see one or more of t he following SWU files:
For RADWI N 5000 HPMP, always choose SWU_5k.swu.
4. You make limit ed changes t o t he list by right-clicking any line:
Figure 12-4: Soft ware Upgrade sit e opt ions
Table 12-1: SWU Files by product
Fi l e name Product
SWU_1k.swu WinLink 1000
SWU_2k.swu RADWI N 2000
SWU_5k.swu RADWI N 5000 HPMP
SWD_5k.swu RADWI N 5000 HPMP HSU downgr ade
SWU_gs.swu RADWI N GSU
5. To back up your exist ing syst em, check Backup devi ce sof t war e check-box. Then
click t he but t on for a st andard file dialog. The default locat ion is t he My Docu-
ment s direct ory on t he managing comput er or t he last backup direct ory you used.
6. I n addit ion t o t he previous st ep, you may opt t o perform a delayed upgrade. Check
t he Delayed Upgrade box, and ent er t he dat e and t ime for t he delayed upgrade.
7. The radio but t ons on t he right det ermines how your HSUs should be reset . Bear in
mind t hat on t he one hand, a reset involves a service int errupt ion, but on t he ot her
hand, t he soft ware upgrade will not become effect ive unt il aft er t he reset is carried
out .
8. Click St ar t Upgr ade t o commence t he process. For an immediat e upgrade you will
be able t o observe t he upgrade progress from t he green progress bars:
Figure 12-5: Soft ware upgrade in progress - Not e t he st op butt on
Figure 12-6: Soft ware upgrade complet ed successfully
9. Click Cl ose t o exit .Run Sofware Upgrade
10. You may also request a delayed upgrade.
Not e
The backup here is t he same as t hat on page 6-1, and serves t he same
purpose. I t provides a fallback if t he upgrade proves problemat ic.
Downgr adi ng HSU Sof t war e Chapt er 12
Downgrading HSU Software
I f you t ake delivery of a new HSU for a sect or configured under an older soft ware release (up
t o 3.2.50) you will need t o downgrade t he HSU so it can operat e correct ly. The met hod is very
st raight forward:
To downgr ade a HSU:
1. Log on t o t he new HSU by Local Connect ion.
2. Run Soft ware Upgrade from here:
3. Choose t he soft ware package named SWD_5k.swu and click St ar t . On complet ion,
disconnect your new HSU and inst all it t o t he sect or in t he usual way.
Caut i on
I f one or bot h sit es fail t o updat e, a warning not ice will be displayed.
I f one or more sit es of a sect or updat e fails, you should correct t he problem
and updat e t he failed sit es as soon as possible. I f you do not , following t he
next reset of t he updat ed sit es, you could experience a link soft ware
mismat ch which may affect service.
Chapter 13
VLAN Functionality with
RADWIN 5000 HPMP
VLAN Tagging - Overview
VLAN Terminology
Bot h t he t echnical lit erat ure and t he RADWI N Manager use t he t erms VLAN I D and VI D int er-
changeably t o denot e a VLAN ident ificat ion number.
VLAN Background Information on the WEB
The st andards defining VLAN Tagging are I EEE_802.1Q and ext ensions.
For general background about VLAN see ht t p: / / en.wi ki pedi a.or g/ wi ki / Vi r t ual _LAN.
Background informat ion about Doubl e Taggi ng also known as Qi nQ may be found here:
ht t p: / / en.wi ki pedi a.or g/ wi ki / 802.1Qi nQ.
This chapt er describes how t he component s of a RADWI N 5000 HPMP sect or deal wit h t ag-
ging and unt agging.
Requirements
I t is assumed t hat you are familiar wit h VLAN usage and t erminology.
VLAN Tagging
VLAN t agging enables mult iple bridged net works t o t ransparent ly share t he same physical
net work link wit hout leakage of informat ion bet ween net works:
Qi nQ ( Doubl e Taggi ng) f or Ser vi ce Pr ovi der s Chapt er 13
Figure 13-1: VLAN scenarios handle by RADWI N 5000 HBS
I EEE 802.1Q is used as t he encapsulat ion prot ocol t o implement t his mechanism over Et her-
net net works.
QinQ (Double Tagging) for Service Providers
QinQ is useful for Service Providers, allowing t hem t o use VLANs int ernally in t heir t ransport
net work while mixing Et hernet t raffic from client s t hat are already VLAN-t agged.
Figure 13-2: Separat ing client dat a st reams using double t agging
VLAN Unt aggi ng Chapt er 13
The out er t ag (represent ing t he Provider VLAN) comes first , followed by t he inner t ag. I n
QinQ t he Et herType = 0x9100. VLAN t ags may be st acked t hree or more deep.
When using t his t ype of Provider Tagging you should keep t he following in mind:
Under Provider Tagging, t he syst em double-t ags egress frames t owards t he Providers
net work. The syst em adds a t ag wit h a VLAN I D and Et herType = 0x9100 t o all
frames, as configured by t he service provider (Provider VLAN I D).
The syst em always adds t o each frame, t ags wit h VLAN I D and Et herType = 0x9100.
Therefore,
For a frame wit hout a t ag t he syst em will add a t ag wit h VLAN I D and
Et herType = 0x9100 so t he frame will have one t ag
For a frame wit h a VLAN t ag t he syst em will add a t ag wit h VLAN I D and
Et herType = 0x9100 so t he frame will be double-t agged
For a frame wit h a VLAN t ag and a provider t ag t he syst em will add a t ag wit h VLAN I D and
Et herType = 0x9100 so t he frame will be t riple-t agged and so on.
VLAN Untagging
VLAN Unt aggi ng means t he removal of a VLAN or a Provider t ag.
Port Functionality
VLAN funct ionality is support ed at t he MNG port of t he HSU.
The HSU MNG port can be configured t o handle Et hernet frames at i ngress di r ect i on
(where frames ent er t he HSU) and at egr ess di r ect i on (where frame exit t he HSU).
Por t Funct i onal i t y Chapt er 13
Ingress Direction
Table 13-1: Port set t ings - I ngress direct ion
Tr anspar ent The port does not hing wit h regard t o VLANs - inbound frames are left unt ouched.
Tag
Frames ent ering t he HSU port wit hout VLAN or QinQ t agging are t agged wit h VLAN I D and Priorit y
a
,
which are pre-configured by t he user. Frames which are already t agged at ingress are not modified
and pass t hrough.
a. Priority Code Point (PCP) which refers to the IEEE 802.1p priority. It indicates the frame priority
level from 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest), which can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic (voice,
video, data, etc).
Pr ovi der t ag
Frames ent ering t he HSU port are t agged wit h providers VLAN I D and Priorit y which are pre-
configured by t he user. Frames which are already t agged wit h Provider t agging at t he ingress are not
modified and pass t hrough
.
VLAN Conf i gur at i on Usi ng t he RADWI N Manager Chapt er 13
Egress Direction
VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager
Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation
Managing the HBS over the Air from an HSU
I f t raffic VLAN t agging is in force for t he HSU ingress direct ion and management VLAN is in
use at t he HBS, t hen t he VLAN I D at t he HSU ingress direct ion must be t he same as t he VLAN
I D for management at t he HBS.
Table 13-2: Port set t ings - Egress direct ion
Tr anspar ent The port does not hing wit h regard t o VLANs - out bound frames are lef t unt ouched.
Unt ag al l
Port configured t o unt ag user VLAD t ags for all frames.
Unt ag doubl e
t agged
Frames are t agged QinQ wit h a VLAN I D, which is configured by t he service provider (Provider VLAN
I D). The QinQ (provider) t ags are removed. User t ags are passed t hrough.
Fi l t er
Di scl ai mer
I f you are not a VLAN expert , please be aware t hat incorrect VLAN
configurat ion may cause havoc on your net work. The facilit ies described
below are offered as a service t o enable you t o get best value from your
RADWI N 5000 HPMP links and are provided as is. Under no circumst ances
does RADWI N accept responsibility for net work syst em or financial damages
arising from incorrect use of t hese VLAN facilit ies.
Conf i gur at i on of VLAN Taggi ng f or Et her net Ser vi ce Chapt er 13
Configuration of VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service
VLAN configurat ion is carried out per HSU. I t is up t o you t o ensure consist ency bet ween t he
HSUs.
HSU VLAN t agging can only be configured from t he HBS. You can not log on t o an HSU
direct ly and do it from t he HSU main window. The reason is t hat t he HSU maint ains t he HSU
t agging informat ion in it s int ernal per HSU configurat ion record.
To set up an HSU f or VLAN t aggi ng:
1. Right click an HSU on t he HBS window, and t hen click Conf i gur e | Et her net |
VLAN Conf i gurat i on. The VLAN Configurat ion window is displayed:
I n Di sabl ed mode, Et hernet frames pass t ransparent ly over t he radio links.
2. For Provider t agging, click t he Provider Radio butt on:
I n Provi der mode, Et hernet frames are t agged wit h t he providers VLAN I D before
t hey ent er int o t he providers net work/ backbone.
3. Ent er a Provider VLAN I D and Priority. The VLAN I D must be in t he range 2 t o 4094.
The VLAN Priorit y must be in t he range 0 t o 7. Click OK t o accept .
4. For user VLAN t agging, click t he Tag Radio but t on:
I n Tag mode Et hernet frames are t agged or unt agged t o dist inguish bet ween differ-
ent net works.
5. For complet ely t ransparent passage of t agged frames, t here is not hing furt her t o do.
The following t able shows t he possible set t ings for each combinat ion of I ngress and
Egress modes:
6. Click OK.
Table 13-3: VLAN Configurat ion Opt ions - Tag Mode
I ngr ess Egress
Tr anspar ent Unt ag Al l Fi l t er
Tr anspar ent Not hing furt her required Not hing furt her required Allow up t o 4 VI Ds t o be passed t hrough
Tag: Ent er a VLAN
I D and Pr i or i t y
Not hing furt her required Not hing furt her required Allow up t o 4 VI Ds t o be passed t hrough
Chapter 14
False Radar Mitigation
Facilities
Who needs it
I f you are using DFS frequency bands 5.3/ 5.4 GHz FCC and 5.4/ 5.8GHz ETSI you should use
t his facility.
DFS and False Radar Mitigation
About DFS
Under DFS frequency bands, it must be ensured t hat radio links do not int erfere wit h cert ain
radar syst ems in t he 5 GHz band. I f radar is det ect ed, t he radio link should move aut omat i-
cally t o a frequency t hat does not int erfere wit h t he det ect ed radar.
What is False Radar Mitigation
False Radar Mit igat ion capabilit y is an advanced met hod t o reduce or eliminat e false radar
det ect ion and DFS t riggering ( False posit ives ).
False radar det ect ion can be caused by ot her radios t ransmissions or ext ernal int erference
t hat can be int erpret ed as t rue radar.
This opt ion is act ive only in DFS frequency bands, 5.3/ 5.4 GHz FCC (HBS only) and 5.4/
5.8GHz ETSI (HBS & HSU).
I n what follows f al se r adar means any source of radar-like signals which are not real radar.
False Radar Mit igat ion has t wo component s:
1. Reduct ion of false posit ive radar det ect ion by reduct ion of t he probability of det ect ing any
kind of false radars, while allowing t he syst em t o det ect real radar signals.
2. Eliminat ion of det ect ion of specific false radar types by blocking det ect ion of false radars of
a specific type. There are t hree types of radars:
Fi xed: False radars wit h fixed pulse widt h having fixed repet it ion frequency
Var i abl e: False radars wit h variable pulse widt h having variable repet it ion fre-
quency
Conf i gur i ng Fal se Radar Mi t i gat i on Chapt er 14
St agger ed: False radars wit h variable repet it ion frequency wit hin a burst period
(Applies t o 5.4 GHz ETSI only)
Configuring False Radar Mitigation
The configurat ion met hod for t he HBS (ETSI and FCC/ I C) is t he same as for t he HSUs (ETSI
only). We will demonst rat e t he HBS for a sect or using t he 5.3 GHz FCC/ I C band:
To conf i gur e Fal se Radar Mi t i gat i on:
1. Log on t o t he HBS as I nst aller.
2. Ent er t he Configurat ion window and open t he Advanced t ab.
Figure 14-1: False Radar Mit igat ion
3. The DFS Frequency St at us Table at t he bot t om of Fi gur e 14-1 shows t he t ime, type
and frequency of t he last radars det ect ed. This t able should be used t o select t he
best opt ion(s) t o reduce or eliminat e false radar det ect ion wit hout complet ely block-
ing out real radar det ect ion.
4. Check t he mit igat ion feat ures t o be used.
FCC/ I C Consi der at i ons Chapt er 14
5. When you are sat isfied wit h your configurat ion paramet ers, click OK t o save t hem
and dismiss t he Configurat ion window.
FCC/IC Considerations
The FCC requires t hat devices inst alled wit hin 35 km of any Terminal Doppler Weat her Radars
( TDWR) locat ion should be regist ered in t he volunt ary WI SPA sponsored dat abase.For conve-
nience, we supply guidelines about t he way t his is done in Chapt er 15.
Chapter 15
FCC/IC DFS
Considerations
FCC 5.4GHz Device Registration
The FCC requires t hat devices inst alled wit hin 35 km of any TDWR locat ion should be regis-
t ered in t he volunt ary WI SPA sponsored dat abase.
The FCC has published a TDWR Locat ion I nformat ion t able t hat list s t he exact locat ion of all
TDWR t owers (see Tabl e 15-1 at t he end of t he chapt er).
1. When inst alling a 5.4 GHz device define your exact locat ion (lat it ude and longit ude)
2. Use t he TDWR Locat ion I nformat ion t able t o det ermine if t he dist ance bet ween
t he device and any TDWR t ower is less t han 35 km.
3. I f t he dist ance is less t han 35 km t hen regist er t he device in t he volunt ary WI SPA
sponsored dat abase ( following sect ion)
4. Disable t he frequencies bet ween 5570 5680 MHz from t he available channels
list .
5. The frequency range bet ween 5.600 t o 5.650 GHz is not included in t he available
channels list .
Registering the Device
To r egi st er a devi ce:
1. Ent er t he websit e htt p: / / www.spect rumbridge.com/ udia/ home.aspx and follow t he
inst ruct ions.
At your first ent ry int o t he sit e, you will be required t o regist er as a user:
Regi st er i ng t he Devi ce Chapt er 15
2. Click t he User Regi st r at i on but t on t o ent er t he regist rat ion page.
3. Fill in t he regist rat ion page and click Regi st er.
4. To complet e device regist rat ion ent er t he Regist er Device t ab as shown:
You are offered t his:
5. Fill in t he required informat ion in t he preceding web page and click t he Regi st er
Devi ce butt on.
TDWR Tabl e Chapt er 15
TDWR Table
The following t able cont ains t he lat it ude and longit ude locat ions of Terminal Doppler Weat her
Radars ( TDWR). Use t his t able t o det ermine if t he Mast er or Client device inst alled is wit hin
35 km radius of a TDWR locat ion. I f one of t he inst alled devices is wit hin 35 km radius of any
TDWR locat ion t hen disable all frequencies bet ween 5570 5680 MHz from t he available
channels list .
Table 15-1: Lat it ude and longit ude locat ions of TDWRs
STATE CI TY LONGI TUDE LATI TUDE FREQUENCY TERRAI N
ELEVATI ON
( MSL) [ f t ]
ANTENNA
HEI GHT
ABOVE
TERRAI N
[ ft ]
AZ PHOENI X W 112 09 46 N 33 25 14 5610 MHz 1024 64
CO DENVER W 104 31 35 N 39 43 39 5615 MHz 5643 64
FL FT LAUDERDALE W 080 20 39 N 26 08 36 5645 MHz 7 113
FL MI AMI W 080 29 28 N 25 45 27 5605 MHz 10 113
FL ORLANDO W 081 19 33 N 28 20 37 5640 MHz 72 97
FL TAMPA W 082 31 04 N 27 51 35 5620 MHz 14 80
FL WEST PALM BEACH W 080 16 23 N 26 41 17 5615 MHz 20 113
GA ATLANTA W 084 15 44 N 33 38 48 5615 MHz 962 113
I L MCCOOK W 087 51 31 N 41 47 50 5615 MHz 646 97
I L CRESTWOOD W 087 43 47 N 41 39 05 5645 MHz 663 113
I N I NDI ANAPOLI S W 086 26 08 N 39 38 14 5605 MHz 751 97
KS WI CHI TA W 097 26 13 N 37 30 26 5603 MHz 1270 80
KY COVI NGTON CI NCI NNATI W 084 34 48 N 38 53 53 5610 MHz 942 97
KY LOUI SVI LLE W 085 36 38 N 38 02 45 5646 MHz 617 113
LA NEW ORLEANS W 090 24 11 N 30 01 18 5645 MHz 2 97
MA BOSTON W 070 56 01 N 42 09 30 5610 MHz 151 113
MD BRANDYWI NE W 076 50 42 N 38 41 43 5635 MHz 233 113
MD BENFI ELD W 076 37 48 N 39 05 23 5645 MHz 184 113
MD CLI NTON W 076 57 43 N 38 45 32 5615 MHz 249 97
MI DETROI T W 083 30 54 N 42 06 40 5615 MHz 656 113
MN MI NNEAPOLI S W 092 55 58 N 44 52 17 5610 MHz 1040 80
MO KANSAS CI TY W 094 44 31 N 39 29 55 5605 MHz 1040 64
MO SAI NT LOUI S W 090 29 21 N 38 48 20 5610 MHz 551 97
MS DESOTO COUNTY W 089 59 33 N 34 53 45 5610 MHz 371 113
NC CHARLOTTE W 080 53 06 N 35 20 14 5608 MHz 757 113
NC RALEI GH DURHAM W 078 41 50 N 36 00 07 5647 MHz 400 113
NJ WOODBRI DGE W 074 16 13 N 40 35 37 5620 MHz 19 113
NJ PENNSAUKEN W 075 04 12 N 39 56 57 5610 MHz 39 113
NV LAS VEGAS W 115 00 26 N 36 08 37 5645 MHz 1995 64
TDWR Tabl e Chapt er 15
NY FLOYD BENNETT FI ELD W 073 52 49 N 40 35 20 5647 MHz 8 97
OH DAYTON W 084 07 23 N 40 01 19 5640 MHz 922 97
OH CLEVELAND W 082 00 28 N 41 17 23 5645 MHz 817 113
OH COLUMBUS W 082 42 55 N 40 00 20 5605 MHz 1037 113
OK AERO. CTR TDWR # 1 W 097 37 31 N 35 24 19 5610 MHz 1285 80
OK AERO. CTR TDWR # 2 W 097 37 43 N 35 23 34 5620 MHz 1293 97
OK TULSA W 095 49 34 N 36 04 14 5605 MHz 712 113
OK OKLAHOMA CI TY W 097 30 36 N 35 16 34 5603 MHz 1195 64
PA HANOVER W 080 29 10 N 40 30 05 5615 MHz 1266 113
PR SAN JUAN W 066 10 46 N 18 28 26 5610 MHz 59 113
TN NASHVI LLE W 086 39 42 N 35 58 47 5605 MHz 722 97
TX HOUSTON I NTERCONTL W 095 34 01 N 30 03 54 5605 MHz 154 97
TX PEARLAND W 095 14 30 N 29 30 59 5645 MHz 36 80
TX DALLAS LOVE FI ELD W 096 58 06 N 32 55 33 5608 MHz 541 80
TX LEWI SVI LLE DFW W 096 55 05 N 33 03 53 5640 MHz 554 31
UT SALT LAKE CI TY W 111 55 47 N 40 58 02 5610 MHz 4219 80
VA LEESBURG W 077 31 46 N 39 05 02 5605 MHz 361 113
WI MI LWAUKEE W 088 02 47 N 42 49 10 5603 MHz 820 113
Table 15-1: Lat it ude and longit ude locat ions of TDWRs (Cont inued)
STATE CI TY LONGI TUDE LATI TUDE FREQUENCY TERRAI N
ELEVATI ON
( MSL) [ f t ]
ANTENNA
HEI GHT
ABOVE
TERRAI N
[ ft ]
Chapter 16
Quality of Service
Prerequisites
To use t he facility you must be familiar wit h t he use of VLAN (802.1p) or Diffserv.
QoS - Overview
QoS is a t echnique for priorit izat ion of net work t raffic packet s during congest ion.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP sect ors support t wo classificat ion crit eria, VLAN based or Diffserv based.
You may chose which of t hem t o use.
Based upon t he classificat ion crit erion chosen, received packet s will be mapped int o one of
four quality groups: Real t ime, Near real t ime, Cont rolled load and Best effort .
You may part it ion t he t ot al link capacity across t he four Qualit y queues. The default weight s
as percent ages are shown in Tabl e 16-1.
Setting up QoS
QoS for RADWI N 5000 HPMP is set up in t wo phases:
1. The required queues for t he sect or and t heir respect ive priority mappings must be chosen.
2. For each HSU you must configure t he required queues, queue weight s and queue Maxi-
mum I nformat ion Rat e (MI R). The lat t er must be done for bot h t he Uplink and Downlink
direct ions.
Table 16-1: Default priorit ies an d allocat ion by VLAN I D and Diffserv
Qual i t y queue
Pri or i t y
Di f f ser v VLAN
Real t i me 48-63 6-7
Near r eal t i me ( r esponsi ve
appl i cat i ons)
32-47 4-5
Cont r ol l ed l oad 16-31 2-3
Best ef f ort 0-15 0-1
Set t i ng up t he HBS f or QoS Chapt er 16
Setting up the HBS for QoS
From t he HBS manager, ent er Configurat ion, open t he Et hernet t ab and t hen QoS configura-
t ion. QoS is disabled by default . You may chose bet ween t he VLAN (802.1p) and Diffserv
met hods.
The default sett ings for Diffserv and VLAN are as shown in t he next t wo figures:
Set t i ng up an HSU f or QoS Chapt er 16
I f you un-check a queue, it will be disabled for t he sect or. I t will not prevent t he HSU from
configuring it as live. The purpose behind t his is t o avoid t he necessit y of reconfiguring QoS
for each HSU, should t he queue be reinst at ed.
Setting up an HSU for QoS
QoS set up for an HSU is carried out from t he HBS.
To conf i gur e an HSU f or QoS:
1. Right click an HSU in t he HBS manager HSU window, and choose Conf i gur at i on.
2. Open t he Et her net t ab and click QoS Configurat ion. The following window is dis-
played:
Set t i ng up an HSU f or QoS Chapt er 16
3. Ensure t hat t he Mode field is Enabled. I f you already configured t he HBS (sect or) for
Diffserv or VLAN, t hen it will be enabled by default . I f you need t o change t he mode,
t hen you probably did not set t he sect or wide QoS type - but you can go back and do
it lat er.
4. For each queue, bot h downlink and uplink (from t he HSU) ent er t he required weight
and MI R. The latt er may be left unlimit ed. in which case t he syst em will use a best
effort met hod.
I f you exceed 100% t ot al weight , you will receive an error message.
You will be required t o correct t his before leaving t he window ot her t han by cancella-
t ion.
I f you are under-booked, for example by set t ing a queue t o zero, t he unused weight
will be dist ribut ed t o t he remaining queues. The effect of doing t his will only become
apparent under congest ion. I n part icular, a queue set t o zero weight will become
nearly blocked under congest ion wit h packet s passing t hrough on a best effort basis.
5. When you complet e your ent ries, click OK t o save t hem and cont inue.
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part6:FieldInstallationTopics
UM50003300/05.12
Chapter 17
Pole and Wall Installation
ODU Mounting Kit Contents
Table 17-1: Bill of Mat erials: ODU mount ing kit
I t em Qt y
Large Clamp (see Fi gur e 17-1) 1
Small Clamp (see Fi gur e 17-2) 1
Arm (see Fi gur e 17-3) 1
Screw hex head M8x40 4
Screw hex head M8x70 2
Washer f lat M8 4
Washer spring M8 3
M8 Nut s 2
Figure 17-1: Large Clamp Figure 17-2: Small Clamp Figure 17-3: Arm
Mount i ng an ODU on a Pol e Chapt er 17
Mounting an ODU on a Pole
Figure 17-4: Mount ing on a pole
Mount i ng an ODU on a Wal l Chapt er 17
Mounting an ODU on a Wall
Figure 17-5: Mount ing on a Wall
Mount i ng a Smal l For m Fact or HSU Chapt er 17
Mounting a Small Form Factor HSU
Using Metal Ties

Figure 17-6: RADWI N 5505 HSU - Rear and met al t ie
Thread t he mount ing t ies t hrough t he mount ing slot s provided and mount t he unit on a pole.
Using the Mounting Kit Adapter
Mounting Adapter- Bill of Materials
Figure 17-7: Mount ing adapt er
To mount t he smal l f or m f act or HSU usi ng a mount i ng ki t :
1. Referring t o Fi gur e 17-8 below: Secure t he adapt er (3) t o t he rear of t he HSU (2)
using t he t wo screws provided ( 4). Use a Philips screwdriver set t o a t orque of 2.0
NM.
Table 17-2: Mount ing adapt er kit for RADWI N 5505 HSU
I t em
No.
Descr i pt i on Quant i t y
1 MTI Mount ing Kit (as for st andard ODU) 1
2 HSU (Fi gur e 17-6) 1
3 Mount ing adapt er (Fi gure 17- 7) 1
4 Screw M5x10, CSK, Phillips, st ainless st eel 2
Mount i ng an Ext er nal Ant enna Chapt er 17
Figure 17-8: Securing t he mount ing adapt er
2. Referring t o Fi gur e 17-9 below: At t ach t he ODU mount ing kit (1) t o t he mount ing
adapt er ear (4) and proceed as above, for a st andard ODU.
Figure 17-9: Att aching t he MTI mount ing kit
Mounting an External Antenna
Opt ional ext ernal ant ennas can be mount ed on a pole. The ext ernal mount ing kit varies
according t o t he specific ant enna model.
Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally
What follows applies t o bot h WinLink 1000, RADWI N 2000 and RADWI N 5000 HPMP wit h
obvious differences.
An ODU may be mount ed horizont ally as shown in Fi gur e 17-10.
To mount an ODU hor i zont al l y, obser ve t he f ol l owi ng caut i ons:
1. To ensure your warrant y right s for horizont ally inst alled ODUs, make sure t hat t he
four port s ANT1, ANT2, HSS and ODU are firmly secured or moist ure sealed wit h t he
supplied caps.
Mount i ng a Connect or i zed ODU Hor i zont al l y Chapt er 17
2. Furt her, ensure t hat cables are connect ed using a wat er nose as shown in
Fi gur e 17-10.
Figure 17-10: Mount ed ODUs wit h correct wat er nose
Do not do t his:
Figure 17-11: I ncorrect ly mount ed ODU (No wat er nose )
3. I f you at t ach an ext ernal PoE device near t he ODU, t he same considerat ions apply.
Chapter 18
Lightning Protection and
Grounding Guidelines
Met iculous implement at ion of t he guidelines in t his chapt er will provide best prot ect ion
against elect ric shock and light ning.
The RADWI N Light ning Prot ect ion Syst em consist s of t he following component s:
Grounding for t he ant enna coax cable
Grounding for each ODU
Ext ernal Primary Light ning Prot ect or unit s and grounding for t he out door cable
I nt ernal ESD prot ect ion circuit s over t he Power/ Telecom lines
Grounding for Antenna Cable
A Grounding Kit must be connect ed t o t he coax ant enna cable and reliably grounded. The
grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158-2 (www.andr ew.com). See Fi gur e 18-1 below.
War ni ng
100% prot ect ion is neit her implied nor possible.
Not e
This chapt er is at best a guide. The act ual degree of light ning prot ect ion
required depends on local condit ions and regulat ions.
Gr oundi ng f or I ndoor / Out door Uni t s Chapt er 18
Figure 18-1: Grounding ant enna cables
Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units
ODU Grounding
RADWI N Light ning Prot ect ion Syst em uses a Shielded CAT 5e cable t o int erconnect t he Out-
door (ODU) unit s.
However, t his shielding does not provide a good light ning discharge pat h, since it can not t ol-
erat e t he high Light ning Current surges.
To provide an alt ernat e Light ning Discharge pat h, t he ODU and ant enna grounding post s
should be connect ed t o ground point by a 10 AWG short copper wire.
The device should be permanent ly connect ed t o ground.
PoE Grounding
The PoE uses a t hree wire AC cable. You should ensure t hat t he wall socket is also correct ly
grounded.
The RADWI N Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect i on Ki t Chapt er 18
The RADWIN Lightning Protection Kit
The RADWI N light ning prot ect ion kit cont ains t he it ems as shown in Fi gur e 18-2:
Figure 18-2: RADWI N Light ning Prot ect ion Kit
The light ning prot ect or incorporat es high-power gas discharge t ube and current t ransist or
prot ect ion in a single prot ect or unit . Technical specificat ions are shown in Appendi x A.
Using Lightning Protectors and Grounding
A Grounding Kit and light ning prot ect or Unit must be locat ed near t he ODU and properly
grounded as illust rat ed in Figures 18-3 and 18-4 below:
Usi ng Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect or s and Gr oundi ng Chapt er 18
Figure 18-3: Grounding a typical pole inst allat ion
Usi ng Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect or s and Gr oundi ng Chapt er 18
Figure 18-4: Grounding a typical wall inst allat ion
The next figure shows a close-up of t he rear of grounded ODU:
Figure 18-5: ODU Light ning Prot ect or and grounding
Mount i ng RADWI N Li ght i ng Pr ot ect i on uni t Chapt er 18
Mounting RADWIN Lighting Protection unit
To mount a l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on devi ce:
1. Mount t he device as close t o t he ODU as possible.
2. Mount t he unit t o on t he pole using t he supplied band.
3. Connect t he ODU-PoE cable using t he RJ-45 j ack.
4. Connect one cable bet ween t he ODU and t he prot ect or using an RJ-45 j ack.
5. Connect t he prot ect ors ground st ud t o a grounding point . Use t he appropriat e wire
gauge and t ype, keeping t he wire as short as possible, less t han 1m (3), bet ween
t he st ud and t he sit e grounding point .
A second light ning prot ect or Unit should be mount ed at t he building ent ry point and must be
grounded, as shown in Fi gur e 18-4 above.
To mount t he l i ght ni ng pr ot ect i on at t he bui l di ng ent r y poi nt :
1. Mount t he device out side t he building, locat ed as near as possible t o t he ent rance of
t he CAT 5e ODU-PoE cable.
2. Mount t he unit t o on t he pole using t he supplied band.
3. Connect t he ODU-PoE cable using t he RJ-45 j ack.
4. Connect one cable bet ween t he PoE and t he prot ect or using an RJ-45 j ack.
5. Connect t he prot ect ors ground st ud t o a grounding point . Use t he appropriat e wire
gauge and t ype, keeping t he wire as short as possible, less t han 1m (3), bet ween
t he st ud and t he sit e grounding point .
Not e
There may also be regulat ory requirement s t o cross bond t he ODU-PoE CAT-
5e cable at regular int ervals up t he mast . This may be as frequent as every
10 met ers (33 feet ).
I nt er nal ESD Pr ot ect i on ci r cui t s Chapt er 18
Figure 18-6: Light ning prot ect or and grounding at building ent ry point
Internal ESD Protection circuits
RADWI N equipment is designed t o meet t he ETSI / FCC/ Aus/ NZ/ CSA EMC and Safety require-
ment s. To fulfill t hese requirement s, t he syst em's Telecom lines at t he ODU/ PoE are Trans-
former-isolat ed and include int ernal ESD (Elect ro-St at ic-Discharge) Prot ect ion circuit s.
Chapter 19
Link Budget Calculator
Overview
The Link Budget Calculat or is a ut ility for calculat ing t he expect ed performance of t he RAD-
WI N 5000 HPMP wireless link wit hin a sect or and t he possible configurat ions for a specific link
range.
The ut ility allows you t o calculat e t he expect ed RSS of t he link, and find t he type of services
and t heir effect ive t hroughput as a funct ion of t he link range and deployment condit ions.
User Input
You are required t o ent er or choose t he following paramet ers. Depending on t he product ,
some of t he paramet ers have a default value t hat cannot be changed.
Band, which det ermines frequency and regulat ion
HSU series used
Channel Bandwidt h (current ly 10 and 20MHz)
Tx Power (maximum Tx power per modulat ion is validat ed)
Ant enna Type (current ly dual; cannot be changed for ODU wit h int egrat ed ant enna)
Ant enna Gain per sit e (cannot be changed for int egrat ed ant enna)
Cable Loss per sit e (cannot be changed for int egrat ed ant enna)
Fade Margin (current ly 6dB)
Rat e
Required Range and climat e type
Link Budget Calculator Internal Data
For each product (or Regulat ion and Band) t he calculat or st ores t he following dat a required
for link budget calculat ions:
Maximum Transmit power (per modulat ion)
Receiver Sensit ivit y (per modulat ion) for Et hernet service
Maximum linear input power (used t o calculat e minimum dist ance)
Ant enna gain and cable loss for ODU wit h int egrat ed ant enna
Available Channel Bandwidt hs
Cal cul at i ons Chapt er 19
Calculations
EIRP
Expected RSS and Fade Margin
where:
Sit e A is t he t ransmitt ing sit e
Sit e B is t he receiving sit e
Pat hLoss is calculat ed according t o t he free space model,
where Sensit ivity is dependent on air-rat e.
Min and Max Range
MinRange is t he short est range for which per air-rat e.
MaxRange (wit h Adapt ive checked) is t he largest range for which
, at t he highest air-rat e for which t his relat ionship is t rue. I n a
link wit h adapt ive rat e t his will be t he act ual behavior.
MaxRange (for a given air-rat e) is t he largest range for which
.
Service
The Et hernet and configured TDM t runks t hroughput is calculat ed according t o int ernal prod-
uct algorit hms.
Availability
The Service Availability calculat ion is based on t he Vigant s Barnet t met hod which predict s t he
downt ime probabilit y based on a climat e fact or (C fact or).
EIRP TxPower AntennaGain
SiteA
CableLoss
SiteA
+ =
ExpectedRSS EIRP PathLoss AntennaGain
SiteB
CableLoss
SiteB
+ =
PathLoss 32.45 20 frequency
MHz
( ) 20 RequiredRange
Km
( )
10
log +
10
log + =
ExpectedFadeM in arg ExpectedRSS Sensitivity =
ExpectedRSS MaxInputPower s
ExpectedRSS Sensitivity >
ExpectedRSS Sensitivity RequiredFadeM in arg + >
Availability
1 6 10
7
Cfactor frequency
GHz
RequiredRange
KM
( )
3
10
ExpectedFadeM in arg
10
------------------------------------------------------------
=
Ant enna Hei ght Chapt er 19
Antenna Height
The recommended ant enna height required for line of sight is calculat ed as t he sum t he Fres-
nel zone height and t he boresight height . See About t he Fr esnel Zone below. Using t he
not at ion of Fi gur e 19-1 below, split t ing Expect edRange int o d
1
+ d
2
, t he Fresnel zone
hei ght at dist ance d
1
from t he left hand ant enna, is given by
For t he most conservat ive sett ing, we t ake t he mid-point bet ween t he ant ennas, set t ing
which gives
simplifying t o .
The bor esi ght cl ear ance hei ght is calculat ed as:
where .
About the Fresnel Zone
The Fresnel zone (pronounced "frA-nel", wit h a silent s ) is an ellipt ically shaped conical zone
of elect romagnet ic energy t hat propagat es from t he t ransmitt ing ant enna t o t he receiving
ant enna. I t is always widest in t he middle of t he pat h bet ween t he t wo ant ennas.
0.6
300
frequency
GHz
----------------------------------- d
1
d
2

d
1
d
2
+
-----------------------------------------------------------
d
1
d
2
ExpectedRange
2
----------------------------------------- = =
0.6
300
frequency
GHz
-----------------------------------
ExpectedRange
2
-----------------------------------------
2
ExpectedRange
2
-----------------------------------------
ExpectedRange
2
----------------------------------------- +
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.52
ExpectedRange
frequency
GHz
-----------------------------------------
R
2
Mean
ExpectedRange
2
-----------------------------------------
2
+ R
Mean
R
Mean
6367.4425Km =
About t he Fr esnel Zone Chapt er 19

Figure 19-1: Fresnel zone
Fresnel loss is t he pat h loss occurring from mult i-pat h reflect ions from reflect ive surfaces such
as wat er, and int ervening obst acles such as buildings or mount ain peaks wit hin t he Fresnel
zone.
Radio links should be designed t o accommodat e obst ruct ions and at mospheric condit ions,
weat her condit ions, large bodies of wat er, and ot her reflect ors and absorbers of elect romag-
net ic energy.
The Fresnel zone provides us wit h a way t o calculat e t he amount of clearance t hat a wireless
wave needs from an obst acle t o ensure t hat t he obst acle does not att enuat e t he signal.
There are infinit ely many Fresnel zones locat ed coaxially around t he cent er of t he direct
wave. The out er boundary of t he first Fresnel zone is defined as t he combined pat h lengt h of
all pat hs, which are half wavelengt h (1/ 2 ) of t he frequency t ransmit t ed longer t han t he
direct pat h. I f t he t ot al pat h dist ance is one wavelengt h (1 ) longer t han t he direct pat h,
t hen t he out er boundary is said t o be t wo Fresnel zones. Odd number Fresnel zones reinforce
t he direct wave pat h signal; even number Fresnel zones cancel t he direct wave pat h signal.
The amount of t he Fresnel zone clearance is det ermined by t he wavelengt h of t he signal, t he
pat h lengt h, and t he dist ance t o t he obst acle. For reliability, point-t o-point links are designed
t o have at least 60% of t he first Fresnel zone clear t o avoid significant at t enuat ion.
The concept of t he Fresnel zone is shown in Fi gur e 19-1 above. The t op of t he obst ruct ion
does not ext end far int o t he Fresnel zone, leaving 60% of t he Fresnel zone clear; t herefore,
t he signal is not significant ly att enuat ed.
For more about Fresnel zone, see ht t p: / / en.wi ki pedi a.or g/ wi ki / Fr esnel _zone.

Runni ng t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or Chapt er 19
Running the Link Budget Calculator
The Link Budget Calculat or is supplied on t he RADWI N Manager CD. I t may be run st and-
alone from t he CD or from t he RADWI N Manager applicat ion.
To r un t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or f r om t he CD:
1. I nsert t he RADWI N Manager CD int o t he drive on t he managing comput er. I n t he
window which opens, click t he Link Budget Calculat or opt ion.
2. I f t he CD aut orun applicat ion does not st art by it self, t hen point your browser t o
Z: \ RADWI N\ Set up\ DATA\ Li nk Budget Cal cul at or .ht m
where Z should be replaced wit h your own CD drive name.
To r un t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or f r om t he RADWI N Manager :
Choose Hel p | Li nk Budget Cal cul at or from t he main menu of t he RADWI N Man-
ager:
Figure 19-2: Accessing t he Link Budget Calculat or
To r un t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or f r om t he Wi ndows St ar t Menu:
Go t o St ar t | Pr ogr ams | RADWI N Manager | Li nk Budget Cal cul at or
However invoked, your browser displays t he following page:
Figure 19-3: Link Budget window - st art up
To use t he Li nk Budget Cal cul at or f or RADWI N 5000 HPMP:
1. Click t he RADWI N 5000 HPMP t ab.
Figure 19-4: RADWI N 5000 HPMP LBC main window
2. Chose t he required RADWI N 5000 HPMP band.
Not e
Microsoft I nt ernet Explorer users may see a warning message like
t his:
Click t he yellow bar and follow t he inst ruct ions t o allow blocked con-
t ent .
Figure 19-5: Band select or
For t he purposes of our example, we will use 5.730-5.845 GHz FCC/ I C Connect or-
ized.
3. Ent er t he radio det ails.
The Fade margin is t he minimum required for line-of-sight (LOS) condit ions. For
degraded link condit ions, a larger Fade margin should be used.
The EI RP is given in dBm and Wat t s.
4. The Rat e it em may be used for calculat ing t he Link Budget under best and worst sce-
narios. I n pract ice, HBSs are configured for Adapt ive rat e which may not be disabled.
5. I f t he required range bet ween t he t wo link sit es is known, you may ent er it direct ly.
Alt ernat ively, you may ent er t he lat it ude and longit ude of each sit e in t he link, in
which case t he dist ance bet ween t hem will be calculat ed and displayed.
Not e
This release support s 5/ 10/ 20/ 40MHz Channel Bandwidt hs
Collocat ed HBSs use RFP E so t here is no HSS ent ry
Figure 19-6: Calculat ion of dist ance from sit e coordinat es
I f for example, we ent er:
Sit e A: 41.1N lat 75.2W Long
Sit e B: 40.8N lat 75.0W Long
and press Set ,
t he range will be calculat ed and displayed:
6. Locat ed t o t he right of t he green Coordinat es but t on is a drop-down list of Climact ic
C Fact or values. I t is only available if you choose a non-adapt ive rat e.
Figure 19-7: Climact ic C Fact ors
For help about what t hese mean, click t he ? but t on t o t he right of t he list in
Fi gur e 19-7.
Figure 19-8: Climact ic C Fact or descript ion
I n Fi gur e 19-9 we display a map of t he world showing C Fact or cont ours:
Figure 19-9: World map showing C Fact or cont ours
7. Click Cal cul at e t o obt ain t he required performance est imat e.
Figure 19-10: LBC - Result s sect ion
The Expect ed Performance paramet ers are calculat ed and displayed:
Expect ed RSS - t he expect ed RSS t hat t he RADWI N Manager shows when t he RAD-
WI N 5000 HPMP ODUs are opt imally aligned
Ser vi ces Type - Et hernet only
Et her net Rat e - maximum t hroughput available for t he chosen paramet er combina-
t ion
Ant enna hei ght f or LOS t he minimum ant enna height required for line-of-sight
operat ion. I t is t he sum of t he height required for boresight clearance due t o t he
eart hs curvat ure plus t he height required t o clear t he Fresnel zone
I f t he expect ed performance is not suit able for your applicat ion, t ry different paramet ers and
repeat t he calculat ion.
Not e
Placing t he cursor in any ot her calculat ed field will also updat e t he
calculat ed result s.
Chapter 20
Spectrum View
What is Spectrum View
The RADWI N Manager Spect rum View ut ility is an RF survey t ool designed t o support t he sec-
t or inst allat ion prior t o full sect or service act ivat ion. The t ool provides comprehensive and
clear spect ral measurement informat ion enabling easier, fast er and bett er quality inst allat ions.
You can view real-t ime spect rum informat ion, save t he spect ral informat ion and view
ret rieved spect ral informat ion from hist oric spect rum scans.
Separat e informat ion is generat ed for t he HBS and HSUs - all by select ion. A general sect or
level Highest I nt erference view is also provided.
RADWI Ns spect rum measurement and est imat ion algorit hms are designed t o show accurat e
informat ion accommodat ing variat ions in frequency, t emperat ure and int erference power and
at t he same t ime overcoming anomalies t hat t end t o occur in high int erference environment s.
Who needs it
As indicat ed in t he previous paragraph, Spect rum View is primarily a professional t ool for t he
t echnician. The Spect rum View report s may be generat ed as images, CSV files or t ext files as
part of t he Get Diagnost ics feat ure. All of t hese are int ended for use by t o RADWI N Cust omer
Services t o assist wit h diagnosing int erference relat ed problems.
I n view of t he nat ure of t he int ended audience, we assume t hat t he reader knows about RF
Spect rum Analysis. This chapt er t herefore, is not a t ut orial on RF Spect rum Analysis and is
rest rict ed t o showing how t o use t he Spect rum View t ool wit hout any furt her t heoret ical
explanat ions.
Two Ways to Run Spectrum View
Spect rum View may be run from t he HBS in which case you have a choice of analyzing all
sit es in t he sect or in one run, or making a select ion.
Spect rum View may also be run on a managing comput er direct ly connect ed t o an HSU.
Remember t hat in such a case t he result s will be quit e different if t he HSU is part of a sect or
(regist ered or not ) or if it is complet ely st and-alone, for example using a different spect ral
Wher e i s t he Spect r um Vi ew Dat a st or ed Chapt er 20
range and operat ing Band from t he HBS. I n t he former case, expect a noise hump around
t he channels used by t he sect or, due t o t he duty signals from t he HBS.
Where is the Spectrum View Data stored
Spect rum View dat a is always st ored in t he ODU originat ing t he analysis. The HBS maint ains
t he last Spect rum View analysis dat a for all members of t he sect or. I f you run Spect rum View
from a direct ly connect ed HSU, it st ores it s own dat a, which may be quit e different from t he
analysis obt ained for t he same HSU from t he HBS.
Spectrum View Main Window: HBS
I n t his sect ion we review t he main window management cont rols.
Click t he Spect r um Vi ew butt on . The Spect rum View main window opens in full screen
mode:
Use t he t op left panel t o set t he Spect rum View configurat ion paramet ers and choose an anal-
ysis type - Ent i r e Sect or or Speci f i c HSU.
Spect r um Vi ew Mai n Wi ndow: HBS Chapt er 20
The set t ings are st icky for t he HBS and will be reused. The analysis range is limit ed from
4900 t o 6050 MHz wit h a maximum difference of 500MHz. Erroneous ent ries will be shown
wit h a red border like t his:
The t imeout is t he maximum analysis t ime per sit e. Use t he bott om butt on bar t o st art an
analysis, t o st op a running analysis or run a Highest I nt erference profile for t he sect or:

I f you choose t o run t he analysis for specific HSUs, The left hand HSU panel will change:
Check t he required HSUs and t hen St ar t .
Since a large sect or will clut t er up t he right hand display area, you may select ively Show, min-
imize or remove a sect or member. Anot her way of freeing up more space for analysis displays
is t o hide t he lef t hand panel using t he circled arrow:
Spect r um Vi ew Mai n Wi ndow: HBS Chapt er 20

I f for example you click Show on t he HBS, t he following view will open in t he right panel:
Figure 20-1: Spect rum View dat a panel for t he HBS, ready for dat a
The st andard X but t on closes t he window complet ely (but does not loose dat a). The - but t on
collapses t he view t o look like t his:
Spect r um Vi ew Di spl ay Funct i on But t ons Chapt er 20
The t wo side arrows (circled) are used t o reorder a st ack of such view on t he display area:
The remaining cont rols on t he Spect rum View main window relat e t o Spect rum View dat a
manipulat ion. We will cover t hem in t he next sect ion using a live analysis.
Spectrum View Display Function Buttons
Spect rum View dat a manipulat ion funct ions are provide on t he t op butt on bar:
Not e
Each butt on funct ion applies t o all of t he sect or members at once.
Table 20-1: Spect rum View Analysis Display Butt ons funct ionality
But t on Pur pose
Show/ Hide Ant enna A
Show/ Hide Ant enna B
Show/ Hide average
Show/ Hide current channel ( HSUs only)
Show/ Hide maximum
Runni ng Spect r um Vi ew f r om t he HBS Chapt er 20
Running Spectrum View from the HBS
Choose Ent i re sect or and click St ar t . You are offered t he following caut ionary message:
I f it is accept able t o drop t he service click Yes. The processing may appear t o have st opped -
but it is not complet e unt il all of t he Show but t ons for select ed HSUs are enabled.
Here is t he result for t he HBS:
Show/ Hide DFS informat ion
Show/ Hide point values
Save t he analysis t o a CSV file
Clear all sect or member analyses from t he
display ( They can be shown again)
Table 20-1: Spect rum View Analysis Display Butt ons funct ionality ( Cont inued)
But t on Pur pose
Runni ng Spect r um Vi ew f r om t he HBS Chapt er 20
The keys t o t he color coding is permanent ly displayed at t he bott om of t he main window:
Figure 20-2: Spect rum View Analysis color codes
The green band reflect s t he current HBS operat ing frequency. Not ice also t he small fly-over
disket t e icon ( circled) t o t he upper left of eit her graph. Clicking it opens a Windows File-Save
dialog allowing you t o save t he graph t o disk as a j pg file.
Here is t he analysis for one of t he HSUs. I t is a bit different :
Runni ng Spect r um Vi ew f r om a HSU Chapt er 20
The light green rect angle in t he background of bot h ant enna displays reflect s act ual channel
(20 MHz wide here) being used by t he HSU. The t it le bar also cont ains t he HSUs I P address.
There is a furt her display of int erest : Highest I nt erference for all HSUs in t he sect or:
See Fi gur e 20-2 for t he color coding.
Running Spectrum View from a HSU
There is no difference in principle bet ween running a Spect rum View analysis for a HSU and
running it for a HBS. There is a maj or difference bet ween running Spect rum View on an act ive
HSU (regist ered or not ) or in t ot al isolat ion from t he sect or. Here is what happens in t ot al iso-
lat ion:
Runni ng Spect r um Vi ew f r om a HSU Chapt er 20
Figure 20-3: HSU spect rum analysis in complet e isolat ion from t he sect or
Now we ret urn t he HSU t o t he sect or:
Figure 20-4: HSU spect rum analysis wit hin t he sect or
The hump in Fi gur e 20-4 reflect s t he dut y cycle signal from t he HBS cent ered on t he current
channel (circled).
Zoomi ng i n and out Chapt er 20
Zooming in and out
You may zoom in on a range of int erest and enlarge it . Use t he mouse t o swipe t he range
from left t o right or reverse and t hen click.The swiped range is zoomed in. You may repeat
t his several t imes. The zoom applies t o all chart s for all element in t he analysis. An indicat or is
provided at t he t op right of each chart :
Zoom Out ret urns you t o t he previous zoom st at e; Show al l revert s you t o t he original dis-
play. I n a zoomed st at e, a horizont al scroll bar enables you t o view ot her areas of t he dis-
played frequency range.
Chapter 21
Using the Web Interface
What is it For
The Web I nt erface (WI ) enables you t o carry out basic sect or management funct ions using a
Web browser.
I t may be used t o -
Monit or a sect or on a minimal basis
Check sect or paramet ers and make limit ed changes
View t he link I nvent ory
I nspect t he Recent Event s logs
Who Needs it
The WI is a t ool for t echnicians t o quick-inst all a HSU in a link wit h minimum effort .
I t may also be employed by a user for a quick look at current operat ing paramet ers and t he
Recent Event s logs.
How i t Wor ks Chapt er 21
How it Works
Assume t he sect or set up, which we used in Chapt er 4 and lat er. We repeat it here for conve-
nience:
Table 21-1: Preconfigured set up
HBS HBS.01
I P Address 192.168.10.200
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
Lat it ude -37.8148
Longit ude 144.9630
Azimut h (deg) 0
HSUs
Beamwidt h (deg) 90
How i t Wor ks Chapt er 21
On t he managing comput er, point your browser t o192.168.10.200 and log on as shown
below. You can also log on over t he air t o regist ered HSUs in t he same way.
For st and-alone or unregist ered HSUs, you must connect a managing comput er direct ly t o t he
HSU and again log on as shown below.
HSU
HFU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.101
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Haydn
Lat it ude -37.8762
Longit ude 145.0437
HFU.01.02
I P Address 192.168.10.102
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Fixed
Cont act Mozart
Lat it ude -37.4018
Longit ude 145.0086
HNU.01.01
I P Address 192.168.10.103
t he same subnet
Net Mask 255.255.255.0
HSU t ype Nomadic
Cont act Brahms
Lat it ude
Ant enna height (m)
Table 21-1: Preconfigured set up (Cont inued)
What i t Pr ovi des Chapt er 21
What it Provides
The WI is a developing t echnology. I t is possible t hat t he current dist ribut ed release may have
addit ional or slight ly different feat ures from t hose shown here. The descript ion below, should
nevert heless give you a good idea of how t o use t he WI .
Prerequisites
Hardware
You need a regular LAN connect ion bet ween a managing comput er and one of t he sect or
ODUs. The WI can be used direct ly opposit e t he HBS any of it s HSUs. I t can also be used over
t he air from t he HBS t o any regist ered HSU.
The WI is available for Airmux-400 100M and Airmux-400 L ODUs at release level 2.6.00 or
lat er along wit h RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODUs, t his release and lat er.
Software
Your comput er should have at least version 6 of MS I nt ernet Explorer. The Web int erface also
works wit h ot her browsers such as Mozilla Firefox version 3 and lat er.
Technical Background
You should be familiar wit h t he concept s underlying t he RADWI N Manager and preferably
wit h t he Manager it self.
Special Considerations Working with the WI
Advanced Configurations
For set up configurat ions using feat ures such as HSS, VLAN and QoS, you will need t o use t he
RADWI N Manager.
Operational Effects
Several WI funct ions cause t emporary sync loss. Typically, changing t he number of ant ennas
falls int o t his cat egory. These cases will be point ed out in War ni ng messages.
Some Working Tips
You can:
Log on t o a ODU on t he default I P address of 10.0.0.120/ 8, set t he Link I D and I P
address inst ead of using t he RADWI N Manager as in Chapt er 5. Unlike t he Local
Connect ion met hod, you need t o reset t he ODU t o see t he change in t he Web I nt er-
face.
Change t he operat ing Band of an HSU inst ead of using t he RADWI N Manager as in
Chapt er 6. You can revert it t he same way or by a direct connect ion, logged on as
I nst aller. You cannot change t he operat ing Band of t he HBS in t his way.
Look at Recent Event s for eit her sit e
Scope of t hi s Chapt er Chapt er 21
You cannot:
Change default Tx power
Configure MI MO/ Diversit y
Manage ot her feat ures such as GSU (when support ed), VLAN, QoS
Perform Soft ware upgrade
Be very careful:
Using t his t ool if your link is providing cust omer service which may not be int errupt ed
wit h sync-losses
The remainder of t his chapt er is divided int o t hree sect ions: Logging on, HBS Configurat ion
and HSU Configurat ion.
Logging on
To use t he Web int erface, simply point your browser t o t he I P address of t he sit e t o which you
are connect ed.
Figure 21-1: Web int erface - Log on
The User Name and Password are respect ively, admi n and net man as used for Telnet
access. You must click t he Log I n but t on t o effect ent ry t o t he WI . The foregoing applies t o
bot h t he HBS and t he HSUs.
HBS Management Chapt er 21
HBS Management
The Main Window
Figure 21-2: Web int erface - Main window, HBS
The Sect or I D (EBG_20561334) appears all or in part as t he heading. The HBS I nfo panel is
self explanat ory. The green Act ive indicat or will vary according t o t he st at us of t he HSU
shown by t he RADWI N Manager.
Conf i gur e Chapt er 21
Figure 21-3: Sect or St at us panel
(it will typically be Act ive, I nact ive, Probing et c.)
The bott om panel shows all member HSUs. The green LED icons will change color t o reflect
t he st at us of HSUs. For example, deregist ering an HSU will change it t o black as in t he RAD-
WI N Manager.
Figure 21-4: HSU Haydn deregist ered
Now, click anywhere on t he HBS I nfo panel:
Configure
The Configure but t on opens t he following display:
System
The Name, Cont act and Locat i on field may be changed. Clicking Save commit s t hem.
Clicking Ref r esh revert s t he fields t o t heir last Saved values.
Air Interface
There is not hing t hat can be changed on t his panel. Clicking t he Ant enna & Tx Power but t on
opens up t he following window:
The only it em t hat can be changed is t he Ant enna Type:
Caut i on
Changing Ant enna Type will call a sect or-wide sync loss.
Inventory
The I nvent ory display is for informat ion only.
Management
The Management fields are all fully edit able:
I f you change any of t hese fields, you will cause a HBS reset :
Other
You may change t he HBS LAN port configurat ion:
You will receive t he following not ificat ion:
This act ion of course, has no bearing on t he sect or.
Event s Chapt er 21
Events
The Recent Event List is displayed:
Reset
Use t his but t on t o reset t he HBS.
HSU Management
HSU management follows t he same pat t ern as t hat for t he HBS. To avoid t edious repet it ion,
We will only point out significant differences.
The Main Window
HSU configurat ion is accomplished by clicking t he required HSU in t he bot t om panel of Chap-
t er 21. For t he purposes of t his sect ion, we have deregist ered Haydn so t he panel looks like
t his:
Click Mozart . Here is what you see:
The Mai n Wi ndow Chapt er 21
Clicking Configure, opens up a new t ab in you browser, point ing t o Mozart :
Here is t he HSU main window:
The only it em here requiring comment is t he Conf i gure butt on. I nst al l is disabled and t he
remaining t hree but t ons are t he same as for t he HBS.
Here is t he Conf i gure display:
The only funct ion here, which differs from t he corresponding HBS funct ion, is t he Ai r I nt er -
f ace t ab.
I n addit ion t o t he Ant enna & Tx Power butt on, you may also change operat ing Band:
.
War ni ng
There are t wo st rict caveat s t o using t his funct ion:
I t is int ended as a t ool for t he field t echnician, replacing an HSU in
t he field.
I f you change t he operat ing Band of a regist ered HSU, you will
loose it from t he sect or. The only remedy is t o log on t o t he HSU
wit h a di r ect connect i on and eit her reverse t he above process, or
log on as I nst aller and using t he regular Change Band.
USERMANUAL
Release3.3.00
Part7:ProductReference
UM50003300/05.12
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 A-1
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Scope of these Specifications
This appendix cont ains t echnical specificat ions for t he maj or link component s appearing in
t his User Manual. They are correct at t he dat e of publicat ion, but are int ended for general
background only. The lat est aut horit at ive and most up t o dat e t echnical specificat ions are
available as Dat a Sheet s obt ainable from RADWI N Cust omer Service.
I n any event , RADWI N reserves t he right t o change t hese specificat ions wit hout not ice.
ODU - HBS and HSU
Capaci t y
HBS: Up t o 200Mbps aggregat e net t hroughput depending on regulat ion
HSU: Up t o 50 Mbps aggregat e net t hroughput depending on model
Range Up t o 40 km / 25 miles
Radi o Modul at i on 2x2 MI MO-OFDM (BPSK/ QPSK/ 16QAM/ 64QAM)
Adapt i ve Modul at i on & Codi ng Support ed
Aut omat i c Channel Sel ect i on Support ed
DFS Support ed
Di ver si t y Support ed
Spect rum Vi ew Support ed
Dupl ex Technol ogy TDD
Er r or Cor r ect i on FEC k = 1/ 2, 2/ 3, 3/ 4, 5/ 6
Rat e Dual Ant enna [ Mbps] at 20
MHz CBW
13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130
Rat e Si ngl e Ant enna [ Mbps] at 10
MHz CBW
6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65
Modul at i on BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM
FEC [ k= ] 1/ 2 1/ 2 3/ 4 1/ 2 3/ 4 2/ 3 3/ 4 5/ 6
Max Tx Power [ dBm] f or 4.8 6 GHz 25 24 21 19 18
Sensi t i vi t y ( dBm) @BER < 10e-11 at
20 MHz CBW
For 10 MHz CBW, deduct 3 dBm
-88 -86 -83 -81 -77 -72 -70 -67
Encr ypt i on AES 128
ODU - HBS and HSU Appendi x A
Band
( GHz)
Regul at i on
Occupi ed
Frequency Range
( GHz)
Suppor t ed
Channel
Bandwi dt h
( MHz)
Compl i ance
2.5 FCC BRS( * ) 2.495- 2.690 5, 10, 20 FCC 47CFR, Part 27, Subpart M (BRS/ EBS)
3.5
ETSI ( ) 3.4105 3.7025 5, 10, 20 ETSI EN 302 326-2
I C 3.475 3.650 5, 10, 20 I C RSS-192
Uni ver sal 3.300 3.800 5, 10, 20 N/ A
3.6 FCC/ I C 3.650 3.675 5, 10, 20 FCC Part 90 Subpart Z and I C RSS-197 (Rest rict ed)
4.9
FCC/ I C 4.940 4.990 5, 10, 20 FCC 47CFR, Part 90, Subpart Y and I C RSS-111
Uni ver sal 4.890 5.010 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
5.0 Uni ver sal 4.990 5.160 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
5.3
ETSI 5.150 5.350 10, 20 ETSI EN 301 893
FCC/ I C 5.260 5.340 5,10, 20, 40 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E and I C RSS-210
Uni ver sal 5.140 5.345 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
5.4
ETSI 5.475 5.720 10, 20, 40 ETSI EN 301 893
FCC
5.480 - 5.590
5.660 - 5.715
5, 10, 20, 40 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E
I C
5.480 5.590
5.660 5.715
5, 10, 20, 40 I C RSS-210
Uni ver sal 5.465 5.730 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
5.8
ETSI 5.725 5.875 10, 20 ETSI EN 302 502
FCC/ I C 5.725 5.850 5, 10, 20, 40 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart C and I C RSS-210
MI I Chi na 5.730 5.845 5, 10, 20, 40 MI I China
WPC I ndi a 5.825 5.875 5, 10, 20, 40 GSR-38
5.9 Uni ver sal 5.730 5.960 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
6.0 Uni ver sal 5.690 6.060 5, 10, 20, 40 N/ A
HBS wi t h I nt egr at ed Ant enna 37.1/ 14.84(W) x 37.1/ 14.84(H) x 9.00/ 3.6(D) cm/ in; 3.5 kg / 7 lbs
HBS/ HSU Connect ori zed 19.5/ 7.7(W) x 27.0/ 10.8(H) x 5.5/ 2.2(D) cm/ in; 1.8 kg / 3.6 lbs
HSU SFF ( Embedded ant enna) 19.5/ 7.7(W) x 27.0/ 10.8(H) x 7/ 2.8(D) cm/ in; 1.8 kg / 3.6 lbs
HSU- 505 Connect or i zed 19.5/ 7.7(W) x 27.0/ 10.8(H) x 5.5/ 2.2(D) cm/ in; 1.1 kg / 2.4 lbs
HSU- 505 wi t h I nt egr at ed Ant enna 24.1/ 9. 4(W) x 19.7/ 7.7(H) x 7.7/ 3(D) cm/ in; 1.3 kg / 2.8 lbs
Power Feedi ng Dual feeding, -20 t o -60 VDC (AC/ DC convert er is available)
Power Consumpt i on - al one HBS: < 25W, HSU: < 20W, HSU-505< 10W
ODU - HBS and HSU Appendi x A
Ar chi t ect ur e
ODU: Out door Unit wit h I nt egrat ed Ant enna, Connect orized for Ext ernal
Ant enna or Embedded
PoE device for Et hernet only
ODU t o PoE I nt er f ace
HBS:
Out door RADWI N CAT-5e cable. maximum cable lengt h: 100m for 10/
100BaseT.
Out door RADWI N CAT-5e cable. maximum cable lengt h: 75m for
1000BaseT.
HSU:
Out door CAT-5e cable; maximum cable lengt h: 100 m (10/ 100BaseT)
Management Appl i cat i on ( per sect or ) RADWI N Manager
Pr ot ocol SNMP and Telnet
NMS RADWI N NMS - RNMS
Oper at i ng Temperat ur es HBS/ HSU: -35C t o + 60C / -31F t o + 140F
Humi di t y HBS/ HSU: Up t o 100% non-condensing, I P67
St orage -40 t o 85C / -40F t o 185F
FCC/ I C ( cTUVus) UL 60950-1, UL ?-22, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950-1, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950-22
ETSI / I EC EN/ I EC 60950-1, EN/ I EC 60950-22
FCC
47 CFR Class B, Part 15, Subpart B
ETSI
EN 300 386, EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4
CAN/ CSA
CI SPR 22-04 Class B
AS/ NZS
CI SPR 22: 2004 Class B
I DU-H ( Aggr egat i on Uni t ) Appendi x A
IDU-H (Aggregation Unit)
GbE PoE Device - Indoor, AC
PoE I nt er f aces 6 x legacy mode PoE port s(10/ 100/ 1000Mbps), up t o 25W per port
Et her net Por t s 2 x RJ-45 PHY port s of 10/ 100/ 1000 Mbps Based-T Et hernet
LAN I nt er f ace Fr ami ng/ Codi ng I EEE 802.3/ U
LAN I nt er f ace Li ne I mpedance 100 Ohm
LAN I nt er f ace Et her net Mode Aut o-negot iat ion 10/ 100/ 1000
SFP I nt er f aces 2 x SFP port s of 1000 Mbps (st andard MSA)
MAC Addr ess Ent r i es Up t o 1K MAC Address ent ries (same as I DU-C)
Maxi mal Fr ame Si ze 2048 byt es
Et her net Lat ency 3 ms
Di mensi ons 1U 19 Rack mount ed, half widt h
Wei ght 0.8Kg
I nt ernal Power Consumpt i on < 15W @ Maximal Power feeding
Power Feedi ng 44VDC - 56VDC, Dual redundant input s. 3 pin female DC connect or
Gr oundi ng Front panel grounding lug, as for I DU-C
Pr ot ect i on
- DC input Line & Reverse Polarit y prot ect ion
- PoE Port s over/ under Current & over/ under Volt age prot ect ions
Oper at i ng Temper at ur es -40C - 60C / -40F - 140F
Humi di t y 90% non-condensing
St orage -40 t o 70C / -40F t o 158F Humidit y 95%
TUV UL/ EN/ I EC 60950-1
CAN/ CSA 60950-1 C22.2
FCC CFR47 Class B, Part 15, Subpart B
ETSI 300 386 V1.3.2; 301 489-4 V1.3.1; 301 489- 1 V1.4.1; 55022: 1998
CAN/ CSA 60950-1 C22.2
CAN/ CSA-CEI / I EC CI SPR 22
AS/ NZS CI SPR 22, CI SPR 22: 2002, CI SPR 22: 1997
AC I nput Vol t age 100-240VAC nominal, 90-264VAC max range
I nput Fr equency 47-63Hz
I nput Cur r ent
2.0A (rms) 115VAC at Max. load
1.2A (rms) 230VAC at Max. load
Out put Vol t age 56VDC
PoE Devi ce - Out door , DC Appendi x A
PoE Device - Outdoor, DC
Pr ot ect i on
Short circuit prot ect ion
Aut o recovery
Over volt age prot ect ion
I ndi cat i on Green led for normal operat ion
PoE out put RJ-45 connect or
PoE t o ODU I nt er f ace
Out door CAT-5e; Maximum cable lengt h: 75m for 1000BaseT or 100m for 10/
100BaseT
Et her net i nput RJ-45 connect or
AC i nput on devi ce St andard socket I EC320 C14 t ype
AC cabl e Variet y of AC plugs available (see below)
Et her net / ODU RADWI N RJ-45 connect or
Et her net LAN i nt er f ace t ype RJ- 45, 10/ 100/ 1000BaseT I nt erface ( Line I mpedance - 100O)
Case Plast ic
Di mensi ons 16cm(W) x 6.3cm(D) x 3.33cm(H)
Wei ght 250g
Oper at i ng Temper at ur es 0C - 40C
Humi di t y 90% non-condensing
UL 60950-1
C- UL 60950-1
TUV/ GS I EC/ EN 60950-1
ESD
61000- 4- 2
RS
61000- 4- 3
EFT
61000- 4- 4
Sur ge
61000- 4- 5
CS
61000- 4- 6
DI PS
61000- 4- 11
EMI
FCC part 15 class B, CI SPR Pub 22 class B
I nput vol t age r ange -20 t o -60 VDC ( single input )
Out put vol t age 48VDC / 0.6A
Power Consumpt i on 0.5W (not including radio)
Pr ot ect i ons
Different ial - 15KW
Common 3KW
GSU Appendi x A
GSU
Et her net LAN i nt er f ace t ype RJ- 45, 10/ 100BaseT I nt erface ( Line I mpedance - 100O)
DC i nput 2 pins connect or
PoE t o ODU I nt er f ace Out door CAT-5e; Maximum cable lengt h: 100m for 10/ 100BaseT
ODU ( PoE Por t ) RJ45
Di mensi ons 24.5cm(H) x 13.5cm(W) x 4.0cm(D)
Wei ght 1.0kg/ 2.2lbs
Encl osur e All weat her cases
Oper at i ng Temperat ur es - 35C - 60C / - 31F - 140F
Humi di t y Up t o 100% non-condensing
St andar ds
I EC 60721-3-4 Class 4M5
I P67
FCC/ I EC/ CAN/ CSA Designed t o meet 60950-1, 60950-22
ETSI Designed t o meet EN 300 386 V1.3.2; EN 301 489-1 V1.4.1
FCC Designed t o meet CFR47 Class B, Part 15, Subpart B
CAN/ CSA Designed t o meet I CES-003: 2004 Class B
AS/ NZS Designed t o meet CI SPR 22: 2006 class B
Ar chi t ect ur e Out door Unit Connect orized for Ext ernal GPS Ant enna
GSU t o PoE I nt er f ace Out door CAT-5e cable; Maximum cable lengt h: 100 m
Di mensi ons 24.5cm(H) x 13.5cm(W) x 4.0cm(D)
Wei ght 1.0kg/ 2.2lbs
Power Feedi ng Power provided by PoE device
Max Power Di ssi pat i on 10Wat t
Oper at i ng Temper at ur e Range -35C t o + 60C / -13F t o 140F
Humi di t y 100% condensing, I P67
EN/ I EC Designed t o meet EN/ I EC 60950-1, 60950-22
FCC Designed t o meet 47 CFR Class B, Part 15, Subpart B
ETSI Designed t o meet EN 300 386 V1.3.3; EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1; EN 301 489-1
Li ght ni ng Pr ot ect or Appendi x A
Lightning Protector
CAN/ CSA-CEI / I EC Designed t o meet CI SPR 22-02
AS/ NZS Designed t o meet CI SPR22: 2006 Class B
El ect ri cal
Compat i bl e I nt er f aces 10/ 100/ 1000BaseT
Dat a Rat es Up t o 1000Mbps
Nomi nal Oper at i onal Vol t age 48 VDC
Maxi mum Oper at i onal Vol t age 60 VDC - 650 mA
Maxi mum Cont i nuous cur r ent 1 A
I mpedance 90 t o 110 Ohm
Connect i on t ype RJ45 CAT 5e STP (shielded)
Pi n-out 8 wires + shielding
Pi ns Pr ot ect ed All pins prot ect ed
Response t i me < 5 microseconds (wit h ODU)
Nomi nal di schar ge cur r ent s
Li ne t o Li ne 500 A @ 8/ 20?s
Li ne t o Ground 2000 A @ 8/ 20 ?s
I mpul se Di schar ge Cur r ent
20000 A, 8/ 20 ?s 1 operat ion minimum
10000 A, 8/ 20 ?s > 10 operat ions
2000 A, 10/ 350 ?s 1 operat ion
200 A, 10/ 1000 ?s > 300 operat ions
200 A, 10/ 700 ?s > 500 operat ions
I mpul se Spark-over
DC Spar k-over 20 % @ 100 V/ s 150 V
100 V/ ?s 350 V
1000 V/ ?s 500 V
Capaci t ance < 2 pF
DC Hol dover Vol t age 80V
Mechani cal
Encl osur e Met al
Connect i on t o bondi ng Net wor k Screw
Di mensi ons 150mm
Fast Et her net CAT-5e cabl e r epeat er Appendi x A
Fast Ethernet CAT-5e cable repeater
Wei ght 220 gram (0.22Kg)
Envi r onment al
Oper at i ng t emper at ur e -40 t o + 60
St orage t emper at ur e -50 t o + 70
Encl osur e r at i ng I P67
Humi di t y 100% non condensing
El ect ri cal
Compat i bl e I nt er f aces 100BaseT
Dat a Rat es Up t o 1000Mbps
Nomi nal Oper at i onal Vol t age 48 VDC
Maxi mum Oper at i onal Vol t age 60 VDC - 650 mA
Current consumpt i on 0.5 A
I mpedance 90 t o 110 Ohm
Connect i on t ype RJ45 CAT 5e STP (shielded)
Pi n-out 8 wires + shielding
Mechani cal
Encl osur e Met al
Connect i on t o bondi ng Net wor k Screw
Di mensi ons 150mm
Wei ght 220 gram (0.22Kg)
Envi r onment al
Oper at i ng t emper at ur e -40 t o + 60
St orage t emper at ur e -50 t o + 70
Encl osur e r at i ng I P67
Humi di t y 100% non condensing
Saf et y
FCC/ I C ( cTUVus) UL 60950-1, UL 60950-22, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950-1, CAN/ CSA C22.2 60950-22
ETSI / I EC EN/ I EC 60950-1, EN/ I EC 60950-22
EMC
FCC CFR47 Class B, Part 15, Subpart B
ETSI EN 300 386, EN 301 489?4, EN 301 489?1
Ant enna Char act er i st i cs Appendi x A
Antenna Characteristics
An ant enna is t he radiat ing and receiving element from which t he radio signal, in t he form of
RF power, is radiat ed t o it s surroundings and vice versa. The t ransmission range is a funct ion
of t he ant enna gain and t ransmitt ing power. These fact ors are limit ed by count ry regulat ions.
The RADWI N 5000 HPMP may be operat ed wit h an int egrat ed ant enna at t ached t o t he HSU
unit , or wit h an ext ernal ant enna wired t o t he HBS/ HSU via a N-type connect ors. All cables
and connect ions must be connect ed correct ly t o reduce losses. The required ant enna imped-
ance is 50?.
CAN/ CSA- CEI / I EC CI SPR 22 Class B
AS/ NZS CI SPR 22 Class B
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 B-1
Appendix B
Wiring Specifications
ODU-PoE Cable (HBS and HSU)
The ODU-PoE cable is shielded/ out door class CAT-5e, 4 t wist ed-pair 24 AWG t erminat ed wit h
RJ-45 connect ors on bot h ends. A cable gland on t he ODU side provides hermet ic sealing.
The following t able shows t he connect or pinout :
HBS/HSS Unit Connection Pinout
Table B-1: ODU-PoE RJ-45 Connect or Pinout
Funct i on Col or PoE ODU
Et her net ( RxN) Whit e/ Green 1 1
Et her net ( RxT) Green 2 2
Et her net ( TxT) Whit e/ Orange 3 3
Et her net ( TxN) Orange 6 6
Power ( + ) Blue 4 4
Power ( + ) Whit e/ Blue 5 5
Power ( ) Whit e/ Brown 7 7
Power ( ) Brown 8 8
Table B-2: HBS/ HSS Unit Connect ion Pinout
Col or
ODU
RJ-45
HSS
UNI T RJ-
45
Whit e/ Green 1 1
Green
Not connect ed
Whit e/ Orange
Orange 6 6
Blue 4 4
Whit e/ Blue 5 5
User Por t Connect or s Appendi x B
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 B-2
User Port Connectors
LAN Port
The LAN 10/ 100BaseT int erface t erminat es in an 8-pin RJ-45 connect or, wired in accordance
t o Tabl e B-3.
DC Power Terminals
DC PoE
Whit e/ Brown 7 7
Brown 8 8
Table B-3: Fast Et hernet Connect or Pinout
Funct i on Si gnal Pi n
Transmit Dat a (posit ive) TD (+ ) 1
Transmit Dat a (negat ive) TD () 2
Receive Dat a (posit ive) RD (+ ) 3
Receive Dat a (negat ive) RD () 6
Table B-4: Terminal Block 2-pin -48VDC
Funct i on Pi n
+ Right
Left
Table B-2: HBS/ HSS Unit Connect ion Pinout (Cont inued)
Col or
ODU
RJ-45
HSS
UNI T RJ-
45
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 C-1
Appendix C
MIB Reference
Introduction
About the MIB
The RADWI N MI B is a set of API s t hat enables ext ernal applicat ions t o cont rol RADWI N
equipment .
The MI B is divided int o public and a privat e API groups:
Publ i c: RFC-1213 (MI B I I ) variables, RFC-1214 (MI B I I ) Syst em and I nt erfaces sec-
t ions
Pri vat e: Cont rolled by RADWI N and supplement s t he public group.
This appendix describes t he public and privat e MI B used by RADWI N.
Terminology
The following t erms are used in t his appendix.
I n addit ion, t he MI B uses int ernally, t he older not ions of Local si t e and Remot e si t e where
t his manual would use sit e A and sit e B.
To avoid burdening t he reader, t his appendix will follow t he MI B usage.
Interface API
Control Method
The RADWI N Manager applicat ion provides all t he means t o configure and monit or a RADWI N
5000 HPMP link, communicat ing wit h t he SNMP agent in each ODU. Each SNMP agent con-
Ter m Meani ng
MI B Management I nformat ion Base
API Applicat ion Programming I nt erface
SNMP Simple Net work Management Prot ocol
Communi t y St r i ng Appendi x C
t ains dat a on each of t he PoEs and ODUs in t he link. Bot h agent s communicat e wit h each
ot her over t he air using a propriet ary prot ocol.
To cont rol and configure t he device using t he MI B, you should adhere t o t he following rules:
The connect ion for cont rol and configurat ion is t o t he local sit e, over any SNMP/ UDP/
I P net work.
All Paramet ers should be consist ent bet ween bot h of t he ODUs. Not e t hat inconsis-
t ency of air paramet ers can break t he air connect ion. To correct air paramet ers incon-
sist ency you must reconfigure each of t he ODUs.
Common pract ice is t o configure t he remot e sit e first and t hen t o configure t he local
sit e.
For some of t he configurat ion paramet ers addit ional act ion must be t aken before t he
new value is loaded. Please refer t o t he operat ion in t he paramet ers descript ion.
Some of t he MI B paramet ers values are product dependent . I t is st rongly recommend
using t he RADWI N Manager Applicat ion for changing t hese values. Sett ing wrong val-
ues may cause indet erminat e result s.
Community String
To cont rol a link, all SNMP request s should go t o t he local sit e I P address.
See Tabl e 4-3 for default Community st rings.
Private MIB Structure
The sect ions in t he privat e RADWI N MI B and it s locat ion in t he MI B t ree are shown in
Fi gur e C-1 below:
Figure C-1: Top Level Sect ions of t he privat e MI B
Not e
Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single I P address.
MI B Par amet er s Appendi x C
The product s MI B sect ion cont ains t he definit ion of t he Obj ect I Ds for t he t wo form fact ors of
t he ODUs, I nt egrat ed Ant enna and Connect orized ( referred in t he MI B as ext ernal
ant enna) and GSU (where applicable):
Figure C-2: Product MI B
The GpsSynchronizerFamily MI B defines t he GSU.
The general MI B include a single generic paramet er t hat is used by all t raps as a t rap descrip-
t ion paramet er.
MIB Parameters
The following sect ion describes all of t he MI B paramet ers. The MI B paramet ers follow t he fol-
lowing naming convent ion:
< wi nl i nk1000> < Sect i on 1> ...< Sect i on n> < Par amet er Name>
For each of t he configurat ion and cont rol paramet ers (paramet ers wit h read-writ e access),
t he Descript ion column describes when t he new value is effect ive. I t is recommended t hat
you perform t he appropriat e act ion t o make t he values affect ive immediat ely aft er any
change. Where a change is required on bot h sides of t he link, it is recommended t hat you
change bot h sides of t he link first and t hen perform t he act ion.
Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB
Table C-1: Support ed RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 1 of 2)
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
ifIndex
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.x
a
Integer RO A unique value for each interface.Its value ranges
between 1 and the value of ifNumber.The value for
each interface must remain constant at least from
one re-initialization of the entity's network
management system to the next re-initialization.
ifDescr .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 DisplayString RO A textual string containing information about the
interface.This string should include the name of
the manufacturer, the product name and the
version of the hardware interface.
Suppor t ed Var i abl es f r om t he RFC 1213 MI B Appendi x C
ifType .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3 Integer RO The type of interface, distinguished according to
the physical/link protocol(s) immediately `below'
the network layer in the protocol stack.
ifSpeed .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 Gauge RO An estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in
bits per second.For interfaces which do not vary in
bandwidth or for those where no accurate
estimation can be made, this object should ontain
the nominal bandwidth.
ifPhysAddress .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 Phys-Address RO The interface's address at the protocol layer
immediately `below' the network layer in the
protocol stack. For interfaces which do not have
such an address (e.g., a serial line), this object
should contain an octet string of zero length.
ifAdminStatus .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 Integer RW The desired state of the interface. The testing(3)
state indicates that no operational packets can be
passed.
ifOperStatus .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 Integer RO The current operational state of the interface. The
testing(3) state indicates that no operational
packets can be passed.
ifInOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.x Counter RO The total number of octets received on the
interface, including framing characters.
ifInUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.x Counter RO The number of subnetwork-unicast packets
delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.x Counter RO The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-
broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets
delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.x Counter RO The number of inbound packets that contained
errors preventing them from being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.x Counter RO The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters.
ifOutUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher-level
protocols requested be transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast address, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
ifOutNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher-level
protocols requested be transmitted to a non-
unicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or
subnetwork-multicast) address, including those
that were discarded or not sent.
a. x is the interface ID
Table C-1: Support ed RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 2 of 2)
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
Pr i vat e MI B Par amet er s Appendi x C
Private MIB Parameters
Table C-2: Privat e MI B Paramet ers ( Sheet 1 of 24)
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAdmProductType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RO ODU configuration description.
winlink1000OduAdmHwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 DisplayString RO ODU Hardware Version.
winlink1000OduAdmSwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RO ODU Software Version.
winlink1000OduAdmLinkName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.4 DisplayString RW Link Name. A change is effective immediately.
winlink1000OduAdmResetCmd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.5 Integer RW Reset Command. A set command with a value of
3 will cause a device reset. HBS only: A set
command with a value of 4 will cause a device reset
for the entire sector. The read value is always 0.
winlink1000OduAdmAddres 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.6 IPAddress RW ODU IP address. A change is effective after reset.
The parameter is kept for backward compatibility.
Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmMask 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.7 IPAddress RW ODU Subnet Mask. A change is effective after
reset. The parameter is kept for backward
compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmGateway 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.8 IPAddress RW ODU default gateway. A change is effective after
reset. The parameter is kept for backward
compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmBroadcast 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.10 Integer RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager
application provided with the product.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsTable N/A Trap destinations table. Each trap destination is
defined by an IP address and a UDP port. Up to 10
addresses can be configured.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsEntry N/A Trap destinations table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex }
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex RO Trap destinations table index.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.2 IPAddress RW Trap destination IP address. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsPort 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.3 Integer RW UDP port of the trap destination. A change is
effective immediately.
winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.13 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the buzzer
while the unit is in install mode. A change is
effective immediately. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabledAuto (1) enabledConstantly(2)
advancedAuto (3).
winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.14 DisplayString RO This parameter is reserved for the Manager
winlink1000OduReadCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.15 DisplayString RW Read Community String. This parameter always
returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used by
the Manager application to change the Read
Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.
winlink1000OduReadWriteCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.16 DisplayString RW Read/Write Community String. This parameter
always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is
used by the Manager application to change the
Read/Write Community String. The SNMP agent
accepts only encrypted values.
winlink1000OduTrapCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.17 DisplayString RW Trap Community String. This parameter is used by
the Manager application to change the Trap
Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.
winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.18 Integer RO Major version of the SNMP agent.
winlink1000OduAdmRemoteSiteName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.19 DisplayString RO Remote site name. Returns the same value as
sysLocation parameter of the remote site.
winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.20 Integer RO Minor version of the SNMP agent.
winlink1000OduAdmLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.21 DisplayString RW Link Password. This parameter always returns *****
when retrieving its value. It is used by the Manager
application to change the Link Password. The
SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values.
winlink1000OduAdmSiteLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.22 DisplayString RW Site Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the
Manager application to change the Link Password
of the site. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.
winlink1000OduAdmDefaultPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.23 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the current Link
Password is the default password.
winlink1000OduAdmConnectionType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.24 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the Manager application
is connected to the local ODU or to the remote
ODU over the air. A value of 'unknown' indicates
community string mismatch.
winlink1000OduAdmBackToFactorySettingsCm
d
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.25 Integer RW Back to factory settings Command. A change is
effective after reset. The read value is always 0.
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.26 DisplayString RW ODU IP address Configuration. The format is:
<IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gateway
>|
winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.27 Integer RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is
0 meaning VLAN unaware.
winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.28 Integer RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest
priority.
winlink1000OduAdmSN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.29 DisplayString RO ODU Serial Number
winlink1000OduAdmProductName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.30 DisplayString RO This is the product name as it exists at EC
winlink1000OduAdmActivationKey 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.31 DisplayString RW Activates a general key.
winlink1000OduAdmRmtPermittedOduType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.32 DisplayString RW Mobile Application: permitted partner OduType.
winlink1000OduAdmCpuID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.33 Integer RO CPU ID
winlink1000OduSrvMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.1 Integer RW System mode. The only values that can be set are
installMode and slaveMode; normalMode reserved
to the Manager application provided with the
product. A change is effective after link re-
synchronization.
winlink1000OduSrvBridging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 Integer RO Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0)
enabled (1).
winlink1000OduSrvRingLinkMode RW Mode of the link regarding ring topology.
winlink1000OduSrvRingTopologySupported RO Ring Topology options are: supported not
supported
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdTable N/A Ring VLAN IDs table.
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdEntry N/A VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values
are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN
unaware. INDEX {
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex }
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex RO Index of VLAN ID of the internal ring messages.
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanId RW VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid values
are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning VLAN
unaware.
winlink1000OduSrvRingEthStatus RO Represents the Ethernet service blocking state of a
Rings link
winlink1000OduSrvRingMaxAllowedTimeFromL
astRpm
RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for
determination of ring failure.
winlink1000OduSrvRingWTR RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for ring
recovery.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSMode RW Mode of QoS feature.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfTable N/A QoS configuration table.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfEntry N/A QoS configuration table. INDEX {
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfIndex }
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfIndex RO Index of QoS Configuration.
winlink1000OduSrvConfVlanQGroups RO Frames classification according to VLAN Priority
IDs.
winlink1000OduSrvConfDiffservQGroups RO Frames classification according to Diffserv.
winlink1000OduSrvConfQueMir RW Desired Private MIR.
winlink1000OduSrvConfQueWeight RW QoS queueu's weights in percent.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSVlanQGroupsSetStr RW Frames classification according to VLAN IDs string
for set.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSDiffservQGroupsSetStr RW Frames classification according to Diffserv IDs
string for set.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSMaxRTQuePercent RO Maximal percent for RT & NRT queues.
winlink1000OduSrvVlanSupport RO ODU Ethernet port VLAN support and configuration
availability indication. 1 - ODU VLAN Functionality
Not Supported 2 - ODU VLAN Functionality
Supported 3 - ODU VLAN Functionality
Supported and Available
winlink1000OduSrvVlanIngressMode RW ODU Ethernet port ingress VLAN mode.
winlink1000OduSrvVlanEgressMode RW ODU Ethernet port egress VLAN mode.
winlink1000OduSrvEgressTag RW ODU ethernet port egress VLAN tag. Right most
digit is Vlan priority (0-7) other digits compose
Vlan Id (2-4094)
winlink1000OduSrvEgressProviderTag RW ODU ethernet port egress Provider VLAN tag.
Right most digit is Vlan priority (0-7) other digits
compose Vlan Id (2-4094)
winlink1000OduSrvVlanIngressAllowedVIDs RW ODU ethernet port VLAN IDs that will not be filtered
on ingress. w|w|w|w|w|w|w|w| ( where w = {0-
4094} and w != 1 )
winlink1000OduSrvVlanDisable RW Disable VLAN functionality. The following values
can be set: 3 - Disable ODU & IDU VLAN
Configurations.
winlink1000OduEthernetRemainingRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex }
winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.1 Integer RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.5 DisplayString RO ODU MAC address.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.6 Integer RW Required state of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.7 Integer RO Current operational state of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfFailAction 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.8 Integer RW Failure action of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetNumOfPorts 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.3 Integer RO Number of ODU network interfaces.
winlink1000OduEthernetGbeSupported 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.4 Integer RO
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortTable N/A ODU Bridge Ports table.
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortEntry N/A ODU Bridge Ports table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex }
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex RO ODU Bridge Port Number.
winlink1000OduBridgeBaseIfIndex RO IfIndex corresponding to ODU Bridge port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.101 Integer RW ODU bridge mode. A change is effective after
reset. Valid values: hubMode (0) bridgeMode (1).
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortTable N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortEntry N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry. INDEX
{ winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex }
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.3 Counter RO Number of frames received by this port.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.4 Counter RO Number of frames transmitted by this port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.101 Counter RO Number of bytes received by this port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.102 Counter RO Number of bytes transmitted by this port.
winlink1000OduBridgeConfigMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.102 Integer RO ODU bridge configuration mode
winlink1000OduAirFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Integer RW Installation Center Frequency. Valid values are
product dependent. A change is effective after link
re-synchronization.
winlink1000OduAirDesiredRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer RW Deprecated parameter actual behavior is read-
only. Required Air Rate. For Channel Bandwidth
of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4
respectively.
winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with
the product. The Sector ID in Point-To-Multi-Point
systems.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a nominal
value while the actual transmit power includes
additional attenuation. The min and max values
are product specific. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer RO Current Link State. The value is active (3) during
normal operation.
winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the device was
automatically selected into the radio link master or
slave. The value is undefined if there is no link.
The value is relevant only for point to point systems.
winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to
restart the synchronization process.
winlink1000OduAirRxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.1 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm. Relevant only for
point to point systems.
winlink1000OduAirTotalFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.2 Counter RO Total number of radio frames.
winlink1000OduAirBadFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.3 Counter RO Total number of received radio frames with CRC
error. The value is relevant only for point to point
systems .
winlink1000OduAirCurrentRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.4 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. Actual rate of the air
interface in Mbps. For Channel Bandwidth of 20
10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.5 Integer RO Index of current air rate.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower36 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.10 Integer RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.11 Integer RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.12 Integer RO Current Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal
value while the actual transmit power includes
additional attenuation.
winlink1000OduAirMinFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.13 Integer RO Minimum center frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirMaxFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.14 Integer RO Maximum center frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirFreqResolution 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.15 Integer RO Center Frequency resolution. Measured in MHz if
value < 100 otherwise in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.16 Integer RO Current Center Frequency. Measured in MHz if
center frequency resolution value < 100 otherwise
in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirNumberOfChannels 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.17 Integer RO Number of channels that can be used.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels
selection (ACS).
winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry N/A ACS channels table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex }
winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex RO Channel Index.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsFrequency RO Channel frequency in MHz.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperState RW Channel state. Can be set by the user. Automatic
Channel Selection uses channels that are
AirChannelsOperState enabled and
AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective
after link re-synchronization. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1). Rewriteable only in Point-To-
Point products.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail RO Channel state. Product specific and cannot be
changed by the user. Automatic Channel
Selection uses channels that are
AirChannelsOperState enabled and
AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1).
winlink1000OduAirChannelsDefaultFreq RO Default channel's availability for all CBWs. The
valid values are: forbidden (0) available (1).
winlink1000OduAirDfsState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.19 Integer RO Radar detection state. Valid values: disabled (0)
enabled (1).
winlink1000OduAirAutoChannelSelectionState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.20 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. Indicating Automatic
Channel Selection availability at current channel
bandwidth. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled (1).
winlink1000OduAirEnableTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.21 Integer RO Indicating Transmit power configuration enabled or
disabled.
winlink1000OduAirMinTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.22 Integer RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerTable N/A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate in
dBm.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerEntry N/A Maximum Transmit power table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex }
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.1 Integer RO Air interface rate index.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.2 Integer RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBandwidth 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.24 Integer RW Channel bandwidth in KHz. A change is effective
after reset.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWTable N/A Channel Bandwidths table.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWEntry N/A Channel Bandwidth table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex }
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.1 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth index.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.2 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth availability product specific.
Options are: Not supported supported with manual
channel selection supported with Automatic
Channel Selection.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.3 DisplayString RO Channels' availability per CBW.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWHSSATDDConfli
ctPerCBW
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.4 Integer RO Indication for possible Link drop per CBW due to
conflict between HSS and ATDD.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWMinRatioForSup
porting
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.5 Integer RO Minimal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM and
still enable proper operation of the aforementioned
CBW.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWMaxRatioForSup
porting
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.6 Integer RO Maximal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM and
still enable proper operation of the aforementioned
CBW.
winlink1000OduAirRFD 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.26 Integer RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds.
winlink1000OduAirRatesTable N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel
bandwidth.
winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex }
winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex RO Air Rate index.
winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail RO Air Rate availability depending on air interface
conditions.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.28 Integer RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive
Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set
operation to the master side while the link is up.
winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.29 Integer RO Link distance in meters. A value of -1 indicates an
illegal value and is also used when a link is not
established.
winlink1000OduAirLinkWorkingMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.30 Integer RO Link working mode as a result of comparing
versions of both sides of the link. Possible modes
are: Unknown - no link Normal - versions on both
sides are identical with full compatibility with
restricted compatibility or versions on both sides
are different with software upgrade or versions
incompatibility.
winlink1000OduAirMajorLinkIfVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.31 Integer RO Major link interface version
winlink1000OduAirMinorLinkIfVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.32 Integer RO Minor link interface version
winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.1 Integer RW Required Hub Site Synchronization operating state.
winlink1000OduAirHssCurrentOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.2 Integer RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state.
winlink1000OduAirHssSyncStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.3 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status.
winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.4 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection
status. In GSS mode: if generating then 1PSP is
auto generated by the GSS Unit. if
generatingAndDetecting then 1PSP is generated by
GPS satellites signal.
winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.5 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse type.
winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredExtPulseType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.6 Integer RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse
type. Valid values for read write: {typeA(2)
typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5) typeE(6) typeF(7)}.
Valid value for read only: {notApplicable(1)}.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTable N/A ODU Radio Frame Patterns (RFP) Table.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEntry N/A ODU RFP Table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex }
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.1 Integer RO ODU RFP Table index. The index represent the
Radio Frame Pattern: typeA(2) typeB(3)
typeC(4) typeD(5) typeE(6).
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW5MHz 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.2 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW5MH
z
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.3 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under
Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio Frame
Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW10MH
z
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.4 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific
Radio Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW10M
Hz
Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
z
Hz
Frame Pattern.
z
Hz
Frame Pattern.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.8 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization supported patterns
winlink1000OduAirHSSHsmID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.9 Integer RO A unique ID which is common to the HSM and all
its collocated ODUs
winlink1000OduAirHssTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.10 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS time
winlink1000OduAirHssLatitude 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.11 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Latitude
winlink1000OduAirHssNSIndicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.12 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS N/S Indicator
winlink1000OduAirHssLongitude 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.13 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Longitude
winlink1000OduAirHssEWIndicator RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS E/W Indicator
winlink1000OduAirHssNumSatellites RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Number of satellites
winlink1000OduAirHssAltitude RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Altitude
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpPhase RW Hub Site Synchronization GPS RFP phase
winlink1000OduAirLockRemote 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.41 Integer RW This parameter enables locking the link with a
specific ODU. The following values can be set:
Unlock (default) - The ODU is not locked on a
specific remote ODU. Unlock can only be
performed when the link is not connected. Lock -
The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU. Lock
can only be performed when the link is active.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.42 Integer RW Current Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. User
defined value for external antenna. Legal range:
MinAntennaGain<AntennaGain<MaxAntennaGain.
winlink1000OduAirFeederLoss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.43 Integer RW Current Feeder Loss in 0.1 dBm resolution. User
defined value for external antenna.
winlink1000OduAirMaxAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.44 Integer RO Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi
resolution.
winlink1000OduAirMinAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.45 Integer RO Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi
resolution.
winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.46 Integer RO Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in
0.1 dBm resolution.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainConfigSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.47 Integer RO Antenna Gain Configurability options are product
specific: supported not supported.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.48 Integer RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar.
winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.49 Integer RO RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1 and
RSS in radio 2.
winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.50 Integer RO Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal
value While the actual transmit power includes
additional attenuation.
winlink1000OduAirInstallFreqAndCBW 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.51 DisplayString RW Installation frequency Channel BW. Relevant in
point to point systems.
winlink1000OduAirDFStype 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.52 Integer RO DFS regulation type.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandTable N/A ODU Multi-band Sub Bands Table.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandEntry N/A ODU Multi-band Sub Bands Table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandIndex }
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.1 Integer RO ODU Multi-band sub bands table index.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.2 DisplayString RO Represents the Multi-band sub band ID.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandDescription 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.3 DisplayString RO Multi-band sub band description.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandInstallFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.4 Integer RO Represents the Multi-band sub band installation
frequency in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.5 Integer RO Represents the Multi-band sub band administrative
state.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandInstallationAl
lowed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.6 Integer RO Reflects if the Multi-band sub band allowes
installtion.
winlink1000OduAirComboFrequencyBandId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.7 Integer RO Reflects the frequency band Id.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandChannelBW
5AdminState
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.8 DisplayString RO Reflects the CBW 5MHz admin state vector.
10AdminState
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
20AdminState
40AdminState
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandAllowableCh
annels
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.12 DisplayString RO Reflects the allowable channels vector.
Avail
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.13 DisplayString RO Reflects the available CBWs vector.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandChannelBan
dwidth
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.14 Integer RO Reflects the sub-band default channel bandwidth.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandMinFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.15 Integer RO Reflects the sub-band default minimal frequency.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandMaxFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.16 Integer RO Reflects the sub-band default maximal frequency.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandFrequencyR
esolution
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.17 Integer RO Reflects the sub-band frequency resolution.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandDefaultChan
nelList
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.18 DisplayString RO Reflects the default channel list vector.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandDfsState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.19 Integer RO Reflects the sub-band DFS state.
winlink1000OduAirComboNumberOfSubBands 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.2 Integer RO Represents the number of Multi-band sub bands.
winlink1000OduAirComboSwitchSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.3 DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub band
ID. The get operation retrieves the current sub
band ID.
winlink1000OduAirComboCurrentSubBandDesc 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.4 DisplayString RO Current Sub Band description.
winlink1000OduAirInternalMaxRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.54 Integer RO Max Ethernet throughput of the site (in Kpbs).
winlink1000OduAirCapacityDirection 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.55 Integer RW Capacity direction of the site.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumAnalysisOperState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.1 Integer RW Spectrum Analysis operation state. The
configurable values are Spectrum Analysis Stop
Start and Restart. Not Supported value indicates
that the feature is not supported on the device.
Not Supported is not a configurable state.
winlink1000OduAirRxPowerAntennaA 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.2 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm of Antenna A.
winlink1000OduAirRxPowerAntennaB 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.3 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm of Antenna B.
winlink1000OduAirNumberOfSpectrumChannel
s
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.4 Integer RO Represents the number of Spectrum Channels.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelTable N/A ODU Spectrum Analysis Channel Table.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelTableEntry N/A ODU Spectrum Analysis Channel Table entry.
INDEX { winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelIndex
}
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO ODU Spectrum Channel index.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.2 Integer RO ODU Spectrum Channel frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelScanned 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.3 Integer RO
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelScanningTi
mestamp
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.4 TimeTicks RO Channel last scan timestamp in hundredths of a
second since device up time. If the channel was
not scanned than the return value will be 0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAnt
ennaA
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.5 Integer RO Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of Antenna
A - (including 2 neighbor frequencies).
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAnt
ennaB
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.6 Integer RO Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of Antenna
B - (including 2 neighbor frequencies).
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAverageN
FAntennaA
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.7 Integer RO Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
Antenna A - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAverageN
FAntennaB
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.8 Integer RO Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
Antenna B - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAnt
ennaA
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.9 Integer RO Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
Antenna A - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAnt
ennaB
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.10 Integer RO Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
Antenna B - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelCACPerfor
med
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.11 Integer RO
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastCACTi
mestamp
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.12 TimeTicks RO Last CAC performed timestamp in hundredths of a
second since device up time. If no CAC has
performed on the channel the return value will be 0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDete
cted
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.13 Integer RO
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDete
ctionTimestamp
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.14 TimeTicks RO Last Radar Detection timestamp in hundredths of a
second since device up time. If no Radar has
detected on the channel the return value will be 0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAvailable 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.15 Integer RO
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelMaxBeaco
nRss
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.16 Integer RO The max RSS value of a received beacon on the
specific channel in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelCompress
ed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.17 OctetString RO Compress all the Spectrum data per channel into
one variable. Frequency (4 bytes) Scanned (1
byte) Timestamp (4 bytes) Last NF Antenna A (1
byte) Last NF Antenna B (1 byte) Avg NF
Antenna A (1 byte) Avg NF Antenna B (1 byte)
Max NF Antenna A (1 byte) Max NF Antenna B (1
byte) CAC Performed (1 byte) Last CAC
Timestamp (4 bytes) Radar Detected (1 byte)
Radar Detected Timestamp (4 bytes) Channel
Available (1 byte) Max Beacon RSS (1 byte).
winlink1000OduAirChipMinMaxFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.6 DisplayString RO The minimum and maximum frequencies in MHz
which the chip supports.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumAnalysisTimeout Integer RW Spectrum analysis timeout in seconds.
winlink1000OduAirAntConfAndRatesStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.57 Integer RO Description: Antenna configuration and Rates
status (1 = Single antenna with single data stream
2 = Dual antenna with single data stream 3 = Dual
antenna with dual data stream).
winlink1000OduAirDualAntTxMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.58 Integer RW Description: Transmission type when using Dual
radios (MIMO or AdvancedDiversity using one
stream of data).
winlink1000OduAirTxOperationMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.59 Integer RW This parameter controls the Operation mode of
frames sent over the air. The Operation mode is
either normal (1) for regular transmission where
frame size is determined by the traffic or throughput
test (2) when the user requests an actual over the
air throughput estimation using full frames. The
latter lasts no more than a predetermined interval
(default 30 sec).
winlink1000OduAirDesiredNetMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.1 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element manager
provided with the product.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentNetMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.2 Integer RO Represents the actual Net Master Tx RAtio.
winlink1000OduAirMinUsableMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.3 Integer RO Represents the minimal value the user can
configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio.
winlink1000OduAirMaxUsableMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.4 Integer RO Represents the maximal value the user can
configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio.
winlink1000OduAirAccumulatedUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.61 Integer RO Accumulates the Unavailable seconds of the Air
Interface. Relevant for point to point systems.
winlink1000OduAirDistStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.62 DisplayString RO Possibilities of the link according to RFP and CBW
winlink1000OduAirChannelsDefaultFreqStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.63 DisplayString RO A string representing the channels available.
Each character represents one frequency when '1'
means its available and '0' means its not.
winlink1000OduAirAntConnectionType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.64 Integer RW Antenna connection type (External(1) Integrated(2)
Embedded_External(3) Embedded_Integrated(4) ).
winlink1000OduAirAllowableChannelsStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.65 DisplayString RW A string representing the allowable channels.
Each character represents one channel when '1'
means its available and '0' means its not.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAirDfsAlgorithmTypeState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.66.1 Integer RW Bitmap for state of Radar Algorithm Type. Filters by
bit's position: 0 = Zero PW 1 = Fixed 2 =
Variable 3 = Staggered 4 = Long.
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedTbl N/A Last detected radars table.
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedEntry N/A ODU Multi-band Sub Bands Table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedIndex }
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.66.2.1.1 Integer RO Dfs Last Detected Radars Table Index.
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.66.2.1.2 TimeTicks RO Dfs time of the last detected radar.
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedAlgorithmTy
pe
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.66.2.1.3 Integer RO Dfs type of the last detected radar.
winlink1000OduAirDfsLastDetectedFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.66.2.1.4 Integer RO Dfs frequency of the last detected radar.
winlink1000OduAirPreferredChannelsStr RW A string representing the preferred channels.
Each character represents one channel when '1'
means its preferred and '0' means its not.
winlink1000OduAirSyncLossThreshold RW When the current throughput is below this threshold
(in Kbps) sync loss will occur.
winlink1000OduAirGeoLocation 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.69 DisplayString RW Geographic device location in format: latitude
longitude.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the current
15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.1 Gauge RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds
starting from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.2 Gauge RO Current number of Errored Seconds starting from
the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrSES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.3 Gauge RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrBBE 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.4 Gauge RO Current number of Background Block Errors
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegrity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.5 Integer RO Indicates the integrity of the entry.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrCompressed 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.6 OctetString RO Holds a compressed string of all data per interface.
Compressed Air Interface Structure (size in
brackets): UAS (4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4)
Integrity (1) MinRSL (1) MaxRSL (1)
RSLThresh1Exceeded (4)
RSLThresh2Exceeded (4) MinTSL (1) MaxTSL (1)
TSLThresh1Exceed (4) BBERThresh1Exceed (4)
RxMBytes (4) TxMBytes (4)
EthCapacityThreshUnder (4)
HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) Compressed
Etherent ODU interface (size in brackets): UAS
(4) ES (4) SES (4) BBE (4) Integrity (1)
HighTrafficThreshExceed (4) ActiveSeconds (4)
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last
day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalSES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per
interval.
Table C-2: Privat e MI B Paramet ers (Sheet 10 of 24)
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIntegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalCompressed RO Holds a compressed string of all data per interface.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last
month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 24 hours and the oldest is 30.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per
interval of 24 hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of
24 hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDaySES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24
hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayCompressed RO Holds a compressed string of all data per interface.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the
current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.1 Integer RO Current Min Received Level Reference starting
from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.2 Integer RO Current Max Received Level Reference starting
from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh1Exc
eed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.3 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded
the RSL1 threshold in the last 15 minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh2Exc
eed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.4 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded
the RSL2 threshold in the last 15 minutes.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.5 Integer RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from the
present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.6 Integer RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from the
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTSLThresh1Exc
eed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.7 Gauge RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThresh1E
xceed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.8 Gauge RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last
day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLThresh1
Exceed
RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level exceeded
the RSL1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLThresh2
Exceed
the RSL2 threshold ACCESS read-only per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTSLThresh1
Exceed
RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalBBERThresh
1Exceed
RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last
month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day is
of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh1Exc
eed
the RSL1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh2Exc
eed
the RSL2 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTSLThresh1Exc
eed
RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayBBERThresh1E
xceed
RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrRxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.1 Gauge RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present
15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.2 Gauge RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEthCapacityThr
eshUnder
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.3 Gauge RO The number of times throughput was below
threshold in the present 15 minutes period.
Relevant for point to point systems.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrHighTrafficThre
shExceed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.4 Gauge RO The number of times actual traffic was above
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrActiveSeconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.5 Gauge RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
swervice was not blocked in the present 15 minutes
period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEthCapacity
ThreshUnder
RO The number of times throughput was below
threshold in the each interval. Relevant for point to
point systems.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalHighTrafficT
hreshExceed
RO The number of times actual traffic was above
threshold in the each interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalActiveSecon
ds
RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
service was not blocked in the each interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval
is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEthCapacityThr
eshUnder
threshold each day. Relevant for point to point
systems.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayHighTrafficThre
shExceed
threshold each day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayActiveSeconds RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
service was not blocked each day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveSecond
s
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.10.1.1 Gauge RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was
active. Under TDM backup link the parameter
indicates whether the backup link was active.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalActiveSeco
nds
RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
last month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx }
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayActiveSeconds RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service was
winlink1000OduPerfMonTxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.20 Integer RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring TSL1 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.21 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring RSL1 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.22 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring RSL2 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.23 Integer RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring BBER counter is
incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCapacityThreshKbp
s
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.24 Integer RW When the current throughput is below this threshold
the corresponding counter is incremented
winlink1000OduPerfMonHighTrafficThreshKbps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.25 Integer RW When the current traffic is above this threshold
then corresponding counter is incremented.
winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.1 Integer RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity Time_T
and Alarm Id from the
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind to
the end of each private trap.
winlink1000OduAgnGenSetMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.2 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element manager
provided with the product.
winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerIP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.1 IPAddress RW IP address of the server from which the current time
is loaded.
winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeOffsetFromUT
C
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.2 Integer RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (minutes).
Possible values: -1440..1440.
winlink1000OduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.3 OctetString RW This parameter specifies the real time and date
Format 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS' (Hexadecimal).
A date-time specification: field octets
contents range ----- ------ --------
----- 1 1-2 year 0..65536
2 3 month 1..12 3 4 day
1..31 4 5 hour 0..23 5
6 minutes 0..59 6 7 seconds
0..60 (use 60 for leap-second) 7
8 deci-seconds 0..9 For example
Tuesday May 26 1992 at 1:30:15 PM EDT
would be displayed as: 07 c8 05 1a 0d 1e 0f 00
( 1992 -5 -26 13:30:15 )
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmLastChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.1 Integer RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset
and is incremented upon each change in the
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable (either an
addition or removal of an entry).
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable N/A This table includes the currently active alarms.
When a RAISED trap is sent an alarm entry is
added to the table. When a CLEAR trap is sent
the entry is removed.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmEntry N/A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED
trap. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter }
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter RO A running counter of active alarms. The counter is
incremented for every new RAISED trap. It is
cleared after a device reset.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity RO Current Alarm severity.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmId RO Unique Alarm Identifier (combines alarm type and
interface). The same AlarmId is used for RAISED
and CLEARED alarms.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfIndex RO Interface Index where the alarm occurred. Alarms
that are not associated with a specific interface
will have the following value: 65535.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit RO Unit associated with the alarm.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID RO ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm
was raised.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT RO Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in seconds
from Midnight January 1st 1970.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText RO Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent
trap).
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.1 Integer RO This counter indicates the size of the
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable N/A This table includes the last events. When a trap is
sent an event entry is added to the table.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsEntry N/A Entry containing the details of last traps. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIndex }
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.1 Integer RO The index of the table
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.2 Integer RO Current Trap severity.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.3 Integer RO Interface Index where the event occurred. Traps
that are not associated with a specific interface
will have the following value: 65535.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTimeT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.4 Integer RO Timestamp of this trap. This number is in seconds
from Midnight January 1st 1970.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.5 DisplayString RO Trap display text (same as the text in the sent trap).
winlink1000IduAdmProductType RO IDU configuration description.
winlink1000IduAdmHwRev RO IDU Hardware Revision.
winlink1000IduAdmSwRev RO IDU Software Revision.
winlink1000OduAdmNumOfExternalAlarmIn RO Indicates the number of currently available External
Alarm Inputs.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInTable N/A This is the External Alarm Inputs table.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInEntry N/A Entry containing the elements of a single External
Alarm Input. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex}
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.1 Integer RO This value indicates the index of the External Alarm
Input entry.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInText RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It is
an optional string of no more than 64 characters
which will be used in the event being sent as a
result of a change in the status of the External
Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description}
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.3 Integer RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is
enabled or disabled.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.4 Integer RO This value indicates the current status of the
External Alarm Input.
winlink1000IduAdmSN RO IDU Serial Number
winlink1000IduAdmIduDetectionMode RW The parameter defines whether to send Ethernet
frames to detect an IDU. The valid writable values
are: userDisabled (3) userEnabled (4). A change
requires a reset and is effective after reset.
winlink1000IduAdmMountedTrunks RO Number of mounted trunks in the IDU
winlink1000IduAdmLicensedTrunks RO Number of Licensed Trunks in the IDU
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSupported RO Identifies if the local IDU supports VLAN tag/untag
winlink1000IduAdmVlanEgressMode RW VLAN tag/untag egress values
winlink1000IduAdmVlanIngressMode RW VLAN tag/untag ingress values
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000IduAdmVlanDefaultPortVIDs RW VLAN tag/untag default VLAN ids for each port -
Right most digit is Vlan priority (0-6) other digits
compose Vlan Id (1-4094)
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan1UntaggedVIDs RW VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN1 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan2UntaggedVIDs RW VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN2 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSfpUntaggedVIDs RW VLAN untagged VIDs for Sfp port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan1FilteredVIDs RW VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN1 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan2FilteredVIDs RW VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN2 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSfpFilteredVIDs RW VLAN filtered VIDs for Sfp port
winlink1000IduAdmPortsConnection RW IDU ports connection bitmap. bit 0 - LAN1-LAN2
bit 1 - SFP-LAN1 bit 2 - SFP-LAN2 bit values:
0 - ports are disconnected. 1 - ports are
connected.
winlink1000IduAdmVlanMode RW Local IDU Vlan Mode.
winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembershipVIDs RW VLAN Membership VLAN IDs list.
winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembershipPortsCode RW VLAN Membership ports code. Each value
represent the relation (bitmap) Between the
suitable VID to the IDU ports. bit 0 - LAN1 bit 1 -
LAN2 bit 2 - SFP bit value 0 - not member of
appropriate VID bit value 1 - member of
appropriate VID
winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembershipUntaggedH
andle
RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames handling.
The 3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP
accordingly. For each port the optional values
are: 1 - Discard 2 - Tag 3 - Leave Unmodified
winlink1000IduAdmVlanMembershipTagUntagg
ed
RW VLAN Membership Untagged frames tagging. The
3 values representing LAN1 LAN2 and SFP
accordingly. The value on each port entry
represent the tagging value which is built of:
VLAN ID & VLAN Priority.
winlink1000IduSrvDesiredTrunks RW Required trunks bitmap. Note that the number of
possible trunks that can be configured may vary
based on the IDU hardware configuration the
selected air interface rate and the range of the
installation. The provided Manager application
enables the user to select only available
configurations. A change is effective immediately if
applied to a master unit and the link is in service
mode.
winlink1000IduSrvServices RO This parameter is reserved to the Manager
winlink1000IduSrvActiveTrunks RO A bitmap describing the currently open TDM trunks.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunks RO A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks that
can be opened in the current configuration. The
values take into account the IDU hardware
configuration the air rate and the installation range.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesTable N/A IDU Possible Services table.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesEntry N/A IDU Services table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex }
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex RO Table index Rate index of the air interface.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleTdmServices RO Deprecated parameter. A bitmap describing the
TDM trunks that can be opened in the
corresponding Air Rate.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleEthServices RO Deprecated parameter. This parameter describes
if the Ethernet Service can be opened in the
corresponding Air Rate. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1).
winlink1000IduSrvRemainingRate RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps per air rate.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000IduSrvTrunkCost RO Cost of the TDM Service in bps.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesTable N/A ODU Possible TDM Services table.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesEntry N/A ODU TDM Services table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex }
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex RO Table index. The index is the bit mask of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesState RO Represents the TDM service availability.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMinRateIdx RO Minimum rate index of the air interface which make
the service possible.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateIdx RO Maximum rate index of the air interface which make
the service possible.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesReason RO Information about the TDM Service availability. -
Not Applicable if the service is available. The
reasons for TDM Service unavailability: - The
available throughput isn't sufficient for Service
demands; - The IDU HW doesn't support the
service; - A Link Password mismatch was
detected; - The external pulse type detected is
improper for TDM services; - A Software versions
mismatch was detected. - A-Symetric TDD Mode
Is Obligated.
winlink1000IduSrvEthActive RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state.
winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable RO Represents the Ethernet service availability state.
winlink1000IduSrvEthThroughput RO Current available Ethernet service throughput in
bps.
winlink1000IduSrvEthMaxInfoRate RW Holds the maximum bandwidth (kbps) to be
allocated for Ethernet service. Value of zero
means that Ethernet service works as best effort.
The maximum value is product specific. Refer to the
user manual.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunksT1 RO A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be
opened under T1 configuration. The values take
into account the IDU hardware configuration the air
rate and the installation range.
winlink1000IduEthernetIfTable N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table.
winlink1000IduEthernetIfEntry N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex }
winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex RO If Index corresponding to this Interface.
winlink1000IduEthernetIfAddress RO IDU MAC address.
winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfLanPorts RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU.
winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfSfpPorts RO The number of SFP interfaces in the IDU.
winlink1000IduEthernetSfpProperties RO SFP venfor properties : Vendor Name PN and
Revision.
winlink1000IduEthernetGbeSupported RO
winlink1000IduEthernetOduInErrors RO The number of inbound packets that contained
errors preventing them from being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
winlink1000IduBridgeTpAging RW Timeout in seconds for aging. Note that for this
parameter to be effective the ODU must be
configured to HUB mode. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockAvailStates RO Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock Control
each input status is represented by a bit. When the
state is available the bit value is 1. When the state
is unavailable the bit value is 0. The available
states are: bit 2 = Transparent bit 3 = Local Loop
Timed bit 4 = Remote Loop Timed bit 5 = Local
Internal bit 6 = Remote Internal
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockDesiredState RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control.
A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockActualState RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control.
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAvailOptions RO Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control
each input status is represented by a bit. When the
option is available the bit value is 1. When the
option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The
available options are: bit 2 = Automatic bit 3 =
Trunk #1 bit 4 = Trunk #2 bit 5 = Trunk #3 bit 6 =
Trunk #4 When no options are available the
returned value is: 1
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDesired RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is effective
after re-activation of the TDM service.
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockActual RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock.
winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table.
winlink1000IduTdmConfigEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex RO Table index.
winlink1000IduTdmIfIndex RO Link index in the interface table.
winlink1000IduTdmLineCoding RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only. The
parameter controls the line coding. Setting the
value to each of the indices applies to all. A
change is effective after the next open of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduTdmLoopbackConfig RW Loop back configuration table. Each of the trunks
can be set Normal Line loop back or Reverse line
loop back. A change is effective immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmLineStatus RO Line status.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTable N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex RO Table index (Same as
winlink1000IduTdmLineIndex).
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocks RO Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentDrops RO Number of error blocks transmitted to the line.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTxClock RW TDM Transmit Clock. A change is effective after re-
activation of the TDM service.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh RO High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks
winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQual RO Estimated average interval between error second
events. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a value
of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state.
winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQualEval RO Estimated average interval between error second
events during evaluation process. The valid values
are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to indicate
an undefined state.
winlink1000IduTdmSrvEval RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask. Setting this
parameter to value that is bigger than the activated
TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation
process for 30 seconds. Setting this parameter to
0 will stop the evaluation process immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupAvailableLinks RO Number of TDM backup trunks.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupTable N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex RO Table index.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the
main link is the air link or the external link.
Changes will be effective immediatly.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentActiveLink RO TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is
active or external link is active.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be
between the minimum and the maximum TDM Jitter
Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferDefaultSize RO TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMinSize RO TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMaxSize RO TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size. The units are 0.1
x millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSizeEval RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation. The value
must be between the minimum and the maximum
TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmType RW TDM Type (The value undefined is read-only).
winlink1000IduTdmTypeEval RW TDM Type for evaluation.
winlink1000IduTdmLineStatusStr RO Line status.
winlink1000IduTdmHotStandbySupport RO Indicates if Hot Standby is supported.
winlink1000IduTdmDesiredHotStandbyMode RW Desired Hot Standby Mode.
winlink1000IduTdmHotStandbyOperationStatus RO The Link Actual Status.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupLinkConfiguration RW The current configuration of the backup link.
winlink1000IduTdmLineInterfaceConfiguration RW TDM Line interface configuration.
winlink1000IduTdmLineImpedanceConfiguratio
n
RW TDM line impedance configuration (standardT1 -
100Ohm nonStandardT1 - 110Ohm)
Applicable only for T1 TDM type.
winlink1000HbsAirState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.1 Integer RO Holds the state of the HBS.
winlink1000HbsAirOpMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.2 Integer RW Holds the operation mode of the HBS.
winlink1000HbsAirAvailTimeSlots 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.3 Integer RO This parameter holds the number of available time
slots (not in use) in the air interface.
winlink1000HbsAirSectorCbwSupportedStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.4 DisplayString RO Represents the channel bandwidth which is
supported by the HBS and all connected HSUs.
winlink1000HbsAirCompressedMon 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.5 OctetString RO Holds HBS monitor data in compressed format:
HBS Traffic Monitor In Bytes(4) Out Bytes(4) In
Frames(4) Out Frames(4) HBS State (1) HBS
Freq (4) Number of Links (2) EC Change Counter
(4) Current Ratio (2) Total Air Frames (4) HBS
Rx Rate in Kbps (4) HBS Tx Rate in Kbps (4)
HBS Rx Rate in Fps (4) HBS Tx Rate in Fps (4)
HBS Set Mode (1).
winlink1000HbsAirConfChanges 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.1 OctetString RO 16 characters that represent 16 HSUs. Each time
a configuration is been changed increment the
relevant character.
winlink1000HbsAirConfTable N/A Holds the table for all registered HSUs in the sector
(16 entries).
winlink1000HbsAirConfEntry N/A HSUs configuration table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsAirConfIndex }
winlink1000HbsAirConfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.1 Integer RO HSUs configuration table index.
winlink1000HbsAirConfUpMir 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.2 Integer RW Uplink MIR towards specific HSU in units of kbps.
winlink1000HbsAirConfDownMir 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.3 Integer RW Downlink MIR towards specific HSU in units of
kbps.
winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.4 DisplayString RW HSU name.
winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuLocation 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.5 DisplayString RW HSU location.
winlink1000HbsAirConfDualAntTxMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.6 Integer RW Spatial multiplexing: MIMO (1) or Diversity (2)
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000HbsAirConfNumOfTs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.7 Integer RW Number of time slot which are allocated to specific
HSU.
winlink1000HbsAirConfGeoLocation 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.8 DisplayString RW Geographic device location in format: latitude
longitude.
winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.9 Integer RW HSU type (1 = Fixed 2 = Stationary 3 = Mobile)
winlink1000HbsAirConfHsuLevel 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.10 Integer RW HSU level (1 .. 4)
winlink1000HbsAirConfDesiredRateIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.6.2.1.11 Integer RW The rate index of both sides of the link to this HSU.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkNumOfLinks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.1 Integer RO Number of links in the links table.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkTable N/A Holds the table for all links in the sector.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkEntry N/A Link table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsAirLinkIndex }
winlink1000HbsAirLinkIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.1 Integer RO HSUs configuration table index.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.2 Integer RO HSU ID of specific link (if registered). Unregistered
links have -1.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.3 Integer RO Holds the state of specific link.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkWorkingMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.4 Integer RO Indicates the sub-state within the version
compatibility.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkSessionId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.5 Integer RO Holds the Session ID of the link.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsEstTput 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.6 Integer RO Holds the Estimated throughput from the HBS to
the HSU.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuEstTput 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.7 Integer RO Holds the Estimated throughput from the HSU to
the HBS.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.8 Integer RO Holds the range of specific link.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsRss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.9 Integer RO Holds the RSS of specific link (HBS side).
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHbsRssBal 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.10 Integer RO Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HBS side).
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.11 Integer RO Holds the RSS of specific link (HSU side).
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuRssBal 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.12 Integer RO Holds the RSS Balance of specific link (HSU side).
winlink1000HbsAirLinkHsuSerial 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.13 DisplayString RO Holds the serial number for specific HSU.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkTxOperMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.14 Integer RO Holds the TX operation mode.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuInBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.15 Integer RO Number of frames received in the HSU Lan port.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.16 Integer RO Number of frames transmitted from the HSU Lan
port.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuInFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.17 Integer RO Number of bytes received in the HSU Lan port.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuOutFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.18 Integer RO Number of bytes transmitted from the HSU Lan
port.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuMacAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.19 DisplayString RO HSU MAC Address.
winlink1000HbsAirMaxTputDown 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.20 Integer RO Max Throughput Downlink.
winlink1000HbsAirMaxTputUp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.21 Integer RO Max Throughput Uplink.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkCompressedMon 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.22 OctetString RO Holds all the link information in compressed binary
(Bytes/octets). Fields included (size in bytes):
Link State(1) Link Working Mode(1)
Session Id(4) HBS Est. Tput(4) HSU
Est. Tput(4) HBS Rss(1) HBS Rss
Balance(1) HSU Rss(1) HSU Rss
Balance(1) Tx Operation Mode(1) HSU
In Bytes(4) HSU Out Bytes(4) HSU In
Frames(4) HSU Out Frames(4) HSU
ID (1 bytes) HSU Rx Rate In Kbps (4) HSU Tx
Rate In Kbps (4) HSU Rx Rate In Fps (4) HSU Tx
Rate In Fps (4).
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000HbsAirLinkCompressedStatic 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.23 DisplayString RO Holds all the configuration data of this link in
compressed format. Helps the NMS to get info
regarding new Unregistered links. Fields Included:
SessionID (4 bytes) HSU IP address (4 bytes)
HSU Name (32 bytes) HSU Location (32 bytes)
HSU Serial number (16 bytes) HSU MAC
Address (12 bytes) Air Link Range Max
Throughput Down (4 bytes) Max Throughput Up.
(4 bytes) Cpacity Limit (4 bytes) HSU Antenna
type (1 byte)
winlink1000HbsAirCpeCapacityLimit 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.24 Integer RO Capacity Limit in Kilo bit per second.
winlink1000HbsAirLinkAntennaType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.25 Integer RO HSU External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuRxRateInKbps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.26 Integer RO HSU Rx Rate in Kbps.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInKbps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.27 Integer RO HSU Tx Rate in Kbps.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuRxRateInFps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.28 Integer RO HSU Tx Rate in Fps.
winlink1000HbsAirHsuTxRateInFps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.7.2.1.29 Integer RO HSU Tx Rate in Fps.
winlink1000HbsAirComboSwitchSectorFreqBan
dId
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.8 Integer RW Switch Frequency band for the whole sector.
winlink1000HbsAirGeoAzimuth 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.9 Integer RW Geographic sector azimuth in degrees * 10.
winlink1000HbsAirGeoBeamwidth 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.10 Integer RW Geographic sector beamwidth in degrees * 10.
winlink1000HbsAirMaxDistanceMetersMobility 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.11 Integer RW Maximum distance in meters. Used by Mobility links
only.
winlink1000HbsAirComboSwitchSectorFreqBan
dIdStr
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.1.12 DisplayString RW Switch Frequency band for the whole sector
overriding some of the Combo parameters.
winlink1000HbsBridgeAgingTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.2.1 Integer RW Timeout in seconds for aging.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanTable N/A Holds the bridge Vlan operations towards all the
registered HSUs.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEntry N/A HBS bridge Vlan table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex }
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIndex RO HBS bridge Vlan table index.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanIngress RW HBS bridge Vlan ingress.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanEgress RW HBS bridge Vlan egress.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanFilterIn RW HBS bridge Vlan filter in.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanFilterOut RW HBS bridge Vlan filter out.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanDoubleTag RW HBS bridge Vlan double tag.
winlink1000HbsBridgeVlanDefaultId RW HBS bridge Vlan default id.
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipTable N/A Holds the bridge membership relations for all the
registered HSUs.
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipEntry N/A HBS bridge membership table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipIndex }
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.2.3.1.1 Integer RO HBS bridge membership table index.
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.2.3.1.2 Gauge RW HBS bridge membership state bitmap. Each bit
represents Blocked/Opened relation (membership)
between two HSUs. Blocked=0 (bit) Opened=1
(bit). This object holds the relation to 32 HSUs.
winlink1000HbsBridgeMembershipState2nd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.2.3.1.3 Gauge RW HBS bridge membership state bitmap. Each bit
represents Blocked/Opened relation (membership)
between HSU and LAN/Stack port of the HBS.
Blocked=0 (bit) Opened=1 (bit). Only 2 bits are
used.
winlink1000HbsBridgeFloodOverloadProtect 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.2.4 Integer RW Flood overload protection 1- Enabled 2- Disabled.
winlink1000HbsServiceCommandStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.1 DisplayString RW Ability to perform special command in the HBS.
Format (string): Operation Index Session Param1
Param2 ....| ParamN The index and SessionID can
be uniting to one parameter. On registered HSU it
is HSU-ID and on Unregistered it is Session-ID.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000HbsServiceVlanTable N/A Holds the Vlan operations towards all the registered
HSUs.
winlink1000HbsServiceVlanEntry N/A HBS service Vlan table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsServiceVlanIndex }
winlink1000HbsServiceVlanIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.1 Integer RO HBS service Vlan table index.
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblTag 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.2 Integer RW The VID to be used when adding TAG or adding
Provider
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblPri 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.3 Integer RW The Vlan priority 0-7 to be used when adding TAG
or adding Provider
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblMajorMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.4 Integer RW The Vlan major mode
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgressMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.5 Integer RW The Vlan mode in the Egress direction
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblIngressMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.6 Integer RW The Vlan mode in the Ingress direction
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblEgressFilter1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.7 Integer RW VLAN Filter1 VID
winlink1000OduServiceVlanTblUntagFilteredBit
map
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.2.1.1.11 Integer RW Represents (in bitmap) if to Untag a frame after it is
filtered (Egress direction) [4 bits represent 4 filters].
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.1 Integer RW Quality of Service mode.
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSVlanQGroupsStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.2 DisplayString RW Frame classification according to VLAN priority (all
4 groups separated by comma).
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSDiffservQGroupsStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.3 DisplayString RW Frame classification according to Diffserv (all 4
groups separated by comma).
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSMaxRtQuePct 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.4 Integer RO Maximal percent for RT and NRT queues.
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSTable N/A Holds the QoS operations towards all the registered
HSUs.
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSEntry N/A HBS service QoS table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSIndex }
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.1 Integer RO HBS service QoS table index.
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSConfAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.2 Integer RW QoS administrative state. The valid values are:
enabled (1) disabled (2).
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSConfUpQueMir 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.3 DisplayString RW Private MIR for each QoS group of the Uplink
direction (4 values separated by comma).
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSConfUpQueWeight 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.4 DisplayString RW Weight in percent for each QoS group of the Uplink
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSConfDownQueMir 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.5 DisplayString RW Private MIR for each QoS group of the Downlink
winlink1000HbsServiceQoSConfDownQueWeig
ht
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.3.5.1.6 DisplayString RW Weight in percent for each QoS group of the
Downlink direction (4 values separated by comma).
winlink1000HbsServiceMobilitySupported 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.4 Integer RO Mobility Support (1 = Not supported 2 = Supported)
winlink1000HbsServiceMaxNumOfHSUs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.3.5 Integer RO Holds the maximum number of registered HSUs in
the HBS.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshTable N/A Holds the performance monitor thresholds towards
all the registered HSUs.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshEntry N/A HBS performance monitor threshold table entry.
INDEX { winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshIndex }
winlink1000HbsPerfMonThreshIndex RO HBS performance monitor threshold table index.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonTxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.2 Integer RW HBS performance monitor transmit power
threshold.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.3 Integer RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold
1.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonRxThresh2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.4 Integer RW HBS performance monitor receive power threshold
2.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.5 Integer RW HBS performance monitor BBER threshold.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonEstThroughputThreshK
bps
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.6 Integer RW HBS performance monitor estimated throughput
Threshold.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonHighTrafficThreshKbps 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.1.1.7 Integer RW HBS performance monitor high traffic threshold.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the current 15 min interval.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrRxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.2.1.1 Gauge RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present
15 minutes period. (Represents the LAN traffic RX
direction toward the HSU)
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrTxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.2.1.2 Gauge RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the
present 15 minutes period. (Represents the LAN
traffic TX direction from the HSU)
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrEthCapacity
ThreshUnder
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.2.1.3 Gauge RO The number of times throughput was below
Relevant for point to point systems.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrHighTrafficT
hreshExceed
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.2.1.4 Gauge RO The number of times actual traffic was above
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenCurrActiveSeco
nds
1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.3.4.2.1.5 Gauge RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
swervice was not blocked in the present 15 minutes
period.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalIdx
}
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalRxMByte
s
RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval. (Represents
the LAN traffic RX direction toward the HSU).
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalTxMByte
s
RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval.
(Represents the LAN traffic TX direction from the
HSU)
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalEthCapa
cityThreshUnder
threshold in the each interval. Relevant for point to
point systems.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalHighTraff
icThreshExceed
threshold in the each interval.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenIntervalActiveSe
conds
service was not blocked in the each interval.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayIdx }
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each interval
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day. (Represents the
LAN traffic RX direction toward the HSU)
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day.
(Represents the LAN traffic TX direction from the
HSU)
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayEthCapacity
ThreshUnder
threshold each day. Relevant for point to point
systems.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayHighTrafficT
hreshExceed
threshold each day.
winlink1000HbsPerfMonAirGenDayActiveSecon
ds
service was not blocked each day.
winlink1000HsuAirState RO Holds the state of the HSU.
winlink1000HsuAirLinkState RO Holds the state of the HSU link.
winlink1000HsuAirHsuId RO Holds the HSU ID as sent by the HBS.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
MI B Tr aps Appendi x C
MIB Traps
General
Each ODU can be configured wit h up t o 10 different t rap dest inat ions. When t he link is oper-
at ional, each ODU sends t raps originat ing from bot h Sit e A and Sit e B.
winlink1000HsuAirLocalDeregister RW Performs Local HSU Deregistration when - only
when the link is off.
winlink1000HsuAirRemoteCompressedMon RO Holds all the configuration data of The HBS in
compressed format. Fields Included: Rss (1
byte) Rss Balance (1 byte) Est. Tput (4
bytes) In Bytes of the whole sector (4 bytes)
Out Bytes of the whole sector (4 bytes) In
Frames of the whole sector (4 bytes) Out
Frames of the whole sector (4 bytes) Max
Throughput DownLink (4 bytes) Max Throughput
UpLink (4 bytes) Rx Rate In Kbps of the whole
sector (4 bytes) Tx Rate In Kbps of the whole
sector (4 bytes) Rx Rate In Fps of the whole sector
(4 bytes) Tx Rate In Fps of the whole sector (4
bytes)
winlink1000HsuAirRemoteCompressedStatic RO Holds all the configuration data of the HBS in a
compressed format. Helps the NMS to get info
regarding new Unregistered links. Fields Included:
Location (32 bytes) IP address (8 bytes in 4458)
Subnet mask (8 bytes in 4458) HBS Antenna
type (1 byte) HBS Agent Version (4 bytes)
winlink1000HsuAirRssThreshSync RW HSUs will be synchronized immediately if RSS is
better than threshold.
winlink1000HsuServiceCommandStr RW Ability to perform special command in the HSU.
Format (string): Operation Param1 Param2 ....|
ParamN.
winlink1000HsuServiceHsuType RW HSU type (1 = Fixed 2 = Stationary 3 = Mobile)
winlink1000HsuServiceHsuLevel RW HSU level (1 .. 4)
winlink1000HsuEthernetPoESupported RO
winlink1000HsuEthernetPoETemperature RO Holds the temperature (Celsius) of the POE
component.
winlink1000HsuEthernetPoEEquConsumption RO Holds the consumption of the connected equipment
(milliampere).
winlink1000HsuEthernetPoEEquVoltage RO Holds the voltage of the connected equipment
(Volt).
winlink1000GeneralTrapDescription 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 DisplayString RO Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters.
winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 Integer RO Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters.
winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided with
the product used for saving user preferences
affecting ODU operation.
winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset
and is incremented upon each element constant
write operation via SNMP or Telnet.
winlink1000GeneralTelnetSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.5 Integer RW Enable/Disable Telnet protocol.
winlink1000GeneralWISupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.6 Integer RW Enable/Disable Web Interface protocol.
Mandatory Disabled - No option to enable the
feature. Mandatory Enabled - No option to
disable the feature.
Name OID Type
A
c
c
e
s
s
Description
Gener al Appendi x C
The source I P address of t he t rap is t he sending ODU. The t rap originat or can be ident ified by
t he t rap Community st ring or by t he t rap descript ion t ext .
Each t rap cont ains a t rap descript ion and addit ional relevant informat ion such as alarm sever-
ity, int erface index, t ime st amp and addit ional paramet ers.
Tr ap Par amet er s Appendi x C
Trap Parameters
Table C-3: MI B Traps (Sheet 1 of 6)
Name ID Severity Description
trunkStateChanged 1 normal Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks. Raised by both
sides of the link. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: TDM Interface
%n - %x 2 - %n: Is the trunk number 3 - %x: Is the alarm type and can
be one of the following: Normal AIS LOS Loopback
linkUp 2 normal Indicates that the radio link is up. Contains a single parameter which is
its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Sync on channel %n GHz.
%n Is the channel frequency in GHz.
linkDown 3 critical Indicates that the radio link is down. Contains a single parameter which
is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Out of Sync. The reason
is: %s. %s Is the reason.
detectIDU 4 normal Indicates that the IDU was detected. Raised by both sides of the link.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
IDU of Type %s was Detected. %s Is the type of the IDU.
disconnectIDU 5 major Indicates that the IDU was disconnected. Raised by both sides of the
link. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: IDU Disconnected.
mismatchIDU 6 major Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs. Raised by the master only.
IDUs Mismatch: One Side is %s and the Other is %s. %s Is the type of
the IDU.
openedServices 7 normal Indicates that services were opened. Raised by the master only.
Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: %n2 out of %n1 Requested
TDM Trunks have been Opened 2 - %n1: Is the requested number of
TDM truncks 3 - %n2: Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were
opened
closedServices 8 normal Indicates that services were closed. Raised by the master only.
TDM Service has been closed. The reason is: %s. %s Is the reason.
incompatibleODUs 9 critical Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible ODUs.
incompatibleIDUs 10 major Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible IDUs.
incompatibleOduIdu 11 major Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: The IDU could not be
loaded. The reason is: %s. %s Is the incompatibility type.
probingChannel 12 normal Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Monitoring for radar
activity on channel %n GHz. %n is the channel frequency in GHz.
radarDetected 13 normal Indicates that radar activity was detected. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Radar activity was detected in
%s on channel %n GHz. %s Is the site name. %n Is the channel
frequency in GHz.
transmittingOnChannel 14 normal Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Transmitting on
channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz.
scanningChannels 15 normal Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Channel scanning in
progress.
incompatiblePartner 16 critical Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link
installation is required in order to fix it. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Configuration problem detected.
Link installation required.
timeClockSet 17 normal Indicates that the ODU time clock was set. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: The time was set to: %p. %p Is
the date and time.
configurationChanged 18 normal Indicates that the ODU recovered from an error but there are
configuration changes. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description:
Configuration changed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number.
hssOpStateChangedToINU 19 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to INU type.
HSS operating state was changed to: INU.
hssOpStateChangedToHSM 20 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSM type.
HSS operating state was changed to: HSM.
hssOpStateChangedToHSC 21 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSC type.
HSS operating state was changed to: HSC_DT/HSC_CT.
vlanModeActive 22 normal Indicates to non-VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support
only VLAN tag on management interface. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: VLAN Mode is active. Non-VLAN
traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes.
spectrumAnalysis 23 normal Indicates that the ODU is in Spectrum Analysis mode. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Spectrum analysis in
progress.
hbsHsuDeregisteredOffline 24 normal
Indicates that a HSU was deregistered offline (out of link)
hbsHsuDeregisteredSuccessfully 25 normal
Indicates that a HSU was deregistered successfully
hbsHsuRegisteredSuccessfully 26 normal
Indicates that a HSU was registered successfully
hbsHsuRegistrationFailed 27 normal Indicates that registration has failed
hbsHsuViolatedState 28 normal
Indicates (on the HBS side) that a HSU is is violated state
hsuViolatedState 29 normal
Indicates (on the HSU side) that the HSU is is violated state
hbsUnregisteredSynchronizedHsu 30 normal
Indicates an unregistered HSU has been synchronized.
hbsUnregisteredUnsynchronizedHsu 31 normal
Indicates an unregistered HSU lost synchronization.
cableQuality 32 normal 1Gbps rate is not supported due to bad line quality.
httpAuthentication 33 normal HTTP Authentication Failure.
telnetAuthentication 34 normal Telnet Authentication Failure.
tdmServiceAlarm 100 major Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Alarm.
ethServiceClosed 101 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service is closed.
ethServiceNotPermitted 102 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: A valid IDU could not
be detected at %s. Please check your configuration. %s - Is the Local
Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link.
encryptionAlarm 103 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Failed. No
Services are available.
changeLinkPasswordAlarm 104 major Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link
Password. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Failed to change the Link Password at/on: %s. %s - Is the
Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link.
externalAlarmInPort1Alarm 105 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of
port #1. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm.
bitFailedAlarm 107 major The trap is sent if there is no way to recover from the situation.Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: ODU power up built in test failed. Error
code is: %n 2 - %n number
wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm 108 major The trap is sent if there is a way to recover from the situation.Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: Wrong configuration loaded. Error code
is: %n 2 - %n number
lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm 109 major Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 1
status changed to disconnected.
lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm 110 major Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 2
mngPortDisconnectedAlarm 111 major Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected.Contains
a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Management
port status changed to disconnected.
swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with full link functionality.
Software versions mismatch - full link functionality
swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm 115 minor The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality.
Software versions mismatch - restricted link functionality
swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgradeRequired 116 major The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required.
Software versions mismatch - Software upgrade required
swVersionsIncompatible 117 critical The trap is sent if SW versions are incompatible. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SW Versions
incompatible
hssMultipleSourcesDetectedAlarm 118 major Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources were detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS multiple
sync sources were detected.
hssSyncToProperSourceStoppedAlarm 119 major Indicates that synchronization to a proper sync pulse source was
stopped. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: HSS sync pulse - Down. The reason is: %s. %s - Is the
reason for the sync down.
hssSyncPulseDetectedAlarm 120 major Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse was detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS additional
sync pulse was detected.
tdmBackupAlarm 121 major Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM backup alarm -
backup link was activated.
linkLockUnauthorizedRemoteODU 122 major Indicates that the remote ODU is unauthorized. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Unauthorized remote
ODU connection rejected.
linkLockUnauthorizedODU 123 major Indicates that the ODU is unauthorized. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Unauthorized ODU connection
rejected.
hotStandbyAlarm 124 major Indicates that the hot standby secondary link was activated. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Secondary
Link Is Active.
sfpInsertion 126 normal Indicates that a device was inserted to SFP Port
sfpPort1DisconnectedAlarm 127 major Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SFP port 1
ringRplStateActiveAlarm 128 major RPL state changed to Active.
desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedAlarm 129 normal Indicates Desired UL/DL RAtio Can Not Be Applied.
cbwMismatch 130 major Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth mismatch was detected.Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: Channel Bandwidth Mismatch: one side is
%n0 MHz and the other is %n1 MHz. %n0 is the local Channel
Bandwidth value in MHz. %n1 is the remoet Channel Bandwidth value in
MHz.
gpsNotSynchronized 131 major Indicates that the GPS is not synchronized with satellites. Pulses are
self generated.
pdTooHighDueCbwLimitations 132 major Indicates that link cannot be established because link range is too large
for channel bandwidth.
hbsEncryptionAlarm 133 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter
which is its description including the HSU's name
hbsEhServiceClosedToHsu 134 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter
which is its description including the HSU's name
hbsUnsynchronizedHsuAlarm 135 warning
Indicates a registered HSU lost synchronization.
hbsInactiveHbsAlarm 136 major Indicates HBS is InActive.
incompatibleHsu 137 critical
Indicates that the HSU is not compatible to HBS. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible ODUs.
hsuUnsupportedBeacon 138 warning
Indicates an unsupported beacon has arrived at HSU
tdmServiceClear 200 major Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Normal.
ethServiceOpened 201 normal Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service has
been opened.
encryptionClear 203 normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its
description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Normal.
changeLinkPasswordClear 204 normal Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Password
has been changed at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote
Site name or both sides of the Link.
externalAlarmInPort1Clear 205 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 1 is
cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared.
lanPort1Clear 209 normal Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to connected -
%s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
lanPort2Clear 210 normal Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex).
mngPortClear 211 normal Indicates the management port status changed to connected. Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: Management port status changed to
connected - %s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear 214 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible
swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and link functionality is not
restricted. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible
swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful.
Software Versions compatible
swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal The trap is sent if SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible
hssMultipleSourcesDisappearedClear 218 normal Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources disappeared. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS multiple
sync pulse sources disappeared.
hssSyncToProperSourceAchievedClear 219 normal Indicates that synchronization to a proper Sync source was achieved.
HSS sync pulse - Up.
hssSyncPulseDisappearedClear 220 normal Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse disappeared. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS additional sync
pulse was disappeared.
tdmBackupClear 221 normal Indicates that the TDM main link was activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM main link was
activated.
linkLockAuthorizedRemoteODU 222 normal Indicates that the remote ODU is authorized. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Authorized remote
ODU connection accepted.
linkLockAuthorizedODU 223 normal Indicates that the ODU is authorized. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Authorized ODU connection
permitted.
linkAuthenticationDisabled 224 normal Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Authentication has been
disabled.
hotStandbyClear 225 normal Indicates that the Primary Link Was Activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Primary Link Is
Active.
sfpExtraction 226 normal Indicates that a device was extracted from SFP Port
sfpPort1Clear 227 normal Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: SFP port 1 status changed to connected -
%s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
compatibleIdus 228 normal Indicates that the ODU has identified compatible Idus on both sides of the
link.
desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedClear 229 normal Indicates Current UL/DL Ratio Is Equal To Desired Ratio.
cbwMatch 230 normal Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth match was detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Channel Bandwidth value
in MHz.
switchCbwAndChannel 231 normal Indicates that the system is switching Channel Bandwidth and channel
frequency. Contains two parameters: 1 - Switching to Channel
Bandwith %n0 MHz and to channel %n1 GHz.
ringRplStateIdle 232 normal RPL state changed to Idle.
ringEthServiceStatus 233 normal Indicates Ethernet service's state - blocked \ unblocked. Contains a
single parameter: 1 - Description: Ethernet's state (blocked \ unblocked)
ringFirstRpmReceived 234 normal Ring application: in non-RPL link indicates first from a specific RPL was
received. Contains a single parameter: 1 - Description: RPM's VLAN ID
ringEthernetSrviceUnblockedTO 235 normal Ring application: in non-RPL link Ethernet service is unblocked due to
RPM timeout.
gpsSynchronized 236 normal Indicates that the GPS is synchronized with satellites.
hbsEncryptionClear 237 normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its
description including the HSU's name
hbsEhServiceOpenedToHsu 238 normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its
description including the HSU's name
hbsSynchronizedHsuAlarm 239 normal
Indicates a registered HSU is synchronized.
hbsActiveHbs 240 normal Indicates when HBS has been activated.
RADWI N Manager Traps Appendi x C
RADWIN Manager Traps
The RADWI N Manager applicat ion issues t raps t o indicat e various event s. These t raps are
shown in t he RADWI N Managerr Event s Log.
A list of Trap Messages as displayed by t he RADWI N Manager is shown in Tabl e 9-4.
switchCBW 241 normal Switching Channel Bandwidth.
changeRatio 242 normal HBS Tx ratio has changed.
lanPortClear 243 normal Indicates the LAN port status changed to connected.
Contains two parameters:
1 - Description: LAN port status changed to connected - %s
2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
poePortClear 244 normal Indicates the POE port status changed to connected.
1 - Description: POE port status changed to connected - %s
poePowerConsumptionClear 245 normal Indicates the POE power consumption is valid.
1 - Description: POE consumption within limits. port is opened.
incompatibleHbsHsu 246 normal Incompatible HBS/HSU software versions - no service.
mobilityLinkOff 247 normal Mobility - Link cannot be established due to:
1 - The HBS does not support Mobility
2 - Lack of resources in the HBS for HSU level
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 D-1
Appendix D
RF Exposure
The ant ennas used for t he following t ransmit t ers must be inst alled so as t o provide a mini-
mum separat ion dist ance from byst anders as specified in t he following t ables:
Table D-1: Safet y Dist ances for RADWI N 5000 HPMP FCC and I C Product s
Fr equency
Band [ GHz]
FCC I D I C I D
Ant enna
gai n [ dBi ]
Mi n. Saf et y
Di st ance [ cm]
5.8 Q3KRW2058 5100A-RW2054 28 223
5.8 Q3KRW2058 5100A-RW2054 24 141
5.8 Q3KRW2058 5100A-RW2054 17 63
5.3/ 5.4 Q3KRW2054 5100A-RW2054 23.5 / 28 20
4.9 Q3KRW2049 5100A-RW2054 28 225
4.9 Q3KRW2049 5100A-RW2054 21 113
4.9 Q3KRW2049 5100A-RW2054 15 57
2.4 Q3KRW2024 5100A-RW2054 19 39
2.4 Q3KRW2024I 5100A-RW2024I 17.5 40
3.5 N/ A 5100A-RW2030 25 92
3.6/ 3.7 Q3KRW2030 5100A-RW2030 25 86
Table D-2: Safet y Dist ances for RADWI N 5000 HPMP ETSI Product s
Fr equency
Band [ GHz]
Ant enna
gai n [ dBi ]
Mi n. Saf et y
Di st ance [ cm]
5.8 24 / 28 20
5.4 23.5 / 28 20
5.3 23.5 / 28 20
2.4 19 / 17.5 20
3.5 25 200
RF Exposur e Appendi x D
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 D-2
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 E-1
Appendix E
Setting Antenna
Parameters
Antenna Issues
The choice of Tx Power, ant enna gain and cable loss (bet ween t he radio and t he ant enna)
det ermines t he EI RP and is affect ed by such considerat ions as radio limit at ions and regulat ory
rest rict ions.
Before proceeding t o ant enna inst allat ion det ails, t he following background informat ion
should be considered:
About Single and Dual Antennas
Each RADWI N 5000 HPMP ODU is made of t wo radio t ransceivers (radios). The radios make
use of algorit hms t hat ut ilize bot h MI MO and Diversit y result ing in enhanced capacity, range
and link availability. The number of ant ennas (i.e. radios) used is det ermined by user configu-
rat ion and by aut omat ic syst em decisions, explained below.
Dual Antennas at the HBS and an HSU
When using dual ant ennas at bot h sit es (single bipolar ant enna or t wo mo-unipolar ant ennas)
you can choose bet ween MI MO Mode and Diversit y Mode.
MIMO Mode
Wit h MI MO t he syst em doubles t he link capacity. At t he same t ime, it keeps t he same rat e
and modulat ion per radio as was used wit h single ant enna, t hus increasing capacity, range
and availability.
For example wit h a dual ant enna RADWI N 5000 HPMP can t ransmit at modulat ion of 64QAM
and FEC of 5/ 6 and get an air rat e of 130 Mbps, compared t o 65 Mbps wit h single ant enna.
To work in t his mode, each ant enna port must be connect ed t o an ant enna, t he RSS level in
bot h receivers should be balanced and a minimal separat ion bet ween t he ant ennas must be
maint ained. (For example, by using dual polarizat ion ant ennas a cross polarizat ion separat ion
is at t ained).
Si ngl e Ant ennas at Bot h Si t es Appendi x E
Upon select ing Ant enna Type as Dual, RADWI N 5000 HPMP aut omat ically select s MI MO mode
and doubles t he air rat es.
RADWI N Manager indicat es a case of unbalanced RSS bet ween t he t wo ant ennas in t he HBS
panels.
Diversity Mode
Diversit y Mode uses t wo ant ennas t o improve t he qualit y and reliabilit y of t he link. Oft en,
t here is not a clear line-of-sight (LOS) bet ween t ransmit t er and receiver. I nst ead t he signal is
reflect ed along mult iple pat hs before if-ally being received.
Each such bounce can int roduce phase shift s, t ime delays, att enuat ions, and even dist or-
t ions t hat can dest ruct ively int erfere wit h one anot her at t he apert ure of t he receiving
ant enna. Ant enna diversity is especially effect ive at mit igat ing t hese mult i-pat h sit uat ions.
This is because mult iple ant ennas afford a receiver several recordings of t he same signal.
Each ant enna will be exposed t o a different int erference envy-remnant . Thus, if one ant enna
is undergoing a deep fade, it is likely t hat anot her has a sufficient signal. Collect ively such a
syst em can provide a robust link.
Ant enna diversity requires ant enna separat ion which is possible by using a dual-polarizat ion
ant enna or by t wo spat ially separat ed ant ennas.
Use Diversity inst ead of MI MO in t he following sit uat ions:
When t he syst em cannot operat e in MI MO Mode
When one of t he receivers has high int erference compared t o t he second receiver (i.e.
t he syst em is unbalanced )
When you achieve higher capacit y in Diversit y Mode t han in MI MO Mode
When high robust ness is of import ance and t he capacit y of Diversity Mode is sufficient
(up t o 25 Mbps full duplex)
Single Antennas at Both Sites
By select ing a single ant enna at t he HBS and HSU, t he ODUs operat e wit h a single radio t hat
is connect ed t o t he ANT 1 connect or. The second radio is aut omat ically shut down.
Single at One Site, Dual Antennas at the Other
I n t his mode one of t he sit es uses t he ODU wit h a single ant enna while t he ot her sit e uses t he
ODU wit h a dual ant enna.
The advant ages in t his mode in comparison t o using a single ant enna in bot h sit es are dou-
bled t ot al Tx Power and addit ional polarizat ion and/ or space diversit y (depending on t he
polarizat ion of inst alled ant ennas).
The air rat es used in t his mode are same as when using single ant ennas in bot h sit es.
Consi der at i ons f or Changi ng Ant enna Par amet er s Appendi x E
Tabl e E-1 summarizes t he sit uat ion:
Sit e A and B may be HBS or HSU.
The rat es used by RADWI N 5000 HPMP are shown in Tabl e E-2 below:
Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters
Let :
max Avai l abl e Tx Power denot e t he maximum Tx Power pract ically available from an ODU.
(I t appears as Tx Power per Radi o.)
Table E-1: MI MO - Diversity set t ings
Number of
Ant ennas
Mode
Max Ful l
Dupl ex
Capaci t y
Si t e A Si t e B
2 2
MI MO 50 Mbps
Diversit y 25 Mbps
2 1 25 Mbps
1 2 25 Mbps
1 1 25 Mbps
Table E-2: RADWI N 5000 HPMP Air rat es
Ant enna Modul at i on FEC
Ai r- Rat e
[ Mbps]
Single BPSK 1/ 2 6.5
Single QPSK 1/ 2 13
Single QPSK 3/ 4 19.5
Single 16QAM 1/ 2 26
Single 64QAM 3/ 4 58.5
Dual BPSK 1/ 2 13
Dual QPSK 1/ 2 26
Dual QPSK 3/ 4 39
Dual 16QAM 1/ 2 52
Dual 16QAM 3/ 4 78
Dual 64QAM 2/ 3 104
Dual 64QAM 3/ 4 117
Dual 64QAM 5/ 6 130
Consi der at i ons f or Changi ng Ant enna Par amet er s Appendi x E
maxRegEI RP denot e t he maximum EI RP available by regulat ion. I t will be det ermined by
t hree fact ors:
per band/ regulat ion
per channel bandwidt h
ant enna gain
maxRegTxPower denot e t he maximum regulat ory Tx Power for t he equipment , also having
regard t he above t hree point s.
Then, t he following relat ionship must be sat isfied:
... ( * )
The Tx Power ( per radio) indicat es t he power of each radio inside t he ODU and is used for
Link Budget Calculat ions. The Tx Power ( Syst em) shows t he t ot al t ransmission power of t he
ODU and is used t o calculat e t he EI RP according t o regulat ions.
The inequalit y ( * ) above is always sat isf ied by t he syst em in accordance wit h t he relevant
regulat ion.
The precise relat ionship bet ween t he it ems in inequality ( * ) is as follows:
Required Tx Power ( per radio) will be adj ust ed down t o t he lesser of t he value ent ered
and maxAvai l abl eTxPower
Tx Power (syst em) is maxAvai l abl eTxPower + 3 ( for 2 radios)
Max EI RP is maxRegEI RP.
EI RP is maxAvai l abl eTx Power + Ant enna Gai n - Cabl e Loss
Not es
To see t he relat ionship bet ween Tx Power (radio) and Tx Power
(syst em), not e t hat so t hat if you
double t he power in milliWatt s (for t wo radios) t hen dBm will
increase by .
The Max EI RP level will be aut omat ically set according t o t he
select ed band and regulat ion.
The EI RP level is t he sum of t he Syst em Tx Power and t he Ant enna
Gain minus t he Cable Loss.
The Max EI RP level will be aut omat ically set according t o t he
select ed band and regulat ion.
The EI RP level is t he sum of t he Syst em Tx Power and t he Ant enna
Gain minus t he Cable Loss.
maxAvailableTxPower min maxRegEIRP
AntennaGain CableLoss maxRegTxPower . +
(
)
s
dBm 10 milliWatt
10
log =
10 2 3 ~
10
log
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 F-1
Appendix F
Regional Notice: French
Canadian
Procdures de scurit
Gnralits
Avant de manipuler du mat riel connect des lignes lect riques ou de t lcommunicat ions,
il est conseill de se dfaire de bij oux ou de t out aut re obj et mt allique qui pourrait ent rer en
cont act avec les lment s sous t ension.
Mise la terre
Tous les produit s RADWI N doivent t re mis la t erre pendant l'usage courant . La mise la
t erre est assure en reliant la fiche d'aliment at ion une prise de courant avec une prot ect ion
de t erre. En out re:
La cosse de masse sur l'I DU-C doit t re const amment connect e la prot ect ion de
t erre, par un cble de diamt re de 18 AWG ou plus. Le mat riel mont sur rack doit
t re inst all seulement sur des racks ou armoires relis la t erre
Une ODU doit mise la t erre par un cble de diamt re de 10 AWG ou plus
I l ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'int errupt eurs sur la connect ion la t erre
De plus:
I l faut t ouj ours connect er la t erre en premier et la dconnect er en dernier
I l ne faut j amais connect er les cbles de t lcommunicat ion du mat riel non la
t erre
I l faut s'assurer que t ous les aut res cbles sont dconnect s avant de dconnect er la
t erre
Protection contre la foudre
L'ut ilisat ion de disposit ifs de prot ect ion cont re la foudre dpend des exigences rglement aires
et de l'ut ilisat eur final. Tout es les unit s ext rieures RADWI N sont conues avec des circuit s
de limit at ion de surt ension afin de minimiser les risques de dommages dus la foudre. RAD-
Pr caut i ons de scur i t pendant l e mont age de ODU Appendi x F
WI N conseille l'ut ilisat ion d'un disposit if de parafoudre supplment aire afin de prot ger le
mat riel de coups de foudre proches.
Mat r i el suppl ment ai r e r equi s
L'quipement requis pour l'inst allat ion du mat riel est le suivant :
Pince sert ir RJ-45 (si un cble pr-assembl ODU/ I DU n'est pas ut ilis)
Perceuse (pour le mont age sur mur seulement )
Cbles de t erre I DU et ODU
Clef 13 mm ()
Cble ODU - I DU si non command (type ext rieur, CAT-5e, 4 paires t orsades, 24
AWG)
Colliers de serrage
Ordinat eur port able avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP.
Prcautions de scurit pendant le montage de ODU
Avant de connect er un cble l'ODU, la borne prot ect rice de masse (visse) de l'ODU doit t re
connect e un conduct eur ext erne prot ect eur ou un pylne reli la t erre. I l ne doit pas y
avoir de fusibles ou d'int errupt eurs sur la connect ion la t erre.
Seulement un personnel qualifi ut ilisant l'quipement de scurit appropri doit pouvoir
mont er sur le pylne d'ant enne. De mme, l'inst allat ion ou le dmont age de ODU ou de
pylnes doit t re effect ue seulement par des professionnels ayant suivi une format ion.
Pour mont er l ' ODU:
1. Vrifier que les support s de fixat ion de l'ODU sont correct ement mis la t erre.
2. Mont er l'unit ODU sur le pylne ou sur le mur; se rfrer la I nst al l at i on sur
pyl ne et mur au dessous.
3. Connect er la cble de t erre au point de chssis sur l'ODU.
4. Relier le cble ODU-I DU au connect eur ODU RJ-45.
5. Visser les presses-t oupe de cbles pour assurer le scellement hermt ique des unit s
ODU.
6. At t acher le cble au pylne ou aux support s en ut ilisant des colliers classs UV.
7. Rpt er la procdure sur le sit e dist ant .
Connecter la terre IDU-C
Connect er un cble de t erre de 18 AWG la borne de masse de l'appareil. L'appareil doit t re
const amment connect la t erre.
Installation sur pylne et mur
L' ODU ou l'O-PoE peuvent t re mont s sur un pylne ou un mur.
Prudence
Ne pas se placer en face d'une ODU sous t ension.
Cont enu du ki t de mont age ODU Appendi x F
Contenu du kit de montage ODU
Le kit de mont age ODU comprend les pices suivant es:
une grande clame (voir Fi gur e F-1)
une pet it e clame (voir Fi gure F-2)
un bras (voir Fi gur e F-3)
quat re visses hex t t e M8x40
deux visses hex t t e M8x70
quat re rondelles plat es M8
t rois rondelles last iques M8
deux crous M8.
Montage sur un pylne
Prudence
Les appareils sont prvus pour t re inst alls par un personnel de service.
Les appareils doivent t re connect s une prise de courant avec une prot ect ion de t erre.
Le courant CC du I DU-C doit t re fourni par l'int ermdiaire d'un disj onct eur bipolaire et le
diamt re du cble doit t re de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm.
Figure F-1: grande clame Figure F-2: pet it e clame Figure F-3: bras
Mont age sur un pyl ne Appendi x F
Figure F-4: Mont age sur un pylne
Mont age sur un mur Appendi x F
Montage sur un mur
Figure F-5: Mont age sur un mur
Mont age d' une ant enne ext er ne Appendi x F
Montage d'une antenne externe
L'ant enne ext erne opt ionnelle peut t re mont e sur un pylne.
Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe
Le kit de mont age d'une ant enne ext erne comprend les pices suivant es
Douze rondelles plat es
Huit rondelles last iques
Huit crous hex
Quat re boulons
Un support en U
Un support pivot ement
Deux courroies de fixat ion en mt al
Pour i nst al l er une ant enne ext er ne sur un pyl ne:
1. At t acher le support en U l'arrire de l'ant enne en ut ilisant quat re rondelles plat es,
quat re rondelles last iques et quat re crous hex.
2. At t acher le support pivot ement au support en U en ut ilisant huit rondelles plat es,
quat re rondelles last iques, quat re crous hex et quat re boulons.
3. Passer les deux courroies de fixat ion par les fent es vert icales dans le support pivot-
ement .
4. At t acher l'ant enne au pylne en ut ilisant les deux courroies de fixat ion .
Aj ust er l'inclinaison ncessaire en ut ilisant l'chelle angulaire et serrer t ous les boulons et
crous la posit ion requise.
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release 3.3.00 I ndex 1
A
air int erface 6-3, 7-4
alarms
act ive 9-15
ant enna
charact erist ics A-9
considerat ions for changing paramet ers E-3
dual at t he HBS and an HSU E-1
ext ernal, mount ing 3-14, 17-5
grounding 18-1
issues E-1
set t ing paramet ers E-1
single and dual E-1
single at bot h sit es E-2
single at one sit e, dual at t he ot her E-2
Tx and 6-4
availabilit y
Link Budget 19-2
B
Base St at ion Panel 4-17
C
Communit y St rings C-2
Configurat ion Menu But t ons 6-1, 6-21, 7-3
configuring
False Radar Mit igat ion 14-2
GSU 11-5
Cust omer Support 9-16
D
dat e and t ime, set t ing 6-14
DC PoE B-2
DC Power Terminals B-2
Device Regist rat ion FCC 5.4GHz 15-1
DFS
about 14-1
regist ering t he device 15-1
TDWR Table 15-5
Diagnost ic Aids, ot her 9-16
Display View Persist ence 4-12
E
Et hernet , service configurat ion 6-16
event s 4-32
recent 9-7
Web I nt erface 21-12
F
configuring 14-2
described 14-1
DFS 14-1
facilit ies 14-1
FCC/ I C Considerat ions 14-3
Fast Et hernet CAT-5e cable repeat er, Technical
specificat ions A-8
FCC 5.4GHz Device Regist rat ion 15-1
G
GbE PoE, indoor, for HBS only, AC A-4
grounding
for ant enna cable 18-1
ODU 18-2
PoE 18-2
GSU A-6
cascaded sit es using Shift ed Phase Transmis-
sion 11-3
configuring 11-5
described 11-1, 11-1
funct ionalit y 11-4
independent dist ribut ed sit es 11-1
kit cont ent s 11-4
monit oring and diagnost ics 11-15
mount ing 11-5
mult iple dist ribut ed sit es wit h communicat ion
11-2
overview 11-4
preferences 11-15
preparing for use 11-5
redundancy 11-3
scenarios 11-1
soft ware upgrade 11-16
Telnet support 11-15
Index
RADWI N 5000 HPMP User Manual Release3.3.00 I ndex 2
using 11-1
H
HBS
aligning HSUs t o 3-20
configuring 6-1
deact ivat ing 5-31
diagnosics 9-9
Event s Log 4-18
Main But t on Menu 4-16
Manager Main Window 4-16
managing over t he air from an HSU 13-5
package cont ent s 3-2
Preparing 8-3
running Spect rum View from 20-6
saving set t ings as t emplat e 5-33
set t ing up for QoS 16-2
t emplat e, creat ing nomadic ent ries for a sec-
t or 5-33
unit connect ion pinout B-1
HSS
and RFP 10-7
and sect or configurat ion 10-8
connect ing an HSS unit 10-3
hardware inst allat ion 10-3
t o ODU unit connect ion pinout 10-6
using a single unit 10-4
using more t han one HSS Unit 10-4
HSU
aligning t o HBS 3-20
configuring 7-1
Configuring a fixed HSU From t he HBS 5-16
configuring from HBS 6-21
Connect ion Table 6-20
deregist ering 5-32
diagnost ics 9-11
direct configurat ion 7-1
downgrading soft ware 12-5
Event s Log 4-30
Link Performance 4-30
Link St at us 4-29
lost 5-33
Main But t on Menu 4-29
Nomadic, configuring from HBS 5-21
regist ering
fixed 5-23
nomadic 5-27
Regist ering mobile 8-6
Replacing 6-32
running Spect rum View from 20-8
set t ing up for QoS 16-3
small form fact or 1-4, 3-5
mount ing 17-4
Suspending 6-34
unit connect ion pinout B-1
updat ing services 6-34
Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion - see HSS
Hub Sit e Synchronizat ion (HSS) Unit 3-10
I
I DU-H
Aggregat ion Unit 3-7
specificat ions A-4
I ncorrect I P Address 4-8
I ncorrect Password 4-8
I nt ernal ESD Prot ect ion circuit s 18-7
I nvalid Read/ Writ e Communit y St ring 4-9
L
LAN Port B-2
LBC
ant enna, height 19-3
calculat ions 19-2
EI RP 19-2
Expect ed RSS and Fade Margin 19-2
Fresnel Zone 19-3
int ernal dat a 19-1
Min and Max Range 19-2
Overview 19-1, 19-1
running 19-5
service 19-2
user input 19-1
light ning prot ect ion
mount ing unit for 18-6
light ning prot ect ion devices
mount ing 3-14
Light ning Prot ect or
Technical specificat ions A-7
Link Budget Calculat or, see LBC
Link Budget , availabilit y 19-2
Link Compat ibilit y 9-4
list view 4-11
logging on
t o t he Web I nt erface 21-5
Logging on t o a HSU 4-27
Log-on Errors and Caut ions 4-8
M
Manager Traps 9-14
map view 4-10
using 4-13
MI B
cont rol met hod C-1
I nt erface API C-1
manager t raps C-35
paramet ers C-3
Reference C-1, C-1, C-1, C-28
st ruct ure, privat e C-2, C-5
support ed variables from RFC 1213 C-3
t erminology C-1
t rap paramet ers C-30
t raps C-28
Minimum Syst em Requirement s 4-1
Mobilit y
creat ing a sect or from HBS t emplat e 8-10
Saving t he HBS Set t ings for Reuse as a Tem-
plat e 8-10
Mount ing
Et hernet Repeat er 3-17
ext ernal ant ennas 3-14
t he Light ning Prot ect ion Devices 3-15
t he ODU (HBS or HSU) 3-13
mount ing
connect orized ODU horizont ally 17-5
ext ernal ant enna 3-14, 17-5
GSU 11-5
light ing prot ect ion unit 18-6
light ning prot ect ion devices 3-14
ODU 3-13
on a pole 17-2
on a wall 17-3
N
Nomadic 6-18, 6-29
O
ODU
grounding 18-2
HBS and HSU A-1
mount ing 3-13
on a pole 17-2
on a wall 17-3
mount ing kit cont ent s 17-1
t o HSS unit connect ion pinout 10-6
t o PoE cable (HBS and HSU) B-1
Online Help 9-16
P
Performance Monit oring 9-9
PoE
DC B-2
GbE, indoor for HBS only A-4
grounding 18-2
indoor, AC A-5
inst alling a sect or using 3-15
out door, DC A-5
t o ODU cable (HBS and HSU) B-1
Pole and Wall I nst allat ion 17-1
Power Over Et hernet Devices - see PoE
Preferences, set t ing 4-30
Q
QoS
overview 16-1
prerequisit es 16-1
set t ing up 16-1
set t ing up an HSU for 16-3
set t ing up t he HBS for 16-2
Qualit y of Service, see QoS
R
RF
Exposure D-1
Planning 2-4
RFP
and HSS 10-7
General Radio Frame Pat t ern 10-6, 10-8
S
Safet y Pract ices 3-1, 3-1
sect or
band
changing 6-35
configurat ion and HSS 10-8
managing 6-1
sit e planning 2-1
St at us Panel 4-16
Securit y 6-10, 6-26, 7-6
Set t ing Manager Preferences 4-30
sit e preparat ion 2-1
Physical Survey 2-3
Preliminary Survey 2-2
RF Survey 2-4
sit e survey 2-1
Soft ware Upgrade 12-1
available 9-5
described 12-1
recommended 9-5
required 9-5
upgrading an inst alled sect or 12-2
Spect rum View 20-1
described 20-1
display funct ion but t ons 20-5
main window, HBS 20-2
running from HBS 20-6
running from HSU 20-8
t wo ways t o run 20-1
where dat a is st ored 20-2
zooming in and out 20-10
Swit ching Bet ween Views 4-12
T
t able view 4-9, 4-20
Telnet
Access t o HBS 6-42
Access t o HSU 6-44
configurat ion wit h 6-42
t erminology 1-2
Throughput Checking 9-5
Tools and Mat erials 3-11
Traps, Manager 9-14
t ypographical convent ions 1-6
U
Unsupport ed Device 4-8
user equipment , connect ing 3-15
user port connect ors B-2
V
view
list 4-11
map 4-10
t able 4-9, 4-20
VLAN
background informat ion on t he WEB 13-1
configurat ion of t agging for Et hernet service
13-6
configurat ion using t he Manager 13-5
funct ionalit y 13-1
management and service separat ion 13-5
port funct ionalit y 13-3
QinQ (Double Tagging) 13-2
requirement s 13-1
t agging 13-1
t erminology 13-1
unt agging 13-3
W
Web I nt erface
advanced configurat ions 21-4
event s 21-12
HBS management 21-6
logging on 21-5
main window 21-12
operat ional effect s 21-4
prerequisit es 21-4, 21-4, 21-4
reset 21-12
t echnical background 21-4
using 21-1
RADWI N 5000 HPMP

RADWIN 500 User Manual 5

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

RADWIN 500 User Manual 5

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

USERMANUAL

También podría gustarte